The vikings at Helgeland; The pretenders;

THE COLLECTED WORKS OF
HENRIK IBSEN

VOLUME II

THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND
THE PRETENDERS

THE COLLECTED WORKS OF

HENRIK IBSEN

Copyright Edition. Complete in 11 Volumes,

Crown 8vo, price 4s. each.
ENTIRELY REVISED AND EDITED BY

WILLIAM ARCHER

Vol. I. Lady Inger, The Feast at Solhoug, Love's

Comedy

Vol. II. The Vikings, The Pretenders
Vol. Ill; Brand
Vol. IV. Peer Gynt
Vol. V. Emperor and Galilean (2 parts)
Vol. VI. The League of Youth, Pillars of Society
VoL VII. A Doll's House, Ghosts
Vol. VIII. An Enemy of the People, The Wild Duck
Vol. IX. Rosmersholm, The Lady from the Sea
Vol. X. Hedda Gabler, The Master Builder
VoL XI; Little Eyolf, John Gabriel Borkman,

When We Dead Awaken

LONDON : WILLIAM HEINEMANN.
21 BEDFORD STREET, W.C

COLLECTED WORKS OF

HENRIK IBSEN

^ Vt\19fi

COPYRIGHT EDITION **-—-- —

• .

VOLUME II

THE VIKINGS AT
HELGELAND

THE PRETENDERS

WITH INTRODUCTIONS BY

WILLIAM ARCHER

LONDON

WILLIAM HEINEMANN
1910

Collected Edition, First printed 1906
Second Impression 1910

Copyright 1906 by Wittiam HeinerrMWH

CONTENTS

PAOB

INTRODUCTION TO "THE VIKINGS AT

HELGELAND" . . , . vii

INTRODUCTION TO " THE PRETENDERS " . xx
" THE YIKINGS AT HELGELAND " . 1

Translated by WILLIAM ARCHER

«*THE PRETENDERS" . . . .117

Translated by WILLIAM ARCHER

THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND.

INTRODUCTION.

IBSEN himself has told us, in his preface to the second
edition of The Feast at Solhoug, how the reading of
the Icelandic family-sagas, suggested to him, in germ,
the theme of The Vikings at Hetgeland. What he
first saw, he says, was the contrasted-figures of the
two women who ultimately became Hiordis and Dagny,
together with a great banquet-scene at which an inter-
change of taunts and gibes should lead to tragic
consequences. So far as one can gather from this
statement, the particular theme which he ultimately
borrowed from the Volsung-Saga had not yet entered
his mind. On the other hand, the conception of the
two women's characters was certainly not new to him,
seeing that a similar contrast presents itself in his
very earliest work, Catilina, between the aptly-named
Furia and the gentle Aurelia ; while even in Lady
Inger of Ostrat it reappears, somewhat disguised,
in the contrast between Inger Gyldenlove and her
daughter Eline. While the scheme of The Vikings
was still entirely vague, however, fresh influences,
both of a personal and of a literary nature, intervened,
and, transposing the theme from the purely dramatic

Viil THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND.

into the lyrical key, he produced The Feast at Solhoug.
The foster-sisters, Hiordis and Dagny became the
sisters Margifc and Signe, and the .bano^uet, instead of
being the culminating-point of the dramatic action,
Became its mere background.

The fact probably is that in 1855 the poet found
himself still unripe for the intense effort of dramatic
concentration involved in such a work as The Vikings.
Probably, too, he knew that neither his actors nor his
public at the Bergen Theatre were prepared to go
back to the primitive austerity of the heroic age, as it
was beginning to body itself forth in his mind. The
good Bergensers were accustomed either to French
intrigue (such as he had given them in Lady Inger), or
to Danish lyrical romanticism ; and he perhaps fore-
saw that the ruling taste of Bergen would be as
hard to contend against as, in the sequel, the ruling
taste of Copenhagen actually proved to be. At all
events, from whatever mingling of motives, he put
the heroic theme aside for two years, while he kept to
the key of lyrical romanticism not only in the Feast at
Solhoug, written in the summer of 1855, but also in
the very feeble Olaf LilieTcrans, conceived much earlier,
but written in 1856. Not until he had left Bergen
behind him and returned to Christiania in the summer
of 1857, did the poet take up again,rand rapidly work
out, the theme of The Vikings. It is almost incon-
ceivable that only a year should have intervened
between it and Olaf Liliekrans.

Paul Botten-Hansen, perhaps Ibsen's closest friend
of those days, has stated that The Vikings was begun
in verse. If so, the metre chosen was probably the
twelve-syllable measure of Oehlenschlager's Balder's
Death, supposed to represent the iambic trimeter of
the Greek dramatists. Jn jui_epB*y On the Heroic

INTRODUCTION. IX

Ballad, written in Bergen in the early months of
1857, Ibsen had condemned, as a medium for the
treatment of Scandinavian themes, the iambic deca-
syllable (our blank verse) in which Oehlenschlager
had written most of his plays, and which Ibsen him-
self had adopted in his early imitation of Oehlensch-
lager, The Hero's Grave. Blank verse Ibsen regarded
as " entirely foreign " to Norwegian-Danish prosody>
and, moreover, a product of Christian influences ;
whereas pagan antiquity, if treated in verse at all,
ought to be treated in the pagan measure of the
Greeks. At the same time we find him expressing a
doubt whether Oehlenschlager's Hakon Jarl might
not have been just as poetic in prose as in verse — a
doubt which clearly shows in what direction his
thoughts were turning. It must be regarded as a
great mercy that he abandoned the iambic trimeter,
which, in Oehlenschlager's hands, was nothing but an
unrhymed Alexandrine with the csesura displaced.

This same essay On the Heroic Ballad throws a
curious light on the difficulties which occasioned the
long delay between the conception and the execution
of The Vikings. He lays it down that " the heroic
ballad is much better fitted than the saga for dramatic
treatment. TJlft.jaga is a great, cold, rounded and
self-contained epos, essentially objective, and exclu-
sive of all lyricism. ... If , now, the poet is to extract
a dramatic work from this epic material, he must
necessarily bring into it a foreign, a lyrical, element ;
for the drama is well known to be a higher blending
of the lyric and the epos." This " well-known "
dogma he probably accepted from the German sesthe-
ticians with whom, about this time, he seems to have
busied himself. A little further on, he adds that the
accommodating prosody of the ballads gives room for

THE VIKINGS AT IIELGELAND.

" many freedoms which are of great importance to
dramatic dialogue," and consequently prophesies a
great future for the drama drawn from this source.
It was a luckless prophecy. He himself, though ap-
parently he little guessed it, had done his last work in
lyrical romance ; and though it has survived, sporadi-
cally, in Danish and even in German literature, it can
count but few masterpieces during the past half-
century. Perhaps, however, Hauptmann's Sunken Bell
might be taken as justifying Ibsen's forecast.1

It must have been very soon after this essay was
published (May 1857) that Ibsen discovered how to
impose dramatic form upon the epic material of the
sagas, without dragging in any foreign lyrical element.
He suddenly saw his way, it would seem, to repro-
ducing in dialogue the terse, unvarnished prose of the
sagas themselves, eloquent in reticence rather than in
rhetorical or lyrical abundance.

Had he, or had he not, in the meantime read
Bjornson's one-act play, Between the Battles? It was
not produced until October 27, 1857, by which time
The Vikings must have been almost, if not quite,
finished. But Ibsen may have seen it in manuscript
several months earlier, and it may have put him on
the track of the form in which to cast his saga-
material. The style of The Vikings is incomparably
firmer, purer,, more homogeneous and clear-cut than
that of Between the Battles ; but Bjornson's mediaeval
comedietta (it is really little more) may quite well
have given Ibsen a valuable impulse towards the
adaptation of the saga-style to drama. The point, how-
ever, is of little moment. It is much more important to

1 Though he himself wrote no more plays in the key of The
Feast at Solhoug, the " accommodating prosody " of the ballads
had doubtless its influence on the metres of Peer Gynt,

T XT T r> f\ TV TT /"> TT f\ W

INTRODUCTION.

V

note that while Ibsen was writing The Vikings Bjornson
was writing his peasant-idyll Synnove SolbakJcen; so that
these two corner-stones of modern Norwegian literature
were laid, to all intents and purposes, simultaneously.

In an autobiographic letter to Peter Hansen,1
written in 1870, Ibsen mentions this play very
briefly : " The Vikings at Hclgeland I wrote whilst I
was engaged to be married. For Hiordis I had the
same model as I took afterwards for Svanhild in
Love's Comedy" More noteworthy is his preface to a
German translation of the play, published in 1876.
It runs as follows :

" In issuing a German translation of one of my
earlter dramatic works, it may not be superfluous to
remark that I have taken the material of this play,
not from the Nibelungenlied, but in part — and in part
only — from a kindred Scandinavian source, the
Volsung-Saga. More essentially, however, my poem
may be said to be founded upon the various Icelandic
family-sagas, in which it often seems that the titanic
conditions and occurrences of the Nibelungenlied and
the Volsung-Saga have simply been reduced to human
dimensions. Hence I think we may conclude that the
situations and events depicted in these two documents
were typically characteristic of our common Germanic
life in the earliest Historical times. If this view be
justified, it disposes of the reproach that in the present
drama our national mythic world is brought down to a
lower plane than that to which it belongs. The ideal-
ised, and in some degree impersonal, myth-figures are
exceedingly ill-adapted for representation on the stage
of to-day ; and, however this may be, it was not my
aim to present our mythic world, but simply our life
in primitive times."

1 Correspondence, Letter 74.

THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND.

The reasoning of this passage does not seem very
cogent ; but it expresses clearly enough the design
which the poet proposed to himself. Before discussing
the merits of the play, however, I may as well com-
plete the outline of its external history.

Part of that external history is written by Ibsen
himself, in letters to the Christiania Press of the day.
In the autumn of 1857, he presented the play to the
Christiania Theatre, then occupied by a Danish
company, under Danish management. After a long
clelay, he ascertained that it had been accepted and
would be produced in March 1858. He then proposed
to consult with the manager as to the casting of the
piece, but found that that functionary had no clear con-
ception of either the plot or the characters, and there-
fore left him a couple of months in which to study it.
At the end of that time the poet again reminded the
potentate of his existence, and learned that " since the
economic status and prospects of the theatre did not
permit of its paying fees for original works," the pro-
posed production could not take place. Ibsen hints that,
had the choice been offered him, he would have con-
sented to the performance of the piece without fee or
reward. As the choice was not offered him, he regarded
the whole episode as a move in the anti-national policy
of the Danish management; and the controversy which
arose out of the incident doubtless contributed to the
nationalisation of the Christiania Theatre — the super-
session of Danish by Norwegian managers, actors and
authors — which took place during the succeeding
decade.

In the meantime, almost simultaneously with the
rejection of the play by the Christiania Theatre, it
was rejected by the Royal Theatre in Copenhagen.
The director, J. L. Heiberg, was then regarded as an

INTRODUCTION.

autocrat in the aesthetic world ; and his report on The
Vikings is now a curiosity of literature. He declared
that nothing was so " monotonous, tiresome and
devoid of all poetry " as the Icelandic family-sagas ;
he could not endure their "wijdness and rawness" on
the stage ; the saga style, as reproduced by Ibsen,
seemed to him " mannered and affected " ; and he
concluded his judgment in these terms : "A Norwegian
theatre will scarcely take its rise from such experi-
ments, and the Danish theatre has fortunately no
need for them."

The play was published in April 1858 as a supple-
ment to a Christiania illustrated paper, the author
receiving an " honorarium " of something less than
£7. On November 24, 1858, it was produced at the
little " Norwegian Theatre " in Christiania, of which
the poet was then director. At the Bergen Theatre it
was produced in 1859, at the Christiania Theatre (by
that time pretty well Norwegianised) in 1861. It
did not make its way to Copenhagen and Stockholm
until 1875. In 1876 it was acted at the Court
Theatres of Munich and Dresden, and at the Vienna
Burgtheater. Thenceforward it was pretty frequently
seen on the German stage ; but it does not seem to
have reached Berlin (Deutsches Theater) until 1890.
In 1892 it was produced in Moscow. The only pro-
duction in the English language of which any account
has reached me took place in 1903 at the Imperial
Theatre, London, when Miss Ellen Terry appeared as
Hiordis and Mr. Oscar Asche as Sigurd. The scenery
and dresses were designed by Miss Terry's son,
Mr. Gordon Craig.

It would need not merely an essay, but a volume, tQ
discuss the relation of The Vikings to its mythic mate-
rial, and to other modern treatmejits of that material

THE VIKINGS AT HELOELAND.

— Friedrich Hebbel'sDze
Ring der Nibelungen, &c. The poet's actual indebted-
ness to the Volsung-Saga is well summarised by Henrik
Jaeger in his " Life of Ibsen " : " Like Sigurd
Fafnir's-bane," he says, " Sigurd Yiking has achieved
the deed which Hiordis (Brynhild) demands of the
man who shall wed her ; and, again like his heroic
namesake, he has renounced her in favour of his
foster-brother, Gunnar, himself taking another to
wife. This other woman reveals the secret in the
course of an altercation with Hiordis (Brynhild), who,
in consequence of this discovery, brings about Sigurd's
death and her own. The reader will observe that we
must keep to very general terms if they are to fit
both the saga and the drama. Are there any further
coincidences ? Yes, one. After Gudrun has betrayed
the secret, there comes a scene in which she seeks to
appease Brynhild, and begs her to think no more of
it ; then follows a scene in which Sigurd explains to
Brynhild how it all happened ; and finally a scene in
which Brynhild goads Gunnar to kill Sigurd. All
these scenes have their parallels in the third act of
The Vikings ; but their order is different, and none of
their wording has been adopted." From the family-
sagas, again, not only the stature of the characters,
so to speak, but several details of incident and dia-
logue are borrowed. The boasting-match at Gunnar's
feast, which, as we have seen, was one of the first
elements of the story to present itself to Ibsen's
mind, has many analogies in Icelandic lore. Ornulf 's
questions as to how Thorolf fell are borrowed from
Egils Saga, and so is the idea of his "drapa," or
funeral chant over his dead sons. Sigurd and Hiordis
, perhaps, almost as closely related to Kiartan and
Gudrun in the Laxdcela Saga as to Sigurd Faf nir's-

INTRODUCTION. XV

bane and Brynhild. Indeed, Ibsen seems to have
reckoned too confidently on the unfamiliarity of his
public with the stores of material upon which he drew.
Not, of course, that there could be any question of
plagiarism. The sagas were as legitimately at Ibsen's
service as were Plutarch and Holinshed at Shake-
speare's. But having been himself, as he tells us,
almost ignorant of the existence of these sagas until
he came across N. M. Petersen's translation of them
he forgot that people who had long known and loved
them might resent the removal of this trait and that
from its original setting, and might hold it to be, in
its new context, degraded and sentimentalised. " It
may be," writes H. H. Boyesen, in his generally
depreciatory remarks on the play, "that my fondness
for these sagas themselves prevents me from relishing
the modification and remoulding to which Ibsen has -~~T*~
subjected them." Dr. Brandes, too, points to a par- I
ticular instance in which the sense of degradation I
could not but be felt. The day-dream as to the hair-
woven bowstring which Hiordis relates to Sigurd in
the third act (p. 84) is in itself effective enough ; but
any one who knows the splendid passage in Niah }
Saga, on which it is founded, cannot but feel that the
actual (or at any rate legendary) event is impoverished
by being dragged in under the guise of a mere morbid
fantasy.

On the whole, I think Ibsen can scarcely escape the
charge of having sentimentalised the sagas in the
same way, though not in the same degree, in which
Tennyson has sentimentalised the Arthurian legends.
Indeed, Sigurd the Strong is not without points of
resemblance to the Blameless King of the Idylls.
But, for my part, I cannot regard this as a very
serious charge. The Vikings is the work of a man

H 6

XVi THE VIKINGS AT HELOELAND

still young (29), who had, moreover, developed very
slowly. It is still steeped in romanticism, though
not in the almost boyish lyricism of its predecessors.
The poet is not yet intellectually mature — very far
from it. ^£ut he.re,. f or , the first time, we are unmis-
takably face to face with a great ' imagination and a
"specifically dramatic endowment of the first order.
THe germs of promise discernible in Lady Inger have
ripened into rare technical mastery.

Ibsen was doubtless right in feeling that the super-
human figures o5~tB'e~ mythical sagas .were impossible
on .tjie non-musical stage, just as Wagner was right in
feeling that tne" world of myth could be embodied only
in an atmosphere of music. The reduction, then, of the
Yolsungs and Niblungs to the stature of the men of
; the family-sagas was not only judicious, but necessary.
But was it judicious to go to the myth-sagas for the
initial idea of a play which had to be developed in
terms of the family-sagas ? Scarcely, I think. The
weak points in the structure of the story are precisely
those at which the poet has had to replace supernatural
by natural machinery. To slay a dragon and to break

| through a wall of fire, even with magical aid, are ex-
ploits which we can accept, on the mythic plane, as
truly stupendous. But it is impossible to be really
impressed by the slaying of Hiordis's bear, or to share
in the breathless admiration with which that achieve-
ment is always mentioned. If the bear is to be re-
garded as a fabulous monster, it might just as well be

/ a dragon at once ; if it is to be accepted as a real
quadruped, the killing of it is no such mighty matter.
We feel it, in fact, to be a mere substitute, a more or
less ludicrous makeshift. And in the same way,
Sigurd's renunciation of Hiordis becomes very difficult
to accept when all supernatural agency — magic potion,

INTRODUCTION.

-or .other sleight of wizardry — is eliminated. We feel
that he beliaves like a nincompoop in despairing of
winning her for himself, merely because she does not
show an obviously " coming on " disposition, and like
an immoral sentimentalist in handing her over to
Gunnar. This^ to ]?e sure, is the poet's own criticism
.pf his action. It is the lie which Sigurd and Gunnar
* J56aiui:fi,=iiiiell, or rather to enact, that lies at the root
o£. .£he,, whole tragedy. We have here Ibsen's first
treatment of the theme with which he is afterwards so
much concerned — the necessity of truth as the basis
of every human relation. Gunnar's acquiescence in
Sigurd's^.}jgmic_men(lacityJ^ as clearly condemned and
punished as, in Pillars of Society, Bernick's acquies-
cence in Johan's almost equally heroic self-sacrifice.
Boih plays convey a warning. .....flgflijlSJ; ....p.ynfiaH<?g ,of

jijybruism, and show that_we have no right , to p^er sacri-
fices which the person benefiting by the^Jha&.no right ...
to accept. But to indicate a correct moral judgment
of Sigurd's action is not to make it psychologically
plausible. We feel, I repeat, that the poet is trying
in vain to rationalise a series of actions which are
comprehensible only on the supernatural plane.

This unreality of plot involved a similar unreality,
or at any rate extreme simplicity, of characterisation.
All the personages are drawn in large, obvious traits,
which never undergo the smallest modification. Sigurd
is throughout the magnanimous hero, Dagny the sub-
missive, amiable wife, Hiordis the valkyrie- virago,
Gjinnar the well-meaning weakling, not cowardly but
:;ent. By far the most human and most, indi-
vidual figure i^old Ornulf^in whom the spirit of the
family-sagas is magnificently incarnated. We feel
throughout the inexperience of the author, his
incuriousness of half-tones in character, his tendency

Xviii THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND.

to view human relations and problems in a purely senti-
ioeiital light. To compare Hiordis with Hedda Gabler,
Sigurd with Halvard Solness, is to realise what an
immeasurable process of evolution the poet was
destined to go through. Indeed, we as yet seem far
enough off even from Duke Skule and Bishop Nicholas.
But the man of inventive imagination and the man
of the theatre are already here in all their strength.
Whatever motives and suggestions Ibsen found in the
sagas, the construction of the play is all his own and
is quite masterly. Exposition, development, the
carrying on of the interest from act to act — all this is
perfect in its kind. The play is " well-made " in the
highest sense of the word. Already the poet shows
himself consummate in his art of gradually lifting veil
after veil from the past, and making each new dis-
covery involve a more or less striking change in the
relations of the persons on the stage. But it is not
technically alone that the play is great. The whole
second act is a superbly designed and modulated piece
of drama ; and, for pure nobility and pathos, the scene
of Ornulf 's return — entirely of the poet's own inven-
tion—is surely one of the greatest things in dramatic
literature. It is marvellous that even aesthetic preju-
dice should have prevented a man like J. L. Heiberg
from recognising that he was here in presence of a
great poet. The interest of the third act is mainly
psychological, and the psychology, as we have seen, is
neither very profound nor very convincing. But the
fourth act, again, rises to. a great height of romantic
impressiveness. Whatever hints may have come from
the sagas, the picture of Ornulf 's effort of self-mastery
is a very noble piece of work ; and the plunge into
supernaturalism at the close, in the child's vision of
Asgardsreien, with his mother leading the rout, seems

INTRODUCTION. XlX

to mean entirely justified piece of imaginative daring.
I cannot even agree with Dr. Brandes in condemning
as "Greheimniskramerei" Sigurd's dying revelation of
the fact that he is a Christian. It seems to me to har-
monise entirely with the whole sentimental colouring
of the play. The worst flaws I find in this act are
the terrible asides placed in the mouths of Ghmnar
and Dagny after the discovery of Sigurd's death.

The word Vikings in the title is a very free rendering
of Hcermcendene, which simply means "warriors." As
"warriors," however, is a colourless word, and as
Ornulf, Sigurd, and Gunnar all are, or have been,
actually vikings, the substitution seemed justifiable. I
would beg, however hopelessly, that " viking " should
be pronounced so as to rhyme not with " liking " but
with " seeking," or at worst with " kicking." Helge-
land, it may be mentioned, is a province or district in
the north of Norway.

Ornulf 's "drapa" and his snatches of verse are
rhymed as well as alliterated in the original. I had
the less hesitation in suppressing the rhyme, as it was
actually foreign to the practice of the skalds.

THE PRETENDERS.

INTRODUCTION.

Six years elapsed between the composition of The
Vikings and that of The Pretenders.1 In the interval
Ibsen wrote Love's Comedy, and brought all the world
of Norwegian philistinism, and (as we should now say)
suburbanism, about his ears. Whereas hitherto his
countrymen had ignored, they now execrated him. In
his autobiographic letter of 1870, to Peter Hansen,he
wrote : " The only person who at that time approved
of the book was my wife. . . . My countrymen ex-
communicated me. All were against me. The fact
that all were against me — that there was no longer any
one outside my own family circle of whom I could
say ' He believes in me ' — must, as you can easily see,
have aroused a mood which found its outlet in The
Pretenders" It is to be noted that this was written
during a period of estrangement from Bjornson. I do
not know what was Bjornson's attitude towards Love's
Comedy in particular ; but there can be no doubt that,
in general, he believed in and encouraged his brother

1 The original title Kongsemnerne might be more literally
translated "The Scions of Royalty." It is rendered by Brandes
in German " Konigsmaterie," or "the stuff from which kings are
made."

INTRODUCTION. XXI

poet, and employed his own growing influence in efforts
to his advantage. In representing himself as standing
quite alone, Ibsen probably forgets, for the moment,
his relation to his great contemporary.

Yet the relation to Bjornson lay at the root of the
character- contrast on which The Pretenders is founded.
Ibsen always insisted that each of his plays gave poetic
form to some motive gathered from his own experience
or observation ; and this is very clearly true of the
present play. Ever since Synnove SolbaJcken had
appeared in 1857, Bjornson, the expansive, eloquent,
lyrical Bjornson, had been the darling child of fortune.
He had gone from success to success unwearied. He
was recognised throughout Scandinavia (in Denmark
no less than in Norway) as the leader of the rising
generation in almost every branch of imaginative
literature. He was full, not only of inspiration and
energy, but of serene self-confidence. Meanwhile
Ibsen, nearly five years older than he, had been pursuing
his slow and painful course of development in compara-
tive obscurity, in humiliating poverty, and amid almost
complete lack of appreciation. " Mr. Ibsen is a great
cipher" (or "nullity ") wrote a critic in 1858 ; another,
in 1863, laid it down that " Ibsen has a certain tech-
nical and artistic talent, but nothing of what can be
called ' genius.' " The scoffs of the critics, however,
were not the sorest trials that he had to bear. What was
hardest to contend against was the doubt as to his own
poetic calling and election that constantly beset him.
This doubt could not but be generated by the very
tardiness of his mental growth. We see him again
and again (in the case of Olaf LilieJcrans, of The
Vikings, of Love's Comedy ,and of The Pretenders itself),
conceiving a plan and then abandoning it for years —
no doubt because he found himself, in one respect er

XXli THE PRETENDERS.

another, unripe for its execution. Every such expe-
rience must have involved for him days and weeks of
fruitless effort and discouragement. To these moods
of scepticism as to his own powers he gave expression
in a series of poems (for the most part sonnets) pub-
lished in 1859 under the title of In the Picture Gallery.
In it he represents the " black elf " of doubt, whisper-
ing to him : "Your soul is like the dry bed of a mountain
stream, in which the singing waters of poetry have
ceased to flow. If a faint sound comes rustling down
the empty channel, do not imagine that it portends
the return of the waters — it is only the dry leaves
eddying before the autumn wind, and pattering among
the barren stones." In those years of struggle and
stress, of depressing criticism, and enervating self-
criticism, he must often have compared his own lot
and his own character with Bjornson's, and perhaps,
too, wondered whether there were no means by which
he could appropriate to himself some of his younger
and more facile brother-poet's kingly self-confidence.
For this relation between two talents he partly found
and partly invented a historic parallel in the relation
between two rival pretenders to the Norwegian throne,
Hakon Hakonsson and Skule Bardsson.

Dr. Brandes, who has admirably expounded the
personal element in the genesis of this play, compares
Hakon-Bjornson and Skule-Ibsen with the Aladdin
and Nureddin of Oehlenschlager's beautiful dramatic
poem. Aladdin is the born genius, serene, light-
hearted, a trifle shallow, who grasps the magic lamp
with an unswerving confidence in his right to it. (" It
is that which the Romans called ingenium" says Bishop
Nicholas, " truly I am not strong in Latin ; but 'twas
called ingenium."') Nureddin, on the other hand, is
the far profounder, more penetrating, but sceptical

INTRODUCTION.

and self -torturing spirit. When at last he seizes
Aladdin's lamp, as Skule annexes Hakon's king's
thought, his knees tremble, and it drops from his
grasp, just as the Genie is ready to obey him.

It is needless to cite the passages from the scenes
between Skule and Bishop Nicholas in the second act,
Skule and HSkon in the third, Skule and Jatgeir in
the fourth, in which this element of personal sym-
bolism is present. The reader will easily recognise
them, while recognising at the same time that their
dramatic appropriateness, their relevance to the historic
situation as the poet viewed it, is never for a moment
impaired. The underlying meaning is never allowed
to distort or denaturalise the surface aspect of the
picture.1 The play may be read, understood, and fully
appreciated, by a person for whom this underlying
meaning has no existence. One does not point it out
as an essential element in the work of art, or even as
adding to its merit, but simply as affording a particu-
larly clear instance of Ibsen's method of interweaving
" Wahrheit " with " Dichtung."

So early as 1858, soon after the completion of The
Vikings, Ibsen had been struck by the dramatic
material in Eakon Hakonsson's Saga, as related by
Snorri Sturlasson's nephew, Sturla Thordsson, and
had sketched a play on the subject. At that time,
however, he put the draft aside. It was only as the
years went on, as he found himself " excommunicated "
after Love's Comedy, and as the contrast between
Bjornson's fortune and his became ever more marked,
that the figures of Skule and H&kon took more and
more hold upon his imagination. In June 1863, he

1 This remark does not apply, of course, to the satiric " para-
basis" uttered by the Bishop's ghost in the fifth act. That is a
totally different matter.

XXlV THE PRETENDERS.

attended a " Festival of Song " at Bergen, and there
met Bjornson, who had been living abroad since
1860. Probably under the stimulus of this meeting
he set to work upon The Pretenders immediately on
his return to Christiania, and wrote it with almost
incredible rapidity. The manuscript went to the
printers in September ; the book was published in
October 1863 (though dated 1864), and the play was
produced at the Christiania Theatre, under the author's
own supervision, on January 17, 1864. The production
was notably successful ; yet no one seems fully to have
realised what it meant for Norwegian literature. Out-
side of Norway, at any rate, it awoke no echo. George
Brandes declares that scarcely a score of copies of the
play found their way to Denmark. Not until Ibsen
had left Norway (April 1864) and had taken the
Danish reading public by storm with Brand and Peer
Gyntj did people go back upon The Pretenders and
discover what an extraordinary achievement it was.
In January 1871, it was produced at the Royal
Theatre, Copenhagen, where Emil Poulsen found in
Bishop Nicholas one of the great triumphs of his
career. It was produced by the Meiningen Company
and at the Munich Hoftheater in 1875, in Stockholm
in 1879, at the Konigliches Schauspielhaus, Berlin, and
at the Yienna Burgtheater in 1891 ; and it has from
time to time been acted at many other Scandinavian
and German theatres. The character of Nicholas has
fascinated many great actors : what a pity that it did
not come in the way of Sir Henry Irving when he was
at the height of his power ! But of course no English
actor-manager would dream of undertaking a character
which dies in the middle of the third act.

Ibsen's treatment of history in this play may be
proposed as a model to other historic dramatists.

INTRODUCTION. XXV

Although he has invented a great deal, his inventions
supplement rather than contradict the records. Chro-
nology, indeed, he treats with considerable freedom,
and at the same time with ingenious vagueness. The
general impression one receives in reading the play is
that the action covers a space of four or five years ; as
a matter of fact it covers twenty-two years, between
the folkmote in Bergen, 1218, and Skule's death, 1240.
All the leading characters are historical ; and although
much is read into them which history does not warrant,
there is little that history absolutely forbids us to con-
ceive. The general features of the struggle between the
two factions — Hakon's Birkebeiner, or Birchlegs, and
Skule's Vargbaelgs — are correctly enough reproduced.
In his treatment of this period, the Norwegian histo-
rian, J. E. Sars, writing thirteen years after the
appearance of The Pretenders, uses terms which might
almost have been suggested by Ibsen's play. " On the
one side," he says, " we find strength and certainty, oil
the other lameness and lack of confidence. The old
Birchlegs * go to work openly and straightforwardly,
like men who are immovably convinced of the justice
of their cause, and unwaveringly assured of its ultimate
victory. Skule's adherents, on the other hand, are
ever seeking by intrigues and chicanery to place
stumbling-blocks in the way of their opponents' en-
thusiasm." H&kon represented Sverre's ideal of a
democratic kingship, independent of the oligarchy of
bishops and barons. " He was," says Sars, " reared in
the firm conviction of his right to the Throne ; he grew
up among the veterans of his grandfather's time, men
imbued with Sverre's principles, from whom he ac-
cepted them as a ready-made system, the realisation

1 The followers of Hakon's grandfather, King Sverre. See
Note, p. 125.

XXVi THE PRETENDERS.

of which could only be a question of time. He stood
from the first in a clear and straightforward position
to which his whole personality corresponded. . . . He
owed his chief strength to the repose and equilibrium
of mind which distinguished him, and had its root in
his unwavering sense of having right and the people's
will upon his side." His great " king's-thought,"
however, seems to be an invention of the poet's.
Skule, on the other hand, represented the old nobility
in its struggle against the new monarchy. " He was
the centre of a hierarchic aristocratic party ; but after
its repeated defeats this party must have been lacking
alike in number and in confidence. ... It was clear
from the first that his attempt to reawaken the old
wars of the succession in Norway was undertaken in
the spirit of the desperate gambler, who does not
count the chances, but throws at random, in the blind
hope that luck may befriend him. . . . Skule's enter-
prise had thus no support in opinion or in any pre-
vailing interest, and one defeat was sufficient to crush
him."

In the character of Bishop Nicholas, too, Ibsen has
widened and deepened his historical material rather
than poetised with a free hand. " Bishop Nicholas,"
says Sars, " represented rather the aristocracy . . .
than the cloth to which he belonged. He had begun
his career as a worldly chieftain, and, as such, taken
part in Magnus Erlingsson's struggles with Sverre ;
and although he must have had some tincture of
letters, since he could contrive to be elected a bishop
. . . there is no lack of indications that his spiritual
lore was not of the deepest. During his long partici-
pation in the civil broils, both under Sverre and later,
we see in him a man to whose character any sort of
religious or ecclesiastical enthusia&m must have been

INTRODUCTION. XXV11

foreign, his leading motives being personal ambition
and vengefulness rather than any care for general
interests — a cold and calculating nature, shrewd but
petty and without any impetus, of whom Ha"kon
Hakonsson, in delivering his funeral speech „ . .
could find nothing better to say than that he had not
his equal in worldly wisdom (veraldar t»<)." I cannot
find that the Bishop played any such prominent part
in the struggle between the King and the Earl as
Ibsen assigns to him, and the only foundation for the
great death-bed scene seems to be the following pas-
sage from Halcon HaJconsson's Saga, Cap. 138 : "As
Bishop Nicholas at that time lay very sick, he sent a
messenger to the King praying him to come to him.
The King had on this expedition seized certain
letters, from which he gathered that the Bishop
had not been true to him. With this he up-
braided him, and the Bishop, confessing it, prayed
the King to forgive him. The King replied that
he did so willingly, for God's sake ; and as he
could discern that the Bishop lay near to death,
he abode with him until God called him from the
world."

In the introduction to The Vikings at Helgeland I
have suggested that in that play Ibsen had reached
imaginative and technical maturity, but was as yet
intellectually immature. The six years that elapsed
between The Vikings and The Pretenders placed him
at the height of his intellectual power. We have
only to compare Skule, H&kon, and Bishop Nicholas
with Gunnar, Sigurd, and Ornulf to feel that we have
passed from nobly-designed and more or less animated
waxworks to complex and profoundly-studied human
beings. There is no Hiordis in The Pretenders, and
the female character-drawing is still controlled by

XXViii THE PRETENDERS.

purely romantic ideals ; * but how exquisitely human
is Margrete in comparison with the almost entirely
conventional Dagny ! The criticism of life, too, which
in The Vikings is ^urely__se,n.tjjiiental, here becomes
ease.aad.Sgarching. The only point of superiority
The Vikings— }f it be a point -of- superiority— is
purely technical. The,,, action. , .of . the. .,,e.aclier ^play is
colicentrat^d and rpundejd. It has all the "unity,"
orC!*? unities," that a rational - criticism can jpossibly
\ / demand. In a word, it is, in form as well as^essejQjje.,
an ideal tr^§4J£, TTie 'Pretenders^ on the other hand,
is a chronicle-play, far more close-knit than Shake-
speare's or Schiller's works in that kind, but, never-
theless, what Aristotle would call " episodic " in its
construction. The weaving of the plot, however, is
quite masterly, betokening an effort of invention
and adjustment incomparably greater than that
which went to the making of The Vikings. It
was doubtless his training in the school of French
intrigue that enabled Ibsen to depict with such
astonishing vigour that master wire-puller, Bishop
Nicholas. This form of technical dexterity he
was afterwards to outgrow and bring into dis-
repute. But from The Vikings to Pillars of
Society he practised, whenever he was writing prima-
rily for the stage, the methods of the " well-made
play " ; and in everything but concentration, which

1 On page 277 will be found a reference to Brandes's Ibsen and
Bjornson; but I may as well give here the substance of the
passage. In the original form of the play, three speeches of
Ingeborg's, in her scene with Skule, ran as follows : " It is man's
right to forget," "It is woman's happiness to remember," and
"To have to sacrifice all and be forgotten, that is woman's
saga." It was only on Brandes's remonstrance that Ibsen sub-
stituted the present form of these speeches, in which they
became, not the generalised expression of an ideal, but merely
utterances of Ingeborg's individual character.

INTRODUCTION. XXIX

the very nature of the subject excluded, The Preten-
ders is thoroughly " well-made."

With this play, though the Scandinavian criticism of
1864 seems to have been far from suspecting the fact,
Ibsen took his place among the great dramatists of the
world. In wealth of characterisation, complexity and
nobility of emotion, and depth of spiritual insight,
it stands high among the masterpieces of romantic
drama. It would be hard to name a more vigorous
character-projection than that of Bishop Nicholas,
or any one dramatic invention more superbly inspired
than the old man's death scene, with the triumphant
completion of his perpetuum mobile. But even if the
Bishop were entirely omitted, the play would not be
Hamlet without the Prince of Denmark. The
characters of Hakon and Skule, and the struggle
between them, would still make one of the greatest
historic dramas in literature.

It has not been generally noticed, I think, that
Ibsen found in Bjornson's King Sverre, published in
1861, a study of Bishop Nicholas in his younger days.
The play, as a whole, is a poor one, and does not
appear in the collected edition of Bjornson's works ;
but there is distinct merit in the drawing of the
Bishop's character. Furthermore, it ought to be
remembered that The Pretenders was not the first work,
or even the first great work, of its class in Norwegian
literature. In 1862, Bjornson had published his splen-
did trilogy of Sigurd Slembe, which, though more fluid
and uneven than The Pretenders, contains several
passages of almost Shakespearean power. It was
certainly greater than anything Ibsen had done up to
that date. Ibsen reviewed it on its appearance, in
terms of unmixed praise, yet, as one cannot but feel,
rather over-cautiously.

XXX THE PRETENDERS.

If anything could excuse the coolness of Norwegian
criticism towards The Pretenders, it was the great and
flagrant artistic blemish of the Ghost Scene in the last
act. This outburst of prophetico-topical satire is a
sheer excrescence on the play, indefensible, but, at
the same time, fortunately negligible. It is, however,
of interest as a symptom of Ibsen's mood in the last
months before he left Norway, and also as one of the
links in that chain which binds all his works together.
Just as Skule's attempt to plagiarise HSkon's king's-
thought points backwards to Gunnar's moral lapse in
taking advantage of the fraud on Hiordis, so the ironic
rhymes of the Bagler-Bishop's ghost point forwards
to the lyric indignation and irony of Brand and Peer
Gynt.

W.A.

THE

VIKINGS AT HELGELAND

(1858)

CHARACTERS.

ORNULF OF THE FIORDS, an Icelandic Chieftain

SIGURD THE STRONG, a Sea-King.

GUNNAR HEADMAN,1 a rich yeoman of Hdgeland,

THOROLF, Ornulf's youngest son.

DAGNT, Ornulfs daughter.

HIORDIS, his foster-daughter.

KARE THE PEASANT, a Helgeland-man.

EGIL, Gunnar's son, four years old.

ORNULF'S six OLDER SONS.

ORNULF'S AND SIGURD'S MEN.

Guests, house-carls, serving -maids, outlaws, etc.

The action takes place in the time of Erik Blood-axe (about
933 A.D.) at, and in the neighbourhood of, Gunnar s houset
&n the island of Helgeland, in the north of Norway.

Pronunciation of Names: Helgeland = Helgheland ; 6rnulf=
Ornoolf ; Sigurd = Sigoord ; Gunnar = Goonnar ; Tborolf=
Toorolf; Hiordis = Yordeess ; Kare = Koare; Egil = Ayghil.
The letter "6 " as in German.

1 Failing to find a better equivalent for the Norwegian
"Herse," I have used the word "Headman" wherever it seemed
necessary to give Gunnar a title or designation. He is generally
spoken of as "Gunnar Herse" in the Norwegian text ; but where
it could be done without inconvenience, the designation has her?
been omitted.

THE
VIKINGS AT HELGELAND.

PLAY IN FOUR ACTS.

ACT FIRST.

rocky coast, running precipitously down to the sea
at the back. To the left, a boat-house ; to the
right, rocks and pinewoods. The masts of two
warships can be seen down in the cove. Far out
to the right, the sea, dotted with reefs and skerries,
on which the surf is running high ; it is a stormy
snow-grey winter-day.

IGURD comes up from the ships ; lie is clad in a
white tunic with a silver belt, a blue cloak, cross-
gartered hose, untanned brogues, and a steel cap ;
at his side hangs a short sword. ORNULF comes
in sight immediately afterwards, high up among
the rocks, clad in a dark lamb-skin tunic with a
breastplate and greaves, woollen stockings, and
untanned brogues ; over his shoulders he has a
cloak of broivn frieze, with the hood draivn over
his steel cap, so that his face is partly hidden.
He is very tall and massively built, with a long
white beard, but is somewhat bowed by age ; his.
weapons are a round shield, sword, and spear.

4 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT I.

SIGURD enters Jirst, looks around, sees the boat-shed,
goes quickly up to it, and tries to burst open the
door.

ORNULF.

[Appears among the rocks, starts on seeing SIGURD,
seems to recognise him, descends and cries :] Give
place, Viking !

SIGURD.

[Turns, lays his hand on his sword, and answers :]
'Twere the first time if I did !

ORNULF.

Thou slialt and must ! I need the shelter for
my stiff-frozen men.

SIGURD.
And I for a weary woman !

ORNULF.
My men are worth more than thy women !

SIGURD.

Then must outlaws be highly prized in Helgo-
land!

ORNULF.

[Raising Jus spear.] Thou shalt pay dear for that
word !

SIGURD.

[Drawing his sword.] Now will it go ill with
thee, old man !

[ORNULF rushes upon him; SIGURD defends

DAGNY and some of SIGURD'S men come up from the
strand ; ORNULF'S six SOILS appear on the rocks
to the right.

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT IIELGELAND. 5

DAGNY.

[Who is a little in front, clad in a red kirtle, blue
cloak, and fur hood, calls down to the ships :] Up, all
Sigurd's men ! My husband is fighting with a
stranger !

ORNULF'S SONS.
Help! Help for our father ! [They descend.

SIGURD.
[To his men.] Hold ! I can master him alone !

ORNULF.

[To his sons.] Let me fight in peace ! [Rushes
in upon SIGURD.] I will 5=ee thy blood !

SIGURD.
First see thine own !

[Wounds him in the arm so that his spear
falls.

ORNULF.
A stout stroke, Viking !

Swift the sword thou swingest,
keen thy blows and biting ;
Sigurd's self, the Stalwart,
stood before thee shame struck.

SIGURD.
[Smiling] Then were his shame his giory !

ORNULF'S SONS.

[With a cry of rvonder] Sigurd himself! Sigurd
the Strong !

ORNULF.

But sharper was thy stroke that night thou
didst bear away Dagny, my daughter.

[Casts his hood back.

6 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT I*

SIGURD AND HIS MEN.
Ornulf of the Fiords !

DAGNY.

[Glad, yet uneasy.] My father and ray brothers

SIGURD.
Stand thou behind me.

ORNULF.

Nay, no need. [Approaching SIGURD.] I no
sooner saw thee than I knew thee, and therefore
I stirred the strife ; I was fain to prove the fame
that tells of thee as the stoutest man of his hands
in Norway. Hereafter let peace be between us.

SIGURD.
Best if so it could be.

ORNULF.

Here is my hand. Thou art a warrior indeed ;
stouter strokes than these has old Ornulf never
given or taken.

SIGURD.

[Seizes his outstretched hand.] Let them be the
last strokes given arid taken between us two ; and
be thou thyself the judge in the matter between
us. Art willing ?

ORNULF.

That am I, and straightway shall the quarrel be
healed. [To the others.] Be the matter, then,
known to all. Five winters ago came Sigurd and
Gunnar Headman as vikings to Iceland ; they lay
in harbour close under my homestead. Then
Gunnar, by force and craft, carried away my

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 7

foster-daughter, Hidrdis ; but thou, Sigurd, didst
take Dagny, my own child, and sailed with her
over the sea. For that I now doom thee to pay
three hundred pieces of silver, and thereby shall
thy misdeed be atoned.

SIGURD.

Fair is thy judgment, Ornulf ; the three hundred
pieces will I pay, and add thereto a silken cloak
fringed with gold. 'Tis a gift from King £vthel-
stan of England, and better has no Icelander yet
borne.

DAGNY.

Well said, my brave husband ; and my father, I
thank thee. Now at last is my mind at ease.

[She presses her father* s and brothers' hands,
and talks low to them.

ORNULF.

Then thus stands the troth between us ; and
from this day shall Dagny be to the full as honour-
ably regarded as though she had been lawfully
betrothed to thee, with the good will of her kin.

SIGURD.

And in me canst thou trust, as in one of thine
own blood.

ORNULF.

That I doubt not, and will forthwith prove thy
friendship.

SIGURD.

Ready shalt thou find me ; say, what dost thou
crave ?

ORNULF.
Thy help in rede and deed. I have sailed hither

8 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND [ACT i.

to Helgoland to seek out Gimnar Headman and
call him to account for the carrying away ot
Hiordis.

SIGURD.
[Surprised.] Ounnar I

DAGNY

[In the same tone.] And Hiordis — where are
they ?

ORNULF
In Gunnar's homestead, I trow

SIGURD
And it is ?

ORNULF.
Not many bow-shots hence ; did ye not know ?

SIGURD.

[With suppressed emotion .] No, truly I have
had scant tidings of Gunnar since we sailed from
Iceland together. While I have wandered far and
wide and served many outland kings, Gunnar
has stayed at home. We made the land here
at daydawn, storm-driven. I knew, indeed, that
Gunnar's homestead lay here in the north,
but

DAGNY.

[To ORNULF.] So that errand has brought thee
hither ?

ORNULF.

That and no other. [To SIGURD.] Our meet-
ing is the work of the Mighty Ones above ; they
willed it so. Had I wished to find thee, little
knew I where to seek.

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 9

SIGURD.

[Thoughtfully.] True, true ! — But concerning
"Gunnar — tell me, Ornulf, art thou minded to go
sharply to work, with all thy might, be it for good
or ill ?

ORNULF.

That must I. Listen, Sigurd, for thus it stands :
Last summer I rode to the Council where many
honourable men were met. When the Council-
days were over, I sat in the hall and drank with
the men of my shire, and the talk fell upon the
carrying-away of the women ; scornful words they
gave me, because for all these years I had let that
wrong rest unavenged. Then, in my wrath, I
swore to sail to Norway, seek out Gunnar, and
crave reckoning or revenge, and never again to
set foot in Iceland till my claim was made good.

SIGURD.

Ay, ay, since so it stands, I see well that if need
be the matter must be pressed home.

ORNULF.

It must ; but I shall not crave overmuch, and
Gunnar has the fame of an honourable man. I
am glad, too, that I set forth on this quest ; the
time lay heavy on me in Iceland ; out upon the
blue waters had I grown old and grey, and me-
seemed that I must fare forth once again before

I ; well well — Bergthora, my good wife, was

dead these many years ; my elder sons sailed on
viking-ventures summer by summer ; and since
Thorolf was growing up

DAGNY.
[Joyfully.] Thorolf is with thee ? Where is he'"

10 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT I.

ORNULF.

On board the ship. [Points towards the back-
ground, to the right.] Scarce shalt thou know the
boy again, so stout and strong and fair has he
grown. He will be a mighty warrior, Sigurd ; one
day he will equal thee.

DAGNY.

[Smiling."] I see it is now as ever: Thorolf stands
nearest thy heart.

ORNULF.

He is the youngest, and like his mother ; there-
fore it is.

SIGURD.
But tell me — thy errand to Gunnar — thinkest

thou to-day ?

ORNULF.

Rather to-day than to-morrow. Fair amends
will content me ; should Gunnar say me nay, then
must he abide what may follow.

KARE THE PEASANT enters hastily from the right ; he
is clad in a grey frieze cloak and low-brimmed
felt hat ; he carries in his hand a broken fence-
rail.

KlRE.

Well met, Vikings !

ORNULF.
Vikings are seldom well met.

RARE.

If ye be honourable men, ye will grant me
refuge among you ; Gunnar Headman's house-
carls are hunting me to slay me.

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 11

ORNULF.
Gunnar's ?

SIGURD.
Then hast thou done him some wrong !

KARE.

I have done myself right. Our cattle grazed
together upon an island, hard by the coast ;
Gunnar's men carried off* my best oxen, and one
of them flouted me for a thrall. Then I raised
my sword against him and slew him.

ORNULF.
That was a lawful deed.

KARE.

But this morning his men came in arms against
me. By good hap I heard of their coming, and
fled ; but my foemen are on my tracks, and short
shrift can I look for at their hands.

SIGURD.

Ill can I believe thee, peasant ! In bygone days
I knew Gunnar as I know myself, and this I wot,
that never did he wrong to a peaceful man.

KlRE.

Gunnar has no part in this wrong-doing ; he is
in the southland ; nay, it is Hib'rdis his wife

DAGNY.

HiOrdis!

ORNULF.
[To himself.] Ay, ay, 'tis like her .'

12 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT I.

RARE.

I offered Gunnar amends for the thrall, and he
was willing ; but then came Hiordis, and egged
her husband on with many scornful words, and
hindered the peace. Since then has Gunnar gone
to the south, and to-day

SIGURD.

[Looking out to the left.] Here comes a band ot
wayfarers towards the north. Is it not ?

RARE.
It is Gunnar himself!

ORNULF.

Be of good heart ; I trow I can make peace
between you.

GUNNAR HEADMAN, with several men, enters from
the left. He is in peaceful attire, wearing a
brown tunic, cross-gartered hose, a blue mantle,
and a broad hat; he has no weapon but a
small axe.

GUNNAR.

[Stops in surprise and uncertainty on seeing the
knot of men.] Ornulf of the Fiords ! Yes,

surely !

ORNULF.
Thou seest aright.

GUNNAR.

[Approaching] Then peace and welcome to
thee in my land, if thou come in peace.

4CT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. IS

ORNULF.

If thy will be as mine, there shall be no strife
between us.

SIGURD.
[Standing forward.] Well met, Gunnar !

GUNNAR.

[Gladly.] Sigurd— foster-brother ! [Shakes his
hand] Now truly, since thou art here, I know
that Ornulf comes in peace. [To ORNULF.] Give
me thy hand, greybeard ! Thy errand here in
the north is lightly guessed : it concerns Hiordis,
thy foster-daughter.

ORNULF.

As thou sayest ; great wrong was done me when
thou didst bear her away from Iceland without
my will.

GUNNAR.

Thy claim is rightful; what the youth has
marred, the man must mend. Long have I
looked for thee, Ornulf, for this cause ; and if
amends content thee, we shall soon be at one.

SIGURD.

So deem I too. Ornulf will not press thee over
hard.

GUNNAR.

[Warmly.] Nay, Ornulf, didst thou crave her
full worth, all my goods were not enough !

ORNULF.
I shall go by law and usage, be sure of that.

14 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT I.

But now another matter. [Pointing to KARE.]
Seest thou yonder man ?

GUNNAR,

Kare! [To ORNULF.] Thoa knowest, then,
that there is a strife between us ?

ORNULF.

Thy men have stolen his cattle, and theft must
be atoned.

GUNNAR.
Murder no less ; he has slain my thrall.

KARE.

Because he flouted me.

GUNNAR.
I have offered thee terms of peace.

KARE.

But Hiordis had no mind to that, and this
morning, whilst thou wert gone, she fell upon me
and now hunts me to my death.

GUNNAR.
[Angrily.] Sayest thou true ? Has she ?

KARE.

True, every word.

ORNULF.

Therefore the peasant besought me to stand by
him, and that will I do.

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 15

GuNNAR.

[After a moment's thought."] Thou hast dealt
honourably with me, Ornulf ; therefore it is fit
that I should yield to th}v will. Hear then,
Kare : I am willing to let the slaying of the thrall
and the wrongs done toward thee quit each
other.

KARE.

[Gives GUNNAR his kand.J It is a good offer;
I am content.

ORNULF.
And he shall have peace for thee and thine ?

GUNNAR.

Peace shall he have, both at home and where
soever he may go.

SIGURD.
[Pointing to the right.] See yonder I

GUNNAR.
[Disturbed.] It is Hiordis !

ORNULF.
With armed men !

KlRE.

She is seeking me !

HIORDIS enters, with a troop of house-carls. She

is clad in black, wearing a kirtle, cloak, and

hood; the men are armed with swords and
axes ; she herself carries a light spear.

HIORDIS.

[Stops on entering] We meet here in force,
meseems.

16 THE VIKINGS AT HELOELAND. [ACT I.

DAGNY.

[Rushes to meet her.] Peace and joy to thee,
Hiordis !

HIORDIS.

[Coldly.] I thank thee. — 'Twas told me thou
wert not far off. [Comes forward, looking sharply
at those assembled] Gunnar, and — Kare, my foe-
man — Ornulf and his sons, and [As she

catches sight of SIGURD, she starts almost imper-
ceptibly, is silent a moment, but collects herself and
says :] Many I see here who are known to me —
but little I know who is best minded towards me.

ORNULF.
We are all well-minded towards thee.

HIORDIS.

If so be, thou wilt not deny to give Kare into
my husband's hands.

ORNULF.
There is no need.

GUNNAR.

There is peace and friendship between us.

HIORDIS.

[With suppressed scorn.] Friendship? Well
well, I know thou art a wise man, Gunnar ! Kare
has found mighty friends, and doubtless thou
deem'st it safest

GUNNAR.

Thy taunts avail not ! [With dignity.] Kare is
at peace for us !

\CT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 17

HlORDIS.

[Restraining herself.] Well and good ; if thou
hast sworn him peace, the vow must be held

GUNNAR.

[Forcibly, but without anger.] It must and it
shall.

ORNULF.

[To HIORDIS.] Another pact had been well-
nigh made ere thy coming.

HIORDIS.
[Sharply.] Between thee arid Gunnar ?

ORNULF.
W*. It had to do with thee.

HIORDIS.

Well can I guess what it had to do with ; but
this I tell thee, foster-father, never shall it be
said that Gunnar let himself be cowed because
thou earnest in arms to the isle. Hadst thou
come alone, a single wayfarer, to our hall, the
quarrel had more easily been healed.

GUNNAR.
Ornulf and his sons come in peace.

HIORDIS.

Mayhap ; but will it sound otherwise in the
mouths of men ; and thou thyself, Gunnar, didst
show scant trust in the peace yesterday, in send-
ing our son Egil to the southland so soon as it
was told us that Ornulf 's warship lay in the fiord.

n B

18 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT I.

SIGURD,

[To GUNNAR.] Didst thou send thy son to the
south ?

HIORDIS.

Ay, that he might be in safety should Ornult
fall upon us.

ORNULF.

Scoff not at that, Hiordis ; what Gunnar has
done may prove wise in the end, if so be thou
hinder the pact.

HIORDIS.

Life must take its chance ; come what will, I
had liever die than save my life by a shameful
pact.

DAGNY.

Sigurd makes atonement, and will not be
deemed the lesser man for that.

HIORDIS.

Sigurd best knows what his own honour can
bear.

SIGURD,
On that score shall I never need reminding.

HIORDIS.

Sigurd has done famous deeds, but bolder than
all was Gunnar's deed, when he slew the white
bear that guarded my bower.

GUNNAR.

[With an embarrassed glance at SIGURD.] Nay,
nay, no more of that !

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 19

ORNULF.

In truth it was the boldest deed that e'er was
seen in Iceland ; and therefore

SIGURD.

The more easily can Gunnar yield, and ne'er be
held faint-hearted.

HIORDIS.

It amends are to be made, amends shall be
craved as well. Bethink thee, Gunnar, of thy
vow !

GUNNAR.

That vow was ill bethought ; wilt thou hold me
to it?

HIORDIS.

That will I, if we two are to dwell under one
roof after this day. Know then, Ornulf, that if
atonement is to be made for the carrying away of
thy foster-daughter, thou, too, must atone for the
slaying of Jokul my father, and the seizing of all
his goods and gear.

ORNULF.

Jokul was slain in fair fight ; l thy kinsmen did
me a worse wrong when they sent thee to Iceland
and beguiled me into adopting2 thee, unwitting
who thou wert.

HltfRDIS.

Honour, and no wrong, was thy lot in fostering
Jokul's daughter.

1 " 1 aerlig holmgaag." The established form of duel in the
viking times was to laud the combatants on one of the rocky
islets rr "holms" that stud the Norwegian coast, and there let
them right it out. Hence " holmgang"= duel.

2 "At knaessette" = to knee-set a child, to take it on cne'i
knee, an irrevocable form of adoption.

20 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT I.

ORNULF.

Nought but strife hast thou brought me, that I
know.

HIORDIS*
Sterner strife may be at hand, if

ORNULF.

I came not hither to bandy words with women !
— Gunnar, hear my last word : art willing to make
atonement ?

HIORDIS.
[To GUNNAR.] Think of thy vow !

GUNNAR.

[To ORNULF.] Thou nearest, I have sworn a
vow, and that must I

ORNULF.

[Irritated.] Enough, enough ! Never shall it
be said that I made atonement for slaying in fair
fight.

HlO'RDIS.

[Forcibly.] Then we defy thee and thine.

ORNULF.

[In rising wrath] And who has the right to
crave atonement for Jokul ? Where are his kins-
men ? There is none alive ! Where is his lawful
avenger ?

HlSRDIS.

That is Gunnar, on my behalf.

ORNULF.

Gunnar ! Ay, hadst thou been betrothed to him
with thy foster-father's good-will, or had he made

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGOLAND. 21

atonement for carrying thee away, then were he
thy father's lawful avenger ; but

DAGNY.

[Apprehensive and imploring.] Father, father )

SIGURD.
[Quickly.] Speak it not !

ORNULF.

[Raising his voice.] Nay, loudly shall it be spoken !
A woman wedded by force has no lawful husband !

GUNNAR.

[Vehemently.} Ornulf!

HIORDIS.

[In a wild outburst.} Flouted and shamed ! [In
a quivering voice.} This— this shalt thou come to
rue !

ORNULF.

[Continuing.} A woman wedded by force is in
law no more than a leman ! Wilt thou regain thine
honour, then must thou

HIORDIS.

[Controlling herself.} Nay, Ornulf, I know better
what is fitting. If I am to be held as Gunnar's
leman — well and good, then must he win me
honour by his deeds — by deeds so mighty that my
shame shall be shame no more ! And thou, Ornulf,
beware ! PI ere our ways part, and from this day
shall I make war at all times upon thee and thine ;
thou shalt know no safety for life or limb, thou,
nor any whom thou [Looking fiercely at KARE.]

22 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT I.

Rare ! Ornulf has stood thy friend, forsooth, and
there is peace between us ; but I counsel thee not
to seek thy home yet awhile ; the man thou
slowest has many avengers, and it well might

befall See, I have shown thee the danger ;

thou must e'en take what follows. Come, Gunnar,
we must gird ourselves for the fight. A famous
deed didst thou do in Iceland, but greater deeds
must be done here, if thou wouldst not have thy
— thy leman shrink with shame from thee and
from herself!

GUNNAR.

Curb thyself, Hiordis ; it is unseemly to bear
thee thus !

DAGNY.

[Imploringly.'] Stay, foster-sister — stay; I will
appease my father.

HIORDIS.

[Without listening to her.] Homewards, home-
wards ! Who could have foretold me that I should
wear out my life as a worthless leman ? But if I
am to bear this life of shame, ay, even for one day
more, then must my husband do such a deed —
such a deed as shall make his name more famous
than all other names of men.

[Goes out to the right.

GUNNAR.

[Softly.'] Sigurd, promise me this, that we shall
have speech together ere thou leave the land.

[Goes out with his men to the right.
[The storm has meanwhile ceased ; the mid-
day sun is now visible, like a red disc, Ion)
upon the rim of the sea.

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. %$

ORNULF.

[Threateningly."] Thou shalt pay dear for this
day's work, foster-daughter !

DAGNY.

Father, father ! Surely thou wilt not harm her !

ORNULF.

Let me be ! Now, Sigurd, now can no amends
avail between Gunnar and me.

SIGURD.
What thinkest thou to do?

ORNULF.

That I know not ; but far and wide shall th«
tale be told how Ornulf of the Fiords came to
Gunnar's hall.

SIGURD.

[With quiet determination.] Maybe; but this I
tell thee, Ornulf, thou shalt never bear arms
against him so long as I am alive.

ORNULF.
So, so ! And what if nought else be my will ?

SIGURD.
It shall not be — let thy will be never so strong.

ORNULF.

[Angrily."] Go then; join thou with my foes;
I dare outface the twain of you !

SIGURD.
Hear me out, Ornulf; the day shall never dawn

24 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT I.

that shall see thee and me at strife. There is
honourable peace between us, Dagny is dearer to
me than weapons or gold, and never shall I forget
that thou art her nearest kinsman.

ORNULF.
There I know thee again, brave Sigurd !

SIGURD.

But Gunnar is my foster-brother; we have
sworn each other faith and friendship. Both in
war and peace have we faced fortune together, and
of all men he is dearest to me. Stout though he
be, he loves not war ; — but as for me, ye know, all
of you, that I shrink not from strife ; yet here I
stand forth, Ornulf, and pray for peace on Gunnar' s
behalf. Let me have my will !

ORNULF.

I cannot ; I should be a scoff to all brave men,
were I to fare empty-handed back to Iceland.

SIGURD.

Thou shalt not fare empty-handed. Here in the
cove my two long-ships are lying, with all the
wealth I have won in my viking-ventures. There
are many costly gifts from outland kings, good
weapons by the chestful, and other priceless
chattels. Take thou one of the ships; choose
which thou wilt, and it shall be thine with all it
contains — be that the atonement for Hiordis, and
let Gunnar be at peace.

ORNULF.
Brave Sigurd, wilt thou do this for Gunnar f

A.CT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 25

SIGURD.
For a faithful friend, no man can do too much.

ORNULF.
Give half thy goods and gear !

SIGURD.

[Urgently."] Take the whole, take both my ships,
take all that is mine, and let me fare with thee to
Iceland as the poorest man in thy train. What
I give, I can win once more; but if thou and
Gunnar come to strife, I shall never see a glad day
again. Now, Ornulf, thy answer ?

ORNULF.

[Reflecting.] Two good long-ships, weapons, and
other chattels — too much gear can no man have ;

but [Vehemently.] No, no! — Hiordis has

threatened me ; I will not ! I were dishonoured
should I take thy goods !

SIGURD.
Yet listen

ORNULF.

No, I say ! I must fight for my own right, be
rny fortune what it may.

RARE.

[Approaching.] Right friendly is Sigurd's rede,
but if thou wilt indeed fight thine own battle with
all thy might, I can counsel thee better. Dream
not of atonement so long as Hiordis has aught to
say ; but revenge can be thine if thou wilt hearken
to me.

26 THE VIKING'S AT HELGELAND. [ACT i.

ORNULF.
Revenge ? What dost thou counsel ?

SIGURD. v

Evil, I can well see !

DAG NY,
[To ORNULF.] Oh, do not hear him !

KARE.

Hidrdis has declared me an outlaw ; she will set
snares for my life ; do thou swear to see me scathe-
less, and this night will I burn Gunnar's hall and
all within it. Is that to thy mind ?

SIGURD.
Dastard !

ORNULF.

[Quietly.'] To my mind ? Knowest thou, Kare,
what were more to my mind ? [In a voice of thunder.]
To hew off' thy nose and ears, thou vile thrall.
Little dost thou know old Ornulf if thou thinkest
to have his help in such a deed of shame !

KARE.

[Who has shrunk backwards] If thou fall not
upon Gunnar he will surely fall upon thee.

ORNULF.

Have I not weapons, and strength to wield
them ?

SIGURD.

[To KARE.] And now away with thee ! Thy
presence is a shame to honourable men !

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAttD

27

KlRE.

[Going off.] Well well, I must shift for myselt
as best I may. But this I tell you : if ye think to
deal gently with Hiordis, ye will come to rue it. I
know her — and I know where to strike her
sorest ' [Goes down towards the shore.

DAGNY.

He is hatching some revenge. Sigurd, it must
be hindered !

ORNULF.

[Angrily. .] Nay, let him do as he will ; she is
worth no better !

DAGNY.

That meanest thou not ; bethink thee, she is thy
foster-child.

ORNULF.

Woe worth the day when I took her under my
roof ! Jokul's words begin to come true.

SIGURD.
Jokul's ?

ORNULF.

Ay, her father's. When I gave him his death-
wound he fell back upon the sward, and fixed his
eyes on me and sang :

Jokul's kin for Jokul's slayer
many a woe shall still be weaving;
Jokul's hoard whoe'er shall harry
thence shall harvest little gladness.
When he had sung that, he was silent awhile, and
laughed ; and thereupon he died.

SIGURD.
Why should' st thou heed his words ?

2$ Tttf, VIKJlfftS AT HBLGELAND. [ACT I.

ORNULF.

Who knows ? The story goes, and many believe
it, that Jokul gave his children a wolfs heart to
eat, that they might be fierce and fell ; and Hiordis
has surely had her share, that one can well see.
[Breaks off on looking out towards the right.] Gunnar!
— Do we two meet again !

GUNNAR.

[Enters.! Ay, Ornulf, think of me what thou
wilt, but 1 cannot part from thee as thy foe.

ORNULF.
What is thy purpose ?

GUNNAR.

To hold out the hand of peace to thee ere thou
depart. Hear me all of you : go with me to my
homestead, and be my guests as long as ye will.
We lack not meat or drink or sleeping-room, and
there shall be no talk of our quarrel either to-day
or to-morrow.

SIGURD.

But Hiordis ?

GUNNAR.

Yields to my will ; she changed her thought on
the homeward way, and deemed, as I did, that we
would soon be at one if ye would but be our
guests.

DAGNY.

Yes, yes ; let it be so.

SIGURD.
[Doubtfully.] But I know not if

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 29

DAGNY.

Gunnar is thy foster-brother; little I know
thee if thou say him nay.

GUNNAR.

[To SIGURD. j Thou hast been my friend
where'er we fared; thou wilt not thwart me
now '

DAGNY.

And to depart from the land, leaving HiOrdis
with hate in her heart — no, no, that must we not !

GUNNAR.

I have done Ornulf a great wrong ; until it is
made good, I cannot be at peace with myself.

SIGURD.

[Vehemently.} All else will I do for thee,
Gunnar, but not stay here ! [Mastering himself.]
I am King ^Ethelstan's sworn henchman, and I
must be with him in England ere the winter is out.

DAGNY.
But that thou canst be, none the less !

GUNNAR.

No man can know what lot awaits him ; mayhap
this is our last meeting, Sigurd, and thou wilt
repent that thou didst not stand by me to the end.

DAGNY.

And long will it be ere thou see me glad again,
if thou set sail to-day.

SO THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT I

SIGURD.
[Determined.] Well, be it so ! It shall be as ye

although But no more of that ; here

is my hand ; I will stay to feast with thee and
Hiordis.

GUNNAR.

[Shakes his hand.] I knew it, Sigurd, and I thank
thee. — And thou, Ornulf, say'st thou likewise ?

ORNULF.

[Gruffly] I shall think upon it. Bitterly has
Hiordis galled me ; — I will not answer to-day.

GUNNAR.

It is well, old warrior ; Sigurd and Dagriy will
know how to smooth thy brow. Now must I
prepare the feast ; peace be with you the while,
and well met in my hall. [Goes out by the right.

SIGURD.

[To himself.] Hiordis has changed her thought,
said he ? Little he knows her ; I rather deem

that she is plotting [Interrupting himself and

turning to his men.] Conie^ follow me all to the
ships ; good gifts will I choose for Gunnar and his
household.

DAGNY.

Gifts of the best we have. And thou, father —
thou shalt have no peace for me until thou yield
thee.

[She goes with SIGURD and his men down
towards the shore at the back.

OHNULF.
Yield me ? Ay, if there were 110 women-folk

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 31

in Gunnar's house, then Oh, if I but knew

where to strike her ! — Thorolf, thou here !

THOROLF.

[Who has entered hastily.] As thou seest. Is it
true that thou hast met with Gunnar ?

ORNULF.
Yes.

THOROLF.
And art at strife with him ?

ORNULF.
H'm — with Hiordis, at least

THOROLF.

Then be of good cheer ; soon shalt thou be
avenged !

ORNULF.
Avenged ? Who shall avenge me ?

THOROLF.

Listen : as I stood on board the ship, there
came a man running, with a staff in his hand, and
called to me : " If thou be of Ornulf s shipfolk,
then greet him from Kare the Peasant, and say
that now will I avenge the twain of us." There-
upon he took a boat and rowed away, saying as he
passed: "Twenty outlaws are at haven in the
fiord; with them I fare southward, and ere
eventide shall Hiordis be childless.'1

ORNULF.

He said that ! Ha, now I understand ; Gunnar
has sent his son away; Kare is at feud with
him

32 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT I.

THOROLF.

And now he is rowing southward to slay the
boy!

ORNULF.

[ With sudden resolution.] Up, all ! That booty
will we fight for '

THOROLF.
What wilt thou do ?

ORNULF.

Leave that to me ; it shall be I, and not Kare,
that will take revenge !

THOROLF.
I will go with thee !

ORNULF.

Nay, do thou follow with Sigurd and thy sister
to Gunnar's hall.

THOROLF.
Sigurd ? Is he in the isle ?

ORNULF.

There may'st thou see his warships ; we are at
one — do thou go with him.

THOROLF.
Among thy foes ?

ORNULF.

Go thou to the feast. Now shall Hiordis learn
to know old Ornulf ! But hark thee, Thorolf, to
no one must thou speak of what I purpose ; dost
hear ? to no one !

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 33

THOROLF.

I promise.

ORNULF.

[Takes his hand and looks at him affectionately.']
Farewell then, my fair boy; bear thee in courtly
wise at the feast-house, that I may have honour
of thee. Beware of idle babbling ; but what thou
sayest, let it be keen as a sword. Be friendly to
those that deal with thee in friendly wise ; but if
thou be taunted, hold not thy peace. Drink not
more than thou canst bear ; but put not the horn
aside when it is offered thee in measure, lest thou
be deemed womanish.

THOROLF.
Nay, be at ease !

ORNULF.

Then away to the feast at Gunnar's hall. I
too will come to the feast, and that in the guise
they least think of. [Blithely to the rest.} Come,
my wolf-cubs ; be your fangs keen ; — now shall
ye~ have blood to drink.

[He goes off with his elder sons to the right,
at the back.

SIGURD and DAGNY come up from the ships, richly
dressed for the banquet. They are followed by
two men, carrying a chest, who lay it down and
return as they came.

THOROLF.

[Looking out after his father} Now fare they all
forth to fight, and I must stay behind; it is hard
to be the youngest of the house. — Dagny ! all
hail and greetings to thee, sister mine !

II C

34 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT I.

DAGNY.

Thorolf ! All good powers ! — thou art a man,
grown !

THOROLF.
That may I well be, forsooth, in five years

DAGNY.

Ay, true, true.

SIGURD.

[Giving him his hand.] In thee will Ornulf find
a stout carl, or 1 mistake me.

THOROLF.
Would he but prove me !

DAGNY.

[Smiling."] He spares thee more than thou hast
a mind to ? Thou wast ever well-nigh too dear
to him.

SIGURD.

Whither has he gone ?

THOROLF.
Down to his ship ; — go you on ; he will follow.

SIGURD.

I await my men ; they are mooring my ships
and bringing ashore wares.

THOROLF.

There must I lend a hand !

[Goes down towards the shore.

SIGURD.
[After a moment* reflection.] Dagny, my wife,

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 35

now that we are alone, I have that to tell thee
which must no longer be hidden.

DAGNY.
[Surprised.'] What meanest thou ?

SIGURD.

There may be danger in this faring to Gunnar's
hall.

DAGNY.
Danger ? Thinkest thou that Gunnar - ?

SIGURD.

Nay, Gunnar is brave and true — yet better had
it been that I had sailed from the isle without
crossing his threshold.

DAGNY.
Thou makest me fear ! Sigurd, what is amiss ?

SIGURD.

First answer me this : the golden ring .jtjb&j; I
gave thee, where hast thou it ?

DAGNY.
[Showing itJ\ Here, on my arm ; thou badest me

SIGURD.

Cast it to the bottom of the sea, so deep that
none may ever set eyes on it again ; else may it
be the bane of many men !

DAGNY.
The ring !

SIGURD.

[In a low voice.] That night when we bore
away the twain of you — dost remember ?

36 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT 1.

DAGNY.
Da I remember !

SIGURD.
It is of that I would speak.

DAGNY.

[In suspense.] What is it ? Say on !

SIGURD.

Thou knowest there had been a feast; thou

didst seek thy chamber betimes ; but Hiordis still

sat among the men in the feast-hall. The horn

went busily round, and many a great vow was

! sworn. I swore to bear away a fair maid with me

\ from Iceland ; Gunnar swore the , sarnje.J>as_I^and

passed the cup to^ Hi5fdis._ .jShe« , grasped it and

; stood up^au^^ zip warrior

ishould have her/to. wife, save him ,who should go to

her bower, slay tbe white bear that stood bound

|a£the door, and carry her away in his arms.

DAGNY.
Yes, yes ; all this I know !

SIGURD.

All men deemed that it might not be, for the
bear was the fiercest of beasts ; none but Hiordis
might come near it, and it had the strength of
twenty men.

DAGNY.

But Gunnar slew it, and by that deed won fame
throughout all lands.

SIGURD.

\In a low voice.] He won the fame — but — I did
the deed !

ACT I.J THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 37

DAGNY.

[With a cry.] Thou!

SIGURD.

When the men left the feast-hall, Gunnar
prayed me to come with him alone to our sleeping-
place. Then said he : " Hidrdis is dearer to me
than all women ; without her I cannot live." I
answered him: "Then go to her bower; thou
kiiowest the vow she hath sworn." But he said :
" Life is dear to him that loves ; if I should assail
the bear, the end were doubtful, and I am loath to
lose my life, for then should I lose Hiordis too."
Long did we talk, and the end was that Gunnar
made ready his ship, while I drew my sword, took
Gunnar's harness upon me, and went to the
bower.

DAGNY.

[With pride and joy.] And thou — thou didst
slay the bear !

SIGURD.

I slew him. In the bower it was dark as under
a raven's wing; Hioidis deemed it was Gunnai
that sat by her — she was heated with the mead — .
she drew a ring from her arm and gave it to me —
it is that thou vvearest now.

DAGNY.

[Hesitating.] And thou wast alone that night
with Hiordis in her bower ?

SIGURD.

My sword lay drawn between us. [A short
pause.] Ere the dawn, I bore Hiordis to
Gunnar's ship ; she dreamed not of our guile, and
he sailed away with her. Then went I to thy

38 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT I.

sleeping-place and found thee there among thy
women ; — what followed, thou knowest ; I sailed
from Iceland with a fair maid, as I had sworn, and
from that day hast thou stood faithfully at my
side whithersoever I have wandered.

DAGNY.

[Muck moved.] My brave husband ! And that
great deed was thine ! — Oh, I should have known
it ; it could have been none else ! Hiordis, that
proud and stately woman, couldst thou have won,
yet didst choose me ! Now would st thou be
tenfold dearer to me, wert thou not already
dearer than all the world.

SIGURD.

Dagny, my sweet wife, now thou knowest all
— that need be known. I could not but warn
thee ; for that ring — Hiordis must never see it !
Wouldst thou do my will, then cast it from thee
— into the depths of the sea.

DAGNY.

Nay, Sigurd, it is too dear to me ; is it not thy
gift ? But be at ease, I will hide it from every
eye, and never shall I breathe a word of what thou
hast told me.

THOROLF comes up from the ships, with SIGURD'S men.

THOROLF.
All is ready for the feast.

DAGNY.

Come then, Sigurd — my brave, my noble
warrior \

ACT I.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 39

SIGURD.

Beware, Dagny — beware ! With thee it rests
now whether this meeting shall end in peace or in
blood. [Cheerfully to the others .] Away then, to
the feast in Guniiar's hall !

[Goes out with DAGNY to the right; the
others follow.

ACT SECOND.

The feast-room in GUNNAR.'^./^^^ The entrance-
""* (fcffif'favri the back ; smaller doors in the side-
walls. In front, on the left, the greater high-
seat ; opposite it, on the right, the lesser. In
the middle of thejloor, a mood fire is burning on
a built-up hearth. In the background, on both
sides of the door, are daises for the women of the
household. From each of the high-seats, a long
table, with benches, stretches backwards, parallel
with the wall. It is dark outside ; the fire
lights the room.

HIORDIS and DAGNY enter from the right.

DAGNY.

Nay, Hiordis, it passes my wit to understand
thee. Thou hast shown me all the house ; I know
not what thing thou lackest, and all thou hast is
fair and goodly ; — then why bemoan thy lot ?

HIORDIS.

Cage an eagle and it will bite at the wires, be
they of iron or of gold.

DAGNY.

In one thing at least thou art richer than I ;
thou hast Egil, thy little son.

ACT II.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 41

HlORDIS.

Better no child, than one born in shame,

DAGNY.
In shame ?

HlORDIS.

Dost thou forget thy father's saying ? Egil is
the son of a leman ; that was his word,

DAGNY.

A word spoken in wrath — why wilt thou heed
it?

HlORDIS.

Nay, nay, Ornulf was right ; £gil is weak ; one
can see he is no freeborn child. ~~"

DAGNY.
Hiordis, how canst thou ?

HlORDIS.

[Unheeding.] Doubt not that shame can be
sucked into the blood, like the venom of a snake-
bite. Of another mettle are the freeborn sons of
mighty men. I have heard of a queen that took
her son and sewed his kirtle fast to his flesh, yet
he never blinked an eye. [With an evil look.]
Dagny, that will I try with Egil !

DAGNY.

[Horrified.'] Hiordis, Hiordis !

HlORDIS.

[Laughing.] Ha-ha-ha ! Dost thou think I
meant my words ? [Changing her tone] But,
believe me or not as thou wilt, there are times

42 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT II.

when such deeds seem to lure me. Doubtless
it is in my blood — far I am of the race of the
Jotuns,1 they say.— Come, sit thou here, Dagny.
Far hast thou wandered in these five long years ;
tell me, thou hast ofttimes been a guest in the
halls of kings ?

BAGNY.

Many a time — and chiefly with /Ethels tan of
England.

HIORDIS.

And everywhere thou hast been held in honour,
and hast sat in the highest seats at the board ?

DAGNY.

Doubtless. As Sigurd's wife

HIORDIS.

Ay, ay — a famous man is Sigurd — though
Gunnar stands above him.

DAGNY.

Gunnar ?

HIORDIS.

One deed did Gunnar do that Sigurd shrank
from. But let that be ! Tell me, when Sigurd
went a-viking and thou with him, when thou
didst hear the sword-blades sing in the fierce war-
game, when the blood streamed red on the deck —
came there not over thee an untameable longing
to plunge into the strife? Didst thou not don
harness and take up arms ?

I The giants or Titans of Scandinavian mythology.

ACT Il.J *HE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 4-3

DAGNY.

Never! How canst thou think it? I, a
woman !

HIORDIS.

A woman, a woman.- — who knows what a woman
may do ! — But one thing thou canst tell me,
Dagny, for that thou surely knowest : when a man
clasps to his breast the woman he loves — is it true
that her blood burns, that her bosom throbs —
that she swoons in a strange ecstasy ?

DAGNY.
[Blushing.'] Hiordis, how canst thou !

HIORDIS.
Come, tell me !

DAGNY.

Surely thou thyself hast known it.

HIORDIS.

Ay once, and only once ; it was that night when
Gunnar sat with me in my bower ; he crushed
me in his arms till my byrniei burst, and then,

then !

DAGNY.

[Exclaming.] What ! Sigurd !

HIORDIS.

Sigurd ? What of Sigurd ? I spoke of Gunnar
r— that night when he bore me away

Breastplate,

44 THE VIKINGS AT HELGOLAND. [ACT II.

DAGNY.

[Collecting herself.] Yes, yes, I remember. —

I know well

HIORDIS.

That was the only time ; never, never again !
I deemed I was bewitched ; for that Gunnar could

so clasp a woman [Stops and looks at DAGNY.]

What ails thee ? Methinks thou turnest pale and
red!

DAGNY.
Nay, nay !

HIORDIS.

[Without heeding her.] Aye, the merry
viking-raid should have been my lot; it had been
better for me, and — mayhap for all of us. That
were life, full and rich life ! Dost thou not
wonder, Dagny, to find me here alive ? Art not
afraid to be alone with me in the hall, thus in the
dark ? Deem'st thou not that I must have died
in all these years, and that it is my ghost that
stands at thy side ?

DAGNY.

[Painfully ill at ease.] Come — let us go — to the
others

HIORDIS.

[Seizing her by the arm.] No, stay ! Seems it
not strange to thee, Dagny, that any woman can
yet live who has spent here five such nights ?

DAGNY.
Five nights ?

HIORDIS.

Here in the north each night is a whole winter
long. [Quickly and with an altered expression.] Yet

ACT II.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 45

the place is fair enough, doubt it not ! Thou
shalt see sights here such as thou hast not seen in
the halls of the English king. We shall be
together as sisters whilst thou bidest with me ;
we shall go down to the sea when the storm blows
up afresh; thou shalt see the billows racing to the
land like wild, white -maned horses. And then
the whales far out in the offing ! They dash one
against another like steel-clad warriors ! Ha,
what joy to be a witch-wife and ride on a whale's
back — to speed before the bark, and wake the
storm, and lure men to the deeps with lovely
songs of sorcery !

DAGNY.
Fie, Hiordis, how canst thou speak such things !

HIORDIS.
Canst thou sing sorceries, Dagny ?

DAGNY.

[With horror.] I!

HIORDIS.

I trow thou canst ; how else didst thou lure
Sigurd to thee ?

DAGNY.
Thy speech is shameful ; let me go !

HIORDIS.

[Holding her back.] Because I jest ! Nay, hear
me to the end ! Think, Dagny, what it is to sit
by the window in the eventide and hear the
kelpiei wailing in the boat-house ; to sit waiting
and listening for the dead men's ride to Valhal ;

1 " Draugen," a vague and horrible sea-monster.

46 THE VIKINGS AT HELGE1,AND [ACT II.

for their way lies past us here in the north. They
are the brave men that fell in fight, the strong
women that did not drag out their lives tamely,
like thee and me ; they sweep through the air in
cloud-rack and storm, on their black horses, with
jangling bells ! [Embraces DAGNY, and presses her
wildly in her arms.] Ha, Dagny ! think of riding
the last ride on so rare a steed !

DAGNY.

[Struggling to escape.] Hiordis, Hiordis ! Let
me go ! I will not hear thee !

HIORDIS.

[Laughing.] Weak art thou of heart, and easily
affrighted.

GUNNAR enters from the back, with SIGURD
and THOROLF.

GUNNAR.

Now, truly, are all things to my very mind ! I
have found thee again, Sigurd, my brave brother,
as kind and true as of old. I have Ornulf s son
under my roof, and the old man himself follows
speedily after ; is it not so ?

THOROLF.
So he promised.

GUNNAR.

Then all I lack is that Egil should be here.

THOROLF.

'Tis plain thou lovest the boy, thou namest
him so oft.

GUNNAR.

Truly I love him ; he is my only child ; and he
is like to grow up fair and kindly.

ACT II.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 4?

HlORDIS.

But no warrior.

GUNNAR.

Nay — that thou must not say.

SIGURD.
How couldst thou send him from thee

GUNNAR.

Would that I had not ! [In an undertone.] But
thou knowest, Sigurd, he who loves overmuch,
takes not always the manliest part. [Aloud.] I
had few men in my house, and none could be
sure of his life when it was known that Ornulf
lay in the cove with a ship of war.

HlORDIS.

One thing I know that ought first to be made
safe, life afterwards.

THOROLF.
And that is ?

HlORDIS.

Honour and fame among men.

GUNNAR.
Hidrdis !

SIGURD.

It shall not be said of Gunnar that he has
tainted his honour by doing this.

GUNNAR.

[Sternly."] No one shall make strife between
me and Ornulf 's kinsfolk !

48 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT II.

HlORDIS.

[Smiling.'] Tell me, Sigurd — can thy ship sail
with any wind ?

SIGURD.
Ay, when 'tis cunningly steered.

HlORDIS.

Good ! I too will steer my ship cunningly, and
make my way whither I will.

[Retires towards the back.

DAGNY.

[Whispers, uneasily.] Sigurd, let us hence — this
very night !

SIGURD.
It is too late now ; 'twas thou that

DAGNY.

Then I held Hiordis dear ; but now ; I

have heard her speak words I shudder to think of.

SIGURD'S men, with other guests, men and women,
house-carls and handmaidens, enter *rom the
back.

GUNNAR.

[After a short pause, in which greetings and the
like are exchanged.] Now to the board ! My chief
guest, Ornulf of the Fiords, comes later; so
Thorolf promises.

HIORDIS.

[To the house-folk.] Pass the ale and mead
around, that hearts may wax merry and tongues
may be loosed.

[GUNNAR leads SIGURD to the high-seat on
the right. DAGNY seats herself on

ACT II.] THE VIKINGS AT HELOELAND. 49

SIGURD'S right, HIORDIS opposite him, at
the other side of the same table. THOROLF
is in like manner ushered to a place at
the other table, and thus sits opposite
GUNNAR, rvho occupies the greater high-
seat. The others take their seats further
back.

HIORDIS.

[After a pause in which they drink with each other
and converse quietly across the tables.'] It seldom
chances that so many brave men are seated
together, as I see to-night in our hall. It were
fitting, then, that we should essay the old pastime :
Let each man name the chief of his deeds, that
all may judge which is the mightiest.

GUNNAR.

That is an ill custom at a drinking-feast ; 'twill
oft breed strife.

HIORDIS.
Little did I deem that Gunnar was afraid.

SIGURD.

That no one deems ; but it were long ere we
came to an end, were we all to tell of our deeds,
so many as we be. Do thou rather tell us,
Gunnar, of thy journey to Biarmeland ; 'tis no
small exploit to fare so far to the north, and
gladly would we hear of it.

HIORDIS.

The journey to Biarmeland is chapman's work,
and little worthy to be named among warriors.
Nay, do thou begin, Sigurd, if thou wouldst not
have me deem that thou canst ill endure to hear

50 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT II.

my husband's praise ! Say on ; name that one of
thy deeds which thou dost prize the highest.

SIGURD.

Well, since thou wilt have it so, so must it be.
Let it be told, then, that I lay a-viking among
the Orkneys ; there came foemeii against us, but
we swept them from their ships, and I fought
alone against eight men.

HIORDIS.

Good was that deed; but wert thou fully
armed ?

SIGURD.
Fully armed, with axe, spear, and sword.

HIORDIS.

Still the deed was good. Now must thou, my
husband, name that which thou deemest the
chief among thy exploits.

GUNNAR.

[Unwillingly.] I slew two berserkers who had
seized a merchant-ship ; and thereupon I sent
the captive chapmen home, giving them their
ship freely, without ransom. The King of
England deemed well of that deed ; he said that
I had done honourably, and gave me thanks and
good gifts.

HIORDIS.

Nay truly, Gunnar, a better deed than that
couldst thou name.

GUNNAR.
[Vehemently.] I will take praise for no other

ACT II.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 61

deed ! Since last I fared from Iceland I have
lived at peace and traded in merchandise. No
word more on this matter !

HIORDIS.

If thou thyself wilt hide thy renown, thy wife
shall speak.

GUNNAR.

Peace, Hiordis — I command thee !

HIORDIS.

Sigurd fought with eight men, being fully
armed ; Gunnar came to my bower in the black
night, slew the bear that had twenty men's
strength, and yet had but a short sword in his
hand.

GUNNAR.
[Violently agitated.] Woman, not a word more !

DAGNV.

[Softly .] Sigurd, wilt thou endure ?

SIGURD.
[Likewise.] Be still .'

HIORDIS.

[To the company.] And now, ye brave men —
which is the mightier, Sigurd or Gunnar ?

GUNNAR.
Silence !

HIORDIS.

[Loudly.] Speak out; I have the right to
crave judgment.

52 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT II.

AN OLD MAN.

[Among the guests.] If the truth be told, then
is Gunnar's deed greater than all other deeds
of men ; Gunnar is the mightiest warrior, and
Sigurd is second to him.

GUNNAR.

[With a glance across the table.] Ah, Sigurd,
Sigurd, didst thou but know !

DAGNY.
[Softly.] It is too much — friend though he be!

SIGURD.

Peace, wife ! [Aloud, to the others.] Ay truly,
Gunnar is the most honourable of all men ; so
would I esteem him to my dying day, even had
he never done that deed ; for that I hold more
lightly than ye.

HIORDIS.
There speaks thy envy, Sigurd Viking !

SIGURD.
Mightily dost thou mistake. [Kindly,

to GUNNAR, drinking to him across the table. ~\ Hail,
noble Gunnar ; our friendship shall stand fast,
whosoever may seek to break it.

HIORDIS.
No one, that I wot of, has such a thought.

SIGURD.
Say not so; I could almost think thou hadst

ACT II.] THE VIKINGS AT HEL6ELAND. 53

bidden us to the feast in the hope to stir up
strife.

HIORDIS.

That is like thee, Sigurd ; now art thou wroth
that thou may'st not be held the mightiest man
at the board

SIGURD.

I have ever esteemed Gunnar more highly than
myself.

HIORDIS.
Well, well — second to Gunnar is still a good

f)lace, and [ivith a side glance at THOROLF] had

Ornulf been here, he could have had the third
seat.

THOROLF.

Then would Jokul, thy father, find a low place
indeed ; for he fell before Ornulf.

[The following dispute is carried on, by
both parties, with rising and yet repressed
irritation.

HIORDIS.

That shalt thou never say ! Ornulf is a skald,
and men whisper that he has praised himself for
greater deeds than he has done.

THOROLF.

Then woe to him who whispers so loudly that
it comes to my ear !

HIORDIS.

[With a smile of provocation.] Wouldst thou
avenge it ?

54 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT II.

THOROLF.

Ay, so that my vengeance should be told of far
and wide.

HIORDIS.

Then here I pledge a cup to this, that thou
may'st first have a beard on thy chin.

THOROLF.

Even a beardless lad is too good to wrangle
with women.

HIORDIS.

But too weak to fight with men ; therefore thy
father let thee lie by the hearth at home in
Iceland, whilst thy brothers went a-viking.

THOROLF.

It had been well had he kept as good an eye
on thee ; for then hadst thou not left the land an
unwcdded woman.

GUNNAR AND SlGURD.

Thorolf!

DAGNY.

[Simultaneously. ] Brother !

HIORDIS.

[Softly, and quivering with rage. ] Ha ! wait —
wait!

THOROLF.

[Gives GUNNAR his hand.] Be not wroth,
Gunnar ; — evil words came to my tongue ; but thy
wife goaded me !

DAGNY.

[Softly and imploringly.] Foster-sister, by any
love thou hast ever borne me, stir not up strife !

ACT II.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 55

HlORDIS.

[Laughing.'] Jests must pass at the feast-board,
if the merriment is to thrive.

GUNNAR.

[Who has been talking softly to THOROLF.] Thou
art a brave lad ! [Hands kirn a sword which hangs
beside the high-seat.] Here, Thorolf, here is a good
gift for thee. Wield it well, and let us be friends.

HlORDIS.

Beware how thou givest away thy weapons,
Gunnar ; men may say thou dost part with things
thou canst not use !

THOROLF.

[ Who has meanwhile examined the sword.] Thanks
for the gift, Gunnar ; it shall never be drawn in
an unworthy cause.

HlORDIS.

If thou wilt keep that promise, then do thou
never lend the sword to thy brothers.

GUNNAR.

Hiordis !

HlORDIS.

[Contimting.] Neither let it hang on thy father's
wall ; for there it would hang with base men's
weapons.

THOROLF.

True enough, Hiordis— for there thy father's
axe and shield have hung this many a year.

HIORDIS.
[Mastering herself.] That Ornulf slew my

56 THE VIKINGS AT HE^GELAND. [ACT II.

father — that deed is ever on thy tongue ; but if
report speak true, 'twas scai&6' so honourable a
deed as thou deemest.

THOROLF.^
Of what report dost thou speak ? •

HIORDIS.

[Smiling.] I dare not name it, for it would make
thee wroth.

THOROLF.
Then hold thy peace— I ask no better.

[Turns from her.

HIORDIS.

Nay, why should I not tell it ? Is it true,
Thorolf, that for three nights thy father sat in
woman's weed, doing sorceries with the witch of
Smalserhorn, ere he dared face Jokul in fight ? '

[All rise; violent excitement among the
;;j;; i :.: guests.

GUNNAR, SIGURD, AND DAGNY.

Hiordis !

THOROLF.

[Bitterly exasperated.] So base a lie has no man
spoken of Ornulf of the Fiords ! Thou thyself
hast made it, for no one less venomous than thou
could dream of such a thing. The blackest crime
a man can do hast thou laid at my father's door.
[Throwing the sword awayJ] There, Gunnar, take
thy gift again ; I can take nought from that house
wherein my father is reviled.

GUNNAR.
Thorolf, hear me !

ACT II.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 57

THOROLF.

Let me go ! But beware both thou and Hidrdis ;
for my father has now in his power one whom ye
hold dearest of all !

HIORDIS.
[Starting.] Thy father has— !

GUNNAR.

[With a cry.] What sayest thou ?

SIGURD.
[Vehemently.] Where is Ornulf?

ji*? THOROLF.

[ With mocking laughter] Gone southward — with
my brothers.

GUNNAR.
Southward !

HIORDIS.

[Shrieking] Gunnar ! Ornulf has slain Egil,
our son.

GUNNAR.

Slain !— Egil slain ! Then woe to Ornulf and
all his race ! Thorolf, speak out ;— is this true ?

SIGURD.
Gunnar, Gunnar — hear me !

GUNNAR.
Speak out, if thou care for thy life ! 4'jf

THOROLF.
Thou canst not fright me ! Wait till my father

58 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT II.

comes , he shall plant a mark of shame over
against Gunnar's house ! And meanwhile,
Hidrdis, do thou cheer thee with these words I
heard to-day : " Ere eventide shall Gunnar and
his wife be childless." [Goes out by the back.

GUNNAR.

[In agony.] Slain — slain i My little Egil skin .

HIORDIS.

[Wildly.] And thou — dost thou let him go?
Let Egil, thy child, lie unavenged ! Then wert
thou the dastard of dastards !

GUNNAR.

[As if beside himself.] A sword — an axe ! 'Tis
the last tidings he shall ever bring !

[Seizes an axe from one of the bystanders
and rushes out.

SIGURD.
[About to follow] Gunnar, hold thy hand !

HIORDIS.

[Holding him back.] Stay, stay ! The men will
part them ; I know Gunnar !

[A cry from the crowd, which has flocked
together at the main door.

SIGURD AND DAGNY.
What is it ?

A VOICE AMONG THE CROWD.

Thorolf has fallen.

SIGURD.
Thorolf ! Ha, let me go !

ACT II.] THE VIJCINGS AT HELGELAND. 59

DAGNY.
My brother ! Oh, my brother !

[SIGURD is on the point of rushing out. At
the same moment, the crowd parts,
GUNNAR enters , and throws doivn the axe
at the door.

GUNNAR.
Now it is done. Egil is avenged !

SIGURD.

Well for thee if thy hand has not been too
hasty.

GUNNAR.
Mayhap, mayhap ; but Egil, Egil, my fair boy !

HIORDIS.

Now must we arm us, and seek help among our
friends ; for Thorolf has many avengers.

GUNNAR.

[Gloomily.] He will be his own worst avenger ;
he will be with me night and day.

HIORDIS.

Thorolf got his reward. Kinsmen must suffer
for kinsmen's deeds.

GUNNAR.

True, true; but this I know, my mind was
lighter ere this befell.

HIORDIS.

The first night * is ever the worst ;— when that
is over, thou wilt heed it no more. Ornulf has

1 Literally the "blood-night."

60 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT II.

sought his revenge by shameful guile ; he would
not come against us in open strife ; he feigned to
be peacefully minded ; and then he falls upon our
defenceless child ! Ha, I saw more clearly than
ye ; v/ell I deemed that Ornulf was evil-minded
and false ; good cause had I to egg thee on against
him and all his faithless tribe.

GUNNAR.

[Fiercely.] That hadst thou ! My vengeance
is poor beside Ornulf s crime. He has lost
Thorolf, but he has six sons left — and I have none
— none !

A HOUSE-CARL.

[Enters hastily from the back.] Ornulf of the
Fiords is at hand !

GUNNAR.
Ornulf!

HlORDIS AND SEVERAL MEN.

To arms ! to arms !

DAGNY.

[Simultaneously.] My father!

SIGURD.

[As if seized by a foreboding.] Ornulf !

Ah, Gunnar, Gunnar !

GUNNAR.

[Draws his sword.] Up, all my men ! Vengeance
for Egil's death !

ORNULF enters, with EGIL in his arms.

GUNNAR.

[With a shriek.] Egil !

ACT II.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 6l

ORNULF.
I bring you back little Egil.

ALL.
[One to another.] Egil ! Egil alive !

GUNNAR.

[Letting his sword Jail.] Woe is me ! what have
I done ?

DAGNY.
Oh, Thorolf, my brother !

SIGURD.
I knew it ! I knew it !

ORNULF.

[Setting EGIL down] There, Gunnar, hast thou
thy pretty boy again.

EGIL.

Father ! Old Ornulf would not do me ill, as
thou saidst when I went away.

ORNULF.

[To HIORDIS.] Now have I atoned for thy
father ; now surely there may be peace between
us.

HIORDIS.
[With repressed emotion] Mayhap !

GUNNAR.

[As if waking up.] Is it a hideous dream that
maddens me ! Thou — thou bringest Egil home !

ORNULF.

As thou seest ; but in truth he has b«en near
his death.

62 THE VIKINGS AT KELGELAND. [ACT II.

GUNNAR.

That I know.

ORNULF.
And hast no more joy in his return ?

GUNNAR.

Had he come sooner, I had been more glad. But
tell me all that has befallen !

ORNULF.

That is soon done. Kare the Peasant was
plotting evil against you ; with other caitiffs he
fared southward after Egil.

GUNNAR.

Kare ! [To himselj.'] Ha, now I understand
Thorolf's words !

ORNULF.

His purpose came to my ears; I needs must
thwart so black a deed. I would not give atone-
ment for Jokul, and, had things so befallen, I had
willingly slain thee, Gunnar, in single combat —
yet I could not but save thy child. With my sons,
I hasted after Kare.

SIGURD.

^Softly.] An accursed deed has here been
done.

ORNULF.

When I came up with him, Egil's guards lay
bound ; thy son was already in thy foemen's hands,
and they would not long have spared him. Hot
was the fight ! Seldom have I given and taken
keener strokes ; Kare and two men fled inland ;
the rest sleep safely, and will be hard to waken.

ACT II.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 63

GUNNAR.

[In eager suspense.] But thou — thou, Or-

nulf ?

ORNULF.
[Darkly.] Six sons followed me into the fight.

GUNNAR. '

[Breathlessly.] But homewards ?

ORNULF.
None.

GUNNAR.

[Appalled.] None! [Softly.] And Thorolf,
Thorolf !

[Deep emotion among the bystanders.
HIORDIS shows signs of a violent mental
struggle ; DAGNY weeps silently by the
high-seat on the right. SIGURD stands
betide her, painfully agitated.

ORNULF.

[After a short pause.] It is hard for a many-
branching pine to be stripped in a single storm.
But men die and men live ; — hand me a horn ; I
will drink to my sons' memory. [One of SIGURD'S
men gives him a horn.] Hail to you where now ye
ride, my bold sons ! Close upon your heels shall
the bronze-gates not clang, for ye come to the
hall with a great following. [Drinks, and hands
back the horn] And now home to Iceland !
Ornulf has fought his last fight ; the old tree has
but one green branch left, and it must be shielded
warily. Where is Thorolf?

EGIL.
[To his father.] Ay, let me see Thorolf ! Ornulf

64 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT II.

says he will carve me a ship with many, many
warriors aboard.

ORNULF.

I praise all good wights that Thorolf came not
with us ; for if he too — nay, strong though I be,
that had been too heavy for me to bear. But
why comes he not ? He was ever the first to
meet his father ; for to both of us it seemed we
could not live apart a single day.

GUNNAR.
Ornulf, Ornulf!

ORNULF.

[With growing uneasiness.} Ye stand all silent,
I mark it now. What ails you ? Where is
Thorolf?

DAGNY.

Sigurd, Sigurd — this will be the sorest blow to
him!

GUNNAR.

[Struggling with himself} Old man ! — No

and yet, it cannot be hid —

ORNULF.

[Vehemently.} My son ! Where is he?

GUNNAR.
Thorolf is slain !

ORNULF.
Slain ! Thorolf ? Thorolf ? Ha, thou Rest !

GUNNAR.

I would give my warmest heart- blood to know
him alive :

ACT II.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 65

HlORDIS.

[To ORNULF.] Thorolf was himself to blame
for what befell ; with dark sayings he gave us to
wit that thou hadst fallen upon Egil and slain him ;
— we had parted half in wrath, and thou hast ere
now brought death among my kindred. And
moreover — Thorolf bore himself at the feast like
a wanton boy ; he brooked not our jesting, and
spoke many evil things. Not till then did Gunnar
wax wroth ; not till then did he raise his hand
upon thy son; and well I wot that he had good
and lawful ground for that deed.

ORNULF.

[Calmly.] Well may we see that thou art
a woman, for thou usest many words. To what
end ? If Thorold is slain, then is his saga over.

EGIL.
If Thorold is slain, I shall have no warriors.

ORNULF.

Nay, Egil — we have lost our warriors now, both
thou and I. [To HIORDIS.] Thy father sang :
Jokul's kin for Jokul's slayer
many a woe shall still be weaving.
Well hast thou wrought that his words should
come true. [Pauses a moment, then turns to one of
the men.] Where got he his death-wound ?

THE MAN.
Right across his brow.

ORNULF.
[Pleased.] Ha ; that is an honourable wound ;

66 THE VIKINGS AT HBLGELAND. [ACT II.

he did not turn his back. But fell he sideways,
or in toward Gunnar's feet ?

THE MAN.
Half sideways and half toward Gunnar.

ORNULF.

That bodes but half vengeance ; well well, — we
shall see !

GUNNAR.

[Approaching.] Ornulf, I know well that all my
goods were naught against thy loss ; but crave of
me what thou wilt

ORNULF.

[Sternly interrupting him] Give me Thorolfs
body, and let me go ! Where lies he ?

[GUNNAR points silently to the back.

ORNULF.

[Takes a step or two, but turns and says in a voice
of thunder to SIGURD, DAGNY, and others who are
making as though to follow him, sorrowing] Stay !
Think ye Ornulf will be followed by a train of
mourners, like a whimpering woman ? Stay, I
say ! — I can bear my Thorolf alone. [ With calm
strength] Sonless I go ; but none shall say that
he saw me bowed. [He goes slowly out.

HIORDIS.

[With forced laughter] Ay, let him go as he
will ; we shall scarce need many men to face him
should he come with strife again ! Now, Dagny
— I wot it is the last time thy father shall sail
from Iceland on such a quest !

ACT II.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 67

SIGURD.
[Indignant.] Oh, shame !

DAGNY.

[Likewise.] And thou canst mock him — mock
him, after all that has befallen?

HlORDIS.

A deed once done, 'tis wise to praise it. This
morning I swore hate and vengeance against
Ornulf; — the slaying of Jokul I might have for-
gotten— all, save that he cast shame upon my lot.
He called me a leman ; if it be so, it shames me
not ; for Gunnar is mightier now than thy father ;
he is greater and more famous than Sigurd, thine
own husband !

DAGNY.

[In wild indignation.'] There thou errest, Hiordis
— and even now shall all men know that thou
dwellest under a coward's roof!

SIGURD.
[Vehemently.] Dagny, beware !

GUNNAR.
A coward !

HIORDIS.

[With scornful laughter.] Thou pratest sense-
lessly.

DAGNY.

It shall no longer be hidden ; I held my peace
till thou didst mock at my father and my dead
brothers; I held my peace while Ornulf was
here, lest he should learn that Thorolf fell by a

68 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT II.

dastard's hand. But now — praise Gunnar never-
more for that deed in Iceland ; for Gunnar is a
coward ! The sword that lay drawn between
thee and the bear-slayer hangs at my husband's
side — the ring thou didst take from thy arm thou
gavest to Sigurd. [Takes it off and holds it aloft]
Behold it !

HlORDIS.

[Wildly.] Sigurd!

THE CROWD.
Sigurd ! Sigurd did the deed !

HlORDIS.

[Quivering with agitation.] He ! he ! — Gunnar,
is this true ?

GUNNAR.

[ With lofty calm.] It is all true, save only that
I am a coward ; no coward or dastard am I.

SIGURD.

[Moved.] That art thou not, Gunnar ! That
hast thou never been ! [To the rest.] Away, my
men ! Away from here !

DAGNY.

[At the door, to HIO'RDIS.] Who is now the
mightiest man at the board — my husband, or
thine ? [She goes out with SIGURD and his men.

HlORDIS.

[To herself.] Now have I but one thing left to
do — but one deed to think upon: Sigurd or I
must die !

ACT THIRD.

TJte hall in GUNNAR'S house. It is day.

HIORDIS sits on the bench in front of the smaller high-
seat, busy twisting a bow-string; on the table
lie a bow and some arrows.

HIORDIS.

[Pulling at the bow-string.'] It is tough and
strong; [With a glance at the arrows] the shaft is
both keen and well-weighted — [Lets her hands fall
in her lap] but where is the hand that !

[ Vehemently. J Flouted, flouted by him — by
Sigurd ! I must hate him more than others, that
can I well mark ; but many days shall not pass

ere I have [Meditating.] Ay, but the arm,

the arm that shall do the deed ?

GUNNAR enters, silent and thoughtful, from the back.

HIORDIS.

[After a short pause.] How goes it with thee,
my husband ?

GUNNAR.

Ill, Hiordis ; I cannot away with that deed of
yesterday ; it lies heavy on my heart.

HIORDIS.
Do as I do ; get thee some work to busy thee.

70 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT 111.

GUNNAR.

Doubtless I must.

[A pause ; GUNNAR paces up and down the
hall, notices what HIORDIS is doing, and
approaches her,

GUNNAR.
What dost thou there ?

HIORDIS.

[Without looking up.] I am twisting a bow-
string ; canst thou not see ?

GUNNAR.
A bow-string — of thine own hair ?

HIORDIS.

[Smiling.'] Great deeds are born with every
hour in these times; yesterday thou didst slay
my ibster-l>r6ther, and I have wovieix this since
daybreak.

GUNNAR.
Hiordis, Hiordis !

HIORDIS.
[Looking up.] What is amiss ?

GUNNAR.
Where wast thou last night ?

HIORDIS.
Last night ?

GUNNAR.
Thou wast not in the sleeping-room.

HIORDIS.
Know'st thou that ?

ACT III.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 7l

GUNNAR.

I could not sleep ; I tossed in restless dreams
of that— that which befell Thorolf. I dreamt

that he came No matter ; I wakened. Then

methought there sounded a strange, fair song
through all the house ; I arose ; I pushed the
door ajar ; here I saw thee sitting by the log-
fire — it burned blue and red — fixing arrow-heads,
and singing sorceries over them.

HIORDIS.

I did what was needful ; for strong is the
breast that must be pierced this day.

GUNNAR.

I understand thee well : thou wouldst have
Sigurd slain.

HIORDIS.
Mayhap.

GUNNAR.

Thou shalt never have thy will. I will keep
peace with Sigurd, howe'er thou goad me.

HIORDIS.
[Smiling.] Dost think so ?

GUNNAR.
I know it !

HIORDIS.

[Hands him the bow-string.] Tell me, Gunnar —
canst loose this knot ?

GUNNAR.

[Tries it.] Nay, it is too cunningly and firmly
woven.

72 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT III.

HlORDIS.

[Rising] The Norns l weave yet more
cunningly ; their web is still harder to unravel.

GUNNAR.

Dark are the ways of the Mighty Ones ; — what
know we of them, thou or I ?

HIORDIS.

Yet one thing I know surely : that to both of us
must Sigurd's life be baleful.

[A pause ; GUNNAR stands lost in thought.

HIORDIS.

[Who has been silently watching htm] Of what
thinkest thou ?

GUNNAR.

Of a dream I had of late. Methought I had
done the deed thou cravest ; Sigurd lay slain on
the earth ; thou didst stand beside him, and thy
face was wondrous pale. Then said I : " Art thou
glad, now that I have done thy will ? " But thou
didst laugh and answer : " Blither should I be
didst thou, Gunnar, lie there in Sigurd's stead."

HIORDIS.

[With forced laughter.] Ill must thou know me
if such a senseless dream can stay thy hand.

GUNNAR.
Tell me, Hiordis, what thinkest thou of this hall ?

HIORDIS.

To speak truly, Gunnar, sometimes it seems to
me too strait and narrow.

1 The " Nornir " were the Fates of northern mythology.

ACT III.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 73

GUNNAR.

Ay, ay, so I have thought ; we are one too
many.

HIORDIS.
Two, mayhap.

GUNNAR.

[Who has not heard her last words.] But that
shall be set right.

HIORDIS.

[Looks at him interrogatively.] Set right ? Then
thou art minded to ?

GUNNAR.

To fit out my warships and put to sea ; I will
win back the honour I have lost because thou
wast dearer to me than all beside.

HIORDIS.

[Thoughtfully.] Thou wilt put to sea ? Ay, so
it may be best for us both.

GUNNAR.

Even from the day we sailed from Iceland, I
saw that it would go ill with us. Thy soul is
strong and proud ; there are times when I well-
nigh fear thee ; yet, it is strange — chiefly for that
do I hold thee so dear. Dread goes forth from
thee like a spell ; methinks thou couldst lure me
to the blackest deeds, and all would seem good to
me that thou didst crave. [Shaking his head
reflectively.] Unfathomable is the Norn's rede ;
Sigurd should have been thy husband.

HIORDIS.
[ Vehemently, .] Sigurd !

74 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT III.

GUNNAR.

Yes, Sigurd. Vengeance and hatred blind thee,
else wouldst thou prize him better. Had I been
like Sigurd, I could have made life glad for thee.

HIORDIS.

[ With strong but suppressed emotion.'] That — that
deemest thou Sigurd could have done ?

GUNNAR.
He is strong of soul, and proud as thou to boot.

HIORDIS.

[Viokntly.'] If that be so— [Collecting herself !]
No matter, no matter ! [ With a wild outburst.]
Gunnar, take Sigurd's life !

GUNNAR.
Never !

HIORDIS.

By fraud and falsehood thou mad'st me thy wife
— that shall be forgotten! Five joyless years
have I spent in this house — all shall be forgotten
from the day when Sigurd lives no more !

GUNNAR.

No harm shall e'er befall him from my hand.
[Shrinks back involuntarily .] Hiordis, Hiordis,
tempt me not !

HIORDIS.

Then must I find another avenger ; not long
shall Sigurd mock at me and thee ! [Clenching
her hands in convulsive rageJ] With her — that
simpleton — with her mayhap he is even now
sitting alone, dallying, and making sport of us ;

ACT III.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 75

speaking of the bitter wrong that was clone me
when in thy stead he bore me away ; telling how
he laughed over his guile as he stood in the mirk
of my bower, and I knew him not !

GUNNAR.

Nay, nay, he does not so !

HIORDIS.

[Firmly.'] Sigurd and Dagny must die ! I
cannot draw breath till they two are gone !
[Comes close up to him, with sparkling eyes, and
speaks passionately, but in a whisper.] Wouldst
thou help me to that, Gunnar, then should I live
in love with thee ; then should I clasp thee in such
warm and wild embraces as thou dream' st not of.

GUNNAR.
[ Wavering.} Hiordis ! Wouldst thou ?

HIORDIS.

Set thy hand to the work, Gunnar — and the
heavy days shall be past. No longer will I quit
the hall when thou comest, no longer speak harsh
things and quench thy smile when thou art glad.
I will clothe me in furs and costly silken robes.
When thou goest to war, I will follow thee ; when
thou ridest forth in peace, I will ride by thy side.
At the feast 1 will sit by thee and fill thy horn,
and drink to thee and sing fair songs to make glad
thy heart !

GUNNAR.
[Almost overcome.'] Is it true ? Thou wouldst

HIORDIS.
More than that, trust me, ten times more!

76 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT III.

Give me but revenge ! Revenge on Sigurd and

Dagny, and I will [Stops as she sees the door

open.] Dagny — comest thou here !

DAGNY.

[From the back.] Haste thee, Gunnar! Call
thy men to arms !

GUNNAR.
To arms ! Against whom ?

DAGNY.

Kare the Peasant is coming, and many outlaws
with him ; he means thee no good ; Sigurd has
once barred his way ; but who can tell

GUNNAR.
[Moved.] Sigurd has done this for me !

DAGNY.
Sigurd is ever thy faithful friend.

GUNNAR.

And we, Hiordis — we,, who thought to ! It

is as I say — there is witchcraft in all thy speech ;
no deed but seemeth fair to me, when thou dost
name it.

DAGNY.
[Astonished.] What meanest thou ?

GUNNAR.

Nothing, nothing ! I thank thee for thy
tidings, Dagny ; I go to gather my men together.
[Turns towards the door, but stops and comes fomvard
again.] Tell me— how goes it with Ornulf ?

ACT III.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 77

DAGNY.

[Bowing her head.] Ask not of him. Yesterday
he bore Thorolf s body to the ships ; now he is
raising a grave-mound on the shore ; — there shall
his sons be laid.

[GUNNAR goes out by the back in silence.

DAGNY.

Until evening there is no danger. [Coming
nearer.] Hiordis, I have another errand in thy
house ; it is to thee I come.

HIORDIS.
To me ? After all that befell yesterday ?

DAGNY.

Even because of that. Hiordis, foster-sister, do
not hate me ; forget the words that sorrow and
evil spirits placed in my mouth ; forgive me all
the wrong I did thee ; for, trust me, I am now
tenfold more hapless than thou !

HIO'RDIS.
Hapless — thou ! Sigurd's wife !

DAGNY.

It was my doing, all that befell — the stirring up
of strife, and Thorolf s death, and all the scorn
that fell upon Gunnar and thee. Mine is all the
guilt ! Woe upon me ! — I have lived so happily ;
but after this day I shall never know joy again.

HIORDIS.
[As if seized by a sudden thought.] But before —

78 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT III.

in these five long years — all that time hast thou
been happy ?

DAGNY,
Canst thou doubt it ?

HIORDIS.
Yesterday I doubted it not ; but

DAGNY.
What meanest thou ?

HIORDIS.
Nay, 'tis nought ; let us speak of other matters.

DAGNY.

No truly. Hidrdis, tell me !

HIORDIS.
It will profit thee little ; but since thou wilt

have it so [With a malignant expression.]

Canst thou remember once, over in Iceland —
we had followed with Ornulf thy father to the
Council, and we sat with our playmates in the
Council Hall, as is the manner of women. Then
came two strangers into the hall.

DAGNY.

Sigurd and Gunnar.

KIORDIS.

They greeted us in courtly fashion, and sat on
the bench beside us ; and there passed between
us much merry talk. There were some who must
needs know why these two vikings came thither,
and if they were not minded to take them wives
there in the island. Then said Sigurd : " Twill

ACT III.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 79

be hard for me to find the woman that shall be to
my mind." Ornulf laughed, and said there was
no lack of high-born and well-dowered women in
Iceland ; but Sigurd answered : " The warrior
needs a high-souled wife. She whom I choose
must not rest content with a humble lot ; no
honour must seem too high for her to strive for ;
gladly must she follow me a-viking; war-weed
must she wear ; she must egg me on to strife, and
never blink her eyes where sword-blades lighten ;
for if she be faint-hearted, scant honour will befall
me." Is it not true, so Sigurd spake ?

DAGNY.

[Hesitatingly.] True, he did — but

HIORDIS.

Such was she to be, the woman who could
make life fair to him ; and then — [ With a scornful
smile] then he chose thee !

DAGNY.

[Starting, as in pain.] Ha, thou wouldst say

that ?

HIORDIS.

Doubtless thou hast proved thyself proud and
high-souled ; hast claimed honour of all, that
Sigurd might be honoured in thee — is it not so ?

DAGNY.
Nay, Hib'rdis, but

HIORDIS.

Thou hast egged him on to great deeds, followed
him in war-weed, and joyed to be where the strife
raged hottest — hast thou not ?

80

THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT IIL

DAGNY.

[Deeply moved.] No, no !

HIORDIS.

Hast thou, then, been faint of heart, so that
Sigurd has been put to shame ?

DAGNY.
[OverrMmed.] Hiordis, Hiordis !

HIORDIS.

[Smiling scornfully.'] Yet thy lot has been a
happy one all these years ! Think'st thou that
Sigurd can say the same ?

DAGNY.

Enough, enough. Woe is me ' thou hast made
me see myself too clearly.

HIORDIS.

A jesting word, and straightway thoa art in
tears ! Think no more of it. Look what I have
done to-day. [ Takes some arrows from the table.} Are
they not keen and biting — feel ! I know well how
to sharpen arrows, do I not ?

DAGNY.

And to use them too ; thou strikest surely,
Hiordis ! All this thou hast said to me — I had
never thought of it before. [More vehemently.] But

that Sigurd ! That for all these years 1 should

have made his life heavy and unhonoured ; — no,
no, it cannot be true !

HIORDIS.
Nay now, comfort thee, Dagny ; indeed it is not

ACT III.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 81

true. Were Sigurd of the same mind as in former
days, it might be true enough ; for then was his
whole soul bent on being the foremost man in the
land ; — now he is content with a lowlier lot.

DAGNY,

No, Hiordis ; Sigurd is high-souled now as ever ;
I see it well, I am not the right mate for him. He
has hidden it from me; but it shall be so no
longer.

HIORDIS.

What wilt thou do ?

DAGNY.

I will no longer hang like a clog upon his feet ;
I will be a hindrance to him no longer.

HIORDIS.
Then thou wilt ?

DAGNY.
Peace ; some one comes !

A House-carl enters from the back.

THE CARL.
Sigurd Viking is coming to the hall.

HlORDIS.

Sigurd ! Then call Gunnar hither.

THE CARL.

Gunnar has ridden forth to gather his neigh-
bours together ; for Kare the Peasant would

HIORDIS.

Good, good, I know it ; go! [The Carl goes. To
DAGNY, who is also going.] Whither wilt thou

II F

82 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT III.

DAGNY.

I will not meet Sigurd. Too well I feel that we
must part; but to meet him now — no, no, I
cannot ! [Goes out to the left.

HIORDIS.
[Looks after her in silence for a moment."] And it

was she I would have [Completes her thought by

a glance at the bow-string], That had been a poor
revenge ; — nay, I have cut deeper now ! 'Tis hard
to die, but sometimes harder still to live !

SIGURD enters from the back.

HIORDIS.

Belike it is Gunnarthou seekest; be seated, he
will be here even now. [Is going.

SIGURD.
Nay, stay ; it is thee I seek, rather than him.

HIORDIS.
Me?

SIGURD.
And 'tis well I find thee alone.

HIORDIS.

If thou comest to mock me, it would sure be no
hindrance to thee though the hall were full of
men and women.

SIGURD.
Ay, ay, well I know what thoughts thou hast of

me.

HIORDIS.

[Bitterly.] I do thee wrong mayhap ! Nay, nay,

ACT III.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. S&

Sigurd, thou hast been as a poison to all my days.
Bethink thee who it was that wrought that
shameful guile ; who it was that sat by my side in
the bower, feigning love, with the laugh of
cunning in his heart ; who it was that flung me
forth to Gunnar, since for him I was good enough,
forsooth — and then sailed away with the woman
he held dear !

SIGURD.

Man's will can do this tiling and that ; but fate
rules in the deeds that shape our lives — so has it
gone with us twain.

HIORDIS.

True enough ; evil Norns hold sway over the
world ; but their might is little if they find not
helpers in our own heart. Happy is he who has
strength to battle with the Norn — and it is that I
have now in hand.

SIGURD.
What mean'st thou ?

HIORDIS.

I will venture a trial of strength against those
— those who are over me. But let us talk no more
of this ; I have much to do to-day.

[She seats herself at the table.

SIGURD.

[After a short pause.] Thou makest good
weapons for Gunnar.

HIORDIS.

[With a quiet smile.] Not for Gunnar, but
against thee.

84 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT HI.

SIGURD.
Most like it is the same thing.

HIORDIS.

Ay, most like it is ; for if I be a match for
the Norn, then sooner or later shalt thou and

Gunnar [Breaks off, leans backwards against

the table, looks at him with a smile, and says with an
altered ring in her voice :] Wouldst know the thought
that sometimes comes to me? Oft have I made it
my pastime to limn pleasant pictures in my mind;
at such times I sit and close my eyes and think :
Now comes Sigurd the Strong to the isle ; — he
will burn us in our house, me and my husband. All
Gunnar's men have fallen ; only he and I are left ;
they set light to the roof from without : — "A
bow-shot," cries Gunnar, "one bow-shot may save
us " ; — then the bow-string breaks — " Hiordis, cut
a tress of thy hair and make of it a bow-string
— our life is at stake." But then I laugh— " Let
it burn, let it burn — to me, life is not worth a
wisp of hair ! "

SIGURD.

There is a strange might in all thy speech.

[Approaches her.

HIORDIS.
[Looks coldly at him.] Wouldst sit beside me ?

SIGURD.

Thou deemest my heart is bitter toward thee.
Tis the last time, Hiordis, that we shall have
speech together ; there is something that gnaws
me like a sore sickness, and in this wise I cannot
part from thee ; thou must know me better.

ACT III.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 85

HlORDIS.

What wouldst thou ?

SIGURD,
Tell thee a saga.

HIORDIS.
Is it sad ?

SIGURD.
Sad, as life itself.

HlORDIS.

[Bitterly.] What knowest thou of the sadness
of life?

SIGURD.

Judge when my saga is over.

HlORDIS.

Then tell it me ; I will work the while.

[He sits on a low stool to her right.

SIGURD.

Once upon a time there were two young vikings,
who set forth from Norway to win wealth and
honour; they had sworn each other friendship, and
held truly together, how far soever they might
fare.

HlORDIS.

And the two young vikings hight Sigurd and
Gunnar ?

SIGURD.

Ay, we may call them so. At last they came to
Iceland ; and there dwelt an old chieftain, who
had come forth from Norway in King Harald's
days. He had two fair women in his house ; but
one, his foster-daughter, was the noblest, for she

86 TfcE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT III.

was wise and strong of soul ; and the vikings spoke
of her between themselves, and never had they
seen a fairer woman, so deemed they both.

HIORDIS.
[In suspense.] Both ? Wilt thou mock me ?

SIGURD.

Gunnar thought of her night and day, and that
did Sigurd no less ; but both held their peace, and
no man could say from her bearing whether Gunnar
found favour in her eyes ; but that Sigurd found
none, that was easy to discern.

HlORDIS.

[Breathlessly.] Go on, go on !

SIGURD.

Yet ever the more must Sigurd dream of her ;
but of that wist no man. Now it befell one
evening that there was a drinking-feast ; and there
did that proud woman vow that no man should
possess her save he who wrought a mighty deed,
which she named. Then high beat Sigurd's heart
for joy; for he felt within him the strength to do
that deed. But Gunnar took him apart and told
him of his love; — Sigurd said nought of his, but

went to the

HIORDIS.

Sigurd, Sigurd ! [Controlling her-
And this saga — is it true ?

SIGURD.

True it is. One of us had to yield; Gunnar
was my friend; I could do nought else. So

ACT III.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 87

Gunnar had thee to wife, and I wedded another
woman.

HIORDIS.
And didst come to love her !

SIGURD.

I learned to prize her ; but one woman only has
Sigurd loved, and that is she who frowned upon
him from the first day they met. [Rises.] Here
ends my saga ; and now let us part. — Farewell,
Gunnar's wife ; never shall we meet again.

HIORDIS.

[Springing up.] Stay,, stay ! Woe to us both ;
Sigurd, what hast thou done ?

SIGURD.
[Starting.] I, done ? What ails thee ?

HIORDIS.

And all this dost thou tell me now .' But no —
it cannot be true !

SIGURD.

These are my last words to thee, and every word
is true. I would not thou shouldst think hardly
of me, therefore I needs must speak.

HIORDIS.

[Involuntarily clasps her hands together, and gazes
at him in voiceless astonishment] Loved — loved me
— thou ! [Vehemently, coming close up to him] I
will not believe thee ! [Looks hard at him, and
bursts forth in wild grief.] Yes, it is true, and —
hateful for us both !

[Hides her face in her hands , and turns away
from him.

88 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT III.

SIGURD.

[Appalled.] Hiordis !

HIORDIS.
[Softly, struggling with tears and laughter.] Nay,

heed me not ! I meant but this, that [Lavs

her hand on his arm.] Sigurd, thou hast not told
thy saga to the end ; that proud woman thou
didst tell of — she returned thy love !

SIGURD.
[Starts backwards .] Thou ?

HIORDIS.

[With composure.] Aye, Sigurd, I have loved
thee, at last I understand it. Thou sayest I was
ungentle and short of speech towards thee ; what
wouldst thou have a woman do ? Could I offer
thee my love ? Then had I been little worthy of
thee. I deemed thee ever the noblest man of men ;
and then to know thee another's husband — 'twas
that caused me the bitter pain, that myself I could
not understand !

SIGURD.

[Muck moved.] A baleful web has the Norn
woven around us twain.

HIORDIS.

The blame is thine own ; bravely and firmly it
becomes a man to act. When I set that hard
proof for him who should win me, my thought
was all of thee ; — yet couldst thou !

SIGURD.
I knew Gunnar's soul-sickness ; I alone could

ACT III.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 89

heal it ; — was there aught for me to choose ? And
yet, had I known what I now know, I scarce dare
answer for myself ; for great is the might of love.

HIORDIS.

[With animation.] But now, Sigurd! — A
baleful hap has held us apart all these years ; now
the knot is loosed ; the days to come shall make
good the past to us.

SIGURD.

[Shaking his head.] It cannot be ; thou knowest
we mast part again.

HIORDIS.

Nay, we must not. I love thee, that may I now
say unashamed ; for my love is no mere dalliance,
like a weak woman's ; were I a man — by all the
Mighty Ones, I could still love thee, even as now
I do ! Up then, Sigurd ! Happiness is worth a
daring deed ; we are both free if we but will it,
and then the game is won.

SIGURD.
Free ? What meanest thou ?

HIORDIS.

What is Dagny to thee ? What can she be to
thee? No more than I count Gunnar in my
secret heart. What matter though two worthless
lives be wrecked ?

SIGURD.
Hiordis, Hiordis !

HIORDIS.
Let Gunnar stay where he is ; let Dagny fare

90 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT III.

with her father to Iceland ; I will follow thee in
harness of steel, whithersoever thou wendest.
[SIGURD makes a movement.] Not as thy wife will
I follow thee ; for I have belonged to another, and
the woman lives that has lain by thy side. No,
Sigurd, not as thy wife, but like those mighty
women, like Hilde's sisters,! will I follow thee,
and fire thee to strife and to manly deeds, so that
thy name shall be heard over every land. In the
sword-game will I stand by thy side ; I will fare
forth among thy warriors in the storm and on the
viking-raid ; and when thy death-song is sung, it
shall tell of Sigurd and Hiordis in one !

SIGURD.

Once was that my fairest dream ; now, it is too
late. Gunnar and Dagny stand between us, and
that by right. I crushed my new-born love for
Gunnar's sake ; — how great soever my suffering, I
cannot undo my deed. And Dagny — full of faith
and trust she left her home and kindred ; never
must she dream that I longed for Hiordis as often
as she took me to her breast.

HIORDIS.

And for such a cause wilt thou lay a burden on
all thy life ! To what end hast thou strength and
might, and therewith all noble gifts of the mind ?
And deemest thou it can now beseem me to dwell
beneath Gunnar's roof ? Nay, Sigurd, trust me,
there are many tasks awaiting such a man as
thou. Erik is king in Norway — do thou rise
against him ! Many goodly warriors will join
thee and swear thee fealty ; with unconquerable

i The Valkyries.

ACT III.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 91

might will we press onward, aud fight and toil
unresting, until thou art seated on the throne of
Harfager !

SIGURD.

Hiordis, Hiordis, so have I dreamt in my wild
youth ; let it be forgotten — tempt me not !

HIORDIS.

[With dignity.} It is the Norn's will that we
two shall hold together ; it cannot be altered.
Plainly now I see my task in life : to make thee
famous over all the world. Thou hast stood
before me every day, ever hour of my life ; I
sought to tear thee out of my mind, but I lacked
the might ; now it is needless, now that I know
thou lovest me.

SIGURD.

[With forced coldness.} If that be so— then
know — I have loved thee ; it has passed now ; —
I have forgot those days.

HIORDIS.

Sigurd, in that thou liest ! So much at least
am I worth, that if thou hast loved me once, thou
canst never forget it.

SIGURD.
[Vehemently.} I must ; and now I will.

HIORDIS.

So be it ; but thou canst not. Thou wilt seek
to hinder me, but in vain ; ere evening falls,
Gunnar and Dagny shall know all.

SIGURD.
Ha, that wilt thou never do I

92 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT III.

HlORDIS.

That will I do !

SIGURD.

Then must I know thee ill ; high-sonled have I
ever deemed thee.

HlORDIS.

Evil days breed evil thoughts ; too great has
been thy trust in me. I will, I must, go forth by
thy side — forth to face life and strife ; Gunnar's
roof- tree is too low for me.

SIGURD.

[JVitk emphasis."] But honourbetween man and
man hast thou highly prized. There lack not
grounds for strife between me and Gunnar ; say,
now, that he fell by my hand — wouldst thou still
make all known and follow me ?

HltfRDIS.

[Starting.'] Wherefore askest thou ?

SIGURD.

Answer me first : what wouldst thou do, were
I to give thy husband his bane.

HlORDIS.

[Looks hard at him.'] Then must I keep silence
and never rest until I had seen thee dead.

SIGURD.
[With a smile.] It is well, Hiordis— I knew it.

HlORDIS.

[Hastily.] But it can never come to pass !

ACT III.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 93

SIGURD.

It must come to pass ; thou thyself hast cast
the die even now for Gunnar's life and mine.

[GUNNAR, with some House-carls, enters
from the back.

GUNNAR.

[Gloomily, to HIORDIS.] See now ; the seed thou
hast sown is sprouting !

SIGURD.
[Approaching.] What is amiss with thee ?

GUNNAR.

Sigurd, is it thou ? What is amiss ? Nought
but what I might well have foreseen. As soon
as Dagny, thy wife, had brought tidings of Kare
the Peasant, I took horse and rode to my neigh-
bours to seek help against him.

HIORDIS.
[Eagerly.] Well ?

GUNNAR.

I was answered awry where'er I came: my
dealings with Kare had been little to my honour,
it was said ; — aye, and other things were said to
boot, that I will not utter — I am a dishonoured
man ; I am thought to have done a dastard deed ;
men hold it shame to make common cause with
me.

SIGURD.

It shall not long be held shame ; ere evening
comes, thou shalt have men enough to face
Kare.

9* THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT III.

GUNNAR.

Sigurd !

HIORDIS.

[In a low voice, triumphantly.'] Ha, I knew it
well !

SIGURD.

[With forced resolution.] But thereafter is the
peace between us at an end ; for hearken to my
words, Gunnar Headman — thou hast slain
Thorolf, my wife's kinsman, and therefore do I
challenge thee to single combat1 to-morrow at
break of day.

[HIORDIS, in violent inward emotion, makes
a stride towards SIGURD, but collects
herself and remains standing motionless
during the following.

GUNNAR.

[In extreme astonishment] To single combat !

Me ! — Thou art jesting, Sigurd !

SIGURD.

Thou art lawfully challenged to single combat ;
'twill be a game for life or death ; one of us must
fall!

GUNNAR.

[Bitterly.] Ha, I understand it well. When I
came, thou didst talk with Hiordis alone ; she has
goaded thee afresh !

SIGURD.

Mayhap. [Half towards HIORDIS.] A high-
souled woman must ever guard her husband's
1 Hslmgang—szs note, p. 19.

ACT III.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 95

honour. [To the men in the background.] And do
ye, house-carls, now go to Gunnar's neighbours,
and say to them that to-morrow he is to ply
sword-strokes with me ; none dare call that man a
dastard who bears arms against Sigurd Viking !

[The House-carls go out by the back.

GUNNAR.

[Goes quickly up to SIGURD and presses his hands,
in strong emotion.] Sigurd, my brave brother, now
I understand thee ! Thou venturest thy life for
my honour, as of old for my happiness !

SIGURD.

Thank thy wife for that; she has the main
part in what I do. To-morrow at break of
day

tGuNNAR.

I will meet thee. [Tenderly.] Foster-brother,
wilt thou have a good blade of me ? 'Tis a gift of
price.

SIGURD.

I thank thee ; but let it hang. — Who knows if
next evening I may have any use for it.

GUNNAR.

[Shakes his hand.] Farewell, Sigurd !

SIGURD.

Again farewell, and fortune befriend thee this
night!

[They part. GUNNAR goes out to the right.
SIGURD casts a glance at HIORDIS, and
goes out by the back.]

5)6 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT III.

HlORDIS.

[After a pause, softly and thoughtfully.] To-
morrow they fight ! Which will fall ? [After a
moment's silence, she bursts forth as if seized by a,
strong resolution.] Let fall who will — Sigurd and
I shall still be together !

ACT FOURTH.

By the coast. It is evening ; the moon breaks forth
now and again, from among dark and ragged
storm-clouds. At the back, a black grave-mound,
newly heaped up.

ORNULF sits on a stone, in front on the right, his head
bare, his elbows resting on his knees, and his face
buried in his hands. His men are digging at the
mound; some give light with pine-knot torches.
After a short pause, SIGURD and DAGNY enter
from the boat-house, where a wood fire is
burning.

DAGNY.
[In a low voice.] There sits he still. [Holding

SIGURD back.] Nay, speak not to him.

SIGURD.

Thou say'st well ; it is too soon ; best leave him
to himself.

DAGNY.

[Goes over to the right, and gazes at her father in
quiet sorrow.] So strong was he yesterday when he
bore Thorolf s body on his back ; strong was he
as he helped to heap the grave-mound ; but when
they were all laid to rest, and earth and stones
piled over them — then the sorrow seized him ;
then seemed it of a sudden as though his fire were
quenched. [Dries her tears] Tell me, Sigurd,
when thinkest thou to fare homeward to Iceland?

98 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT IV.

SIGURD.

So soon as the storm abates, and my dealings
with Gunnar are ended.

DAGNY.

And then wilt thou buy land and build thee a
homestead, and go a- viking no more ?

SIGURD.
Yes, yes, — that have I promised thee.

DAGNY.

And I may believe without doubt that Hiordis
spoke falsely when she said that J was unworthy
to be thy wife ?

SIGURD.
Yes yes, Dagny, trust thou to my word.

DAGNY.

Then am I glad again, and will try to forget al)
the evil that here has been wrought. In the long
winter evenings we will talk together of Gunnar
and Hiordis, and

SIGURD.

Nay, Dagny, wouldst thou have things go well
with us, never do thou speak Hiordis' name when
once we are at home in Iceland.

DAGNY.

[Mildly upbraiding him.] Unjust is thy hatred
towards her. Sigurd, Sigurd, it is little like thee.

ONE OF THE MEN.

[Approaching.] There now, the mound is
finished.

ACT IV.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 99

ORNULF.

[As if awaking.] The mound? Is it — ay,
ay

SIGURD.

Now speak to him, Dagny.

DAGNY.

[Approaching.] Father, it is cold out here ;
the storm is rising with the night.

ORNULF.

Nay, never heed it ; the mound is close-heaped
and crannyless ; they lie warm in there.

DAGNY.

Ay, but thou

ORNULF.
I ? I am not cold.

DAGNY.

Nought hast thou eaten to-day ; wilt thou not
go in ? The supper-board stands ready.

ORNULF.
Let the supper-board stand : I have no hunger.

DAGNY.

But to sit here so still — trust me, thou wilt take
hurt of it ; thou art ever wont to be stirring.

ORNULF.

May be so ; there is somewhat that crushes my
breast ; I cannot draw breath.

[He again hides his face in his hands. A
pause. DAGNY seats herself besidt Mm.

100 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT IV

DAGNY.

To-morrow wilt thou make ready thy ship and
set forth for Iceland ?

ORNULF.

[Without looking up.] What should I do there ?
Nay, I will to my sons.

DAGNY.

[With pain.] Father!

ORNULF.

[Raises his head.] Go in and let me sit here ;
when the storm has played with me for a night or
two, the game will be over, I ween.

SIGURD.
Thou canst not think to deal thus with thyself.

ORNULF.

Dost marvel that I fain would rest ? My day's
work is done ; I have laid my sons in their grave-
mound. [Vehemently.] Go from me ! — Go, go !

[He hides his face.
SIGURD.

[Softly, to DAGNY, who rises.] Let him sit yet
awnile.

DAGNY.

Nay, I have one rede yet untried; — I know him.
[To ORNULF.] Thy day's work done, say'st thou ?
Nay, that it is not. Thou hast laid thy sons in
the grave ; — but art thou not a skald ? It is meet
that thou shoald'st sing their memory.

ORNULF.

[Shaking his head] Sing ? Nay, nay ; yester-
day I could sing ; I am too old to-day.

ACT IV.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 101

DAGNY.

But needs must thou ; honourable men were thy
sons, one and all ; a song must be made of them,
and that can none of our kin but thou.

ORNULF.

[Loofcs inquiringly at SIGURD.] To sing ? What
thinkest thou, Sigurd?

SIGURD.

Meseems it is but meet ; thou must e'en do as
she says.

DAGNY.

Thy neighbours in Iceland will deem it ill done
when the grave-ale is drunk over Ornulf s children,
and there is no song to sing with it. Thou hast
ever time enough to follow thy sons.

ORNULF.

Well well, I will try it ; and thou, Dagny, give
heed, that afterwards thou mayst carve the song
on staves.

The men approach with the torches, forming
a group around him ; he is silent for a
time, reflecting ; then he says ;

Bragi's1 gift is bitter
when the heart is broken ;
sorrow-laden singer,
singing, suffers sorely.

Natheless, since the Skald-god

gave me skill in song-craft,

in a lay loud- ringing

be my loss lamented ! [Rises.

Bragi, the god of poetry and eloquence.

102 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT IV.

Ruthless Norn1 and wrathful
wrecked my life and ravaged,
wiled away my welfare,
wasted Ornulf 's treasure.

Sons had Ornulf seven,
by the great gods granted ; — •
lonely now and life-sick
goes the greybeard, soilless.

Seven sons so stately,

bred among the sword-blades,

made a mighty bulwark

round the snow-locked sea-king.

Levelled lies the bulwark,
dead my sons strong-hearted ;
gone the greybeard's gladness,
desolate his dwelling.

Thorolf, — thou my last-born !
'Mongst the bold the boldest !
Soon were spent my sorrow
so but thou wert left me !

Fair thou wast as springtide,
fond towards thy father,
waxing straight and stalwart
to so wight a warrior.

Dark and drear his death-wound
leaves my life's lone evening ;
grief hath gripped my bosom
as 'twixt hurtling targes.

Nought the Norn denied me
of her rueful riches,

See note, p. 72.

ACT IV.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 103

showering woes unstinted
over Ornulf s world-way.

Weak are now my weapons.
But, were god-might given me,
one thing would I strive for —
on the Norn to venge me !

One thing would I toil for —
down to death to hurl thee,
Norn, that now hast left me
nought but yonder grave-mound.

Nought, I said ? .Nay, truly,
somewhat still is Ornulf 's,
since of Suttung's * mead-horn
he betimes drank deeply.

[ With rising enthusiasm.

Though she stripped me sonless,
one great gift she gave me —
songcraft's mighty secret,
skill to sing my sorrows,

On my lips she laid it,
goodly gift of songcratt ;
loud, then, let my lay sound,
e'en where they are lyincj '

Hail, my stout sons seven !
Hail, as homeward ride ye !
Songcraft's glorious god-gift
stauncheth woe and wailing.

[He draws a deep breath, throws back the
hair from his biow, and says calmly :

So — so ; now is Ornulf sound and strong again.

1 Suttung was a giant who kept guard over the magic mead
of poetical inspiration.

104 THE VIKINGS AT IIELGELAND. [ACT IV.

[To the men.] Follow me to the supper-board,
lads ; heavy has been our day's work !

[Goes with the men into the boat-house.

DAGNY.

Praised be the Mighty Ones on high that gave
me so good a rede. [To SIGURD.] Wilt thou
not go in ?

SIGURD.

Nay, I list not to. Tell me, are all things
ready for to-morrow ?

DAGNY.

They are ready ; a silk-sewn shroud lies on the
bench ; but I know full surely that thou wilt hold
thee against Gunnar, so I have not wept over it.

SIGURD.

Grant all good powers, that thou mayst never
•weep for my sake. [He stops and looks out.

DAGNY.
What art thou listening to ?

SIGURD.
Hear'st thou nought — yonder?

[Points towards the left.

DAGNY.

Ay, there goes a fearsome storm over the sea !

SIGURD.

[Going up a little towards the background.]
There will fall hard hailstones in that storm.
[Shouts.] Who comes ?

ACT IV.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 105

KARE THE PEASANT.

[Without on the left.] Folk thou wotst of,
Sigurd Viking !

KARE THE PEASANT, with a band of armed men,
enters Jrom the left.

SIGURD.
Whither would ye ?

KARE.

To Gunaar's hall.

SIGURD.
As foemen ?

KARE.

Ay, trust me for that ! Thou didst hinder me
before ; but now I ween thou wilt scarce do the
like.

SIGURD.
Maybe not.

KARE.

I have heard of thy challenge to Gimnar ; but
if things go to my mind, weak will be his weapons
when the time comes for your meeting.

SIGURD.

'Tis venturesome work thou goest about ; take
heed for thyself, Peasant !

KARE.

[With defiant laughter, .] Leave that to me;
wouldst thou tackle thy ship to-night, we will
see that thou hast light enow ! — Come, all my
men ; here goes the way.

[They go off to the right, at the back.

106 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT IV.

DAGNY.
Sigurd, Sigurd, this misdeed must thou hinder.

SIGURD.

[Goes quickly to the door q/ the hut, and calls inJ\
Up from the board, Ornulf ; take vengeance on
Kare the Peasant.

ORNULF,

[Comes out, with the rest.] Kare the Peasant —
where is he ?

SIGURD.

He is making for Gunnar's hall to burn it over
their heads.

ORNULF.

Ha-ha — let him do as he will ; so shall I be
avenged on Gunnar and Hiordis, and afterwards
I can deal with Kare.

SIGURD.

Nay, that rede avails not ; wouldst thou strike
at Kare, thou must seek him out to-night ; for
when his misdeed is done, he will take to the
mountains. I have challenged Gunnar to meet
me, man to man ; him thou hast safe enough,
unless I myself — but no matter. — To-night he
must be shielded from his foes ; it would ill befit
thee to let so vile a caitiff as Kare rob thee of thy
revenge.

ORNULF.

Thou say'st truly. To-night will I shield the
slayer of Thorolf ; but to-morrow he must die.

SIGURD.
He or I — doubt not of that !

ACT IV.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 107

ORNULF.

Come then, to take vengeance for Ornulfs
sons.

[He goes out with his men by the back, to
the right.

SIGURD.

Dagny, do thou follow them; — I must bide
here ; for the rumour of the combat is already
abroad, and I may not meet Gunnar ere the time
comes. But thou — do thou keep rein on thy
father ; he must go honourably to work ; in
Gunnar's hall there are many women ; no harm
must befall Hidrdis or the rest.

DAGNY.

Yes, I will follow them. Thou takest thought
even for Hiordis ; I thank thee for it.

SIGURD.
Go, go, Dagny !

DAGNY.

I go ; but be thou at ease as to Hiordis ; she
has gilded armour in her bower, and will know
how to shield herself.

SIGURD.

That deem I too ; but go thou nevertheless ;
guide thy father's course; watch over all — and
over Gunnar's wife !

DAGNY.
Trust to me. Farewell, till we meet again !.

[She follows the others.

SIGURD.
'Tis the first time, foster-brother, that I stand

108 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT IV.

weaponless whilst thou art in danger. [Listens.]
I hear shouts and sword-strokes ; — they are already
at the hall. [Goes towards the right, but slops and
recoils in astonishment.] Hidrdis ! Comes she
hither !

HIORDIS enters, clad in a short scarlet kirtle, with
gilded armour ; helmet, hauberk, arm-plates, and
greaves. Her hair is flying loose ; at her back
Jiangs a quiver., and at her belt a small shield.
She has in her hand the bow strung with her
hair.

HIORDIS.
[Hastily looking behind her, as though in dread oj

something pursuing her, goes close up to SIGURD,

seizes him by the arm, and whispers :] Sigurd,

Sigurd, canst thou see it ?

SIGURD.
What ? Where ?

HIORDIS.

The wolf there — close behind me ; it does not

move ; it glares at me with its two red eyes. It

| is my wraith,1 Sigurd! Three times has it

I appeared to me ; that bodes that I shall surely

; die to-night !

SIGURD.
Hiordis, Hidrdis !

HIORDIS.

It has sunk into the earth ! Aye, aye, now it
has warned me.

1 The word " wraith " is here used in an obviously inexact
sense; but the wraith seemed to be the nearest equivalent in
English mythology to the Scandinavian " fylgie," an attendant
spirit, often regarded as a sort of emanation from the person
it accompanied, and sometimes (as in this case) typifying that
person's moral attributes.

ACT IV.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 109

SIGURD.
Thou art sick ; come, go in with me.

HIORDIS.
Nay, here will I bide; I have but little time left.

SIGURD.
What has befallen thee ?

HIORDIS.

What has befallen ? That know I not ; but
'twas true what thou said'st to-day, that Gunnar
and Dagny stand between us ; we must away
from them and from life ; then can we be
together !

SIGURD.
We ? Ha, thou meanest

HIORDIS.

[With dignity.] I have been homeless in this
world from that day thou didst take another to
wife. That was ill done of thee ! All good gifts
may a man give to his faithful friend — all, save
the woman he loves ; for if he do that, he rends
the Norn's secret web, and two lives are wrecked.
An unerring voice within me tells me I came into
the world that my strong soul might cheer and
uphold thee through heavy days, and that thou
wert born to the end I might find in one man all
that seemed to me great and noble; for this I
know Sigurd — had we two held together, then
hadst thou become more famous than all others,
and I happier.

SIGURD.

It avails not now to mourn. Think'st thou 'tis
a merry life that awaits me ? To be by Dagny's

110 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT IV.

side day by day, and feign a love my heart
shrinks from ? Yet so it must be ; it cannot be
altered.

HIORDIS.

[In a growing frenzy.] It shall be altered!
We must out of this life, both of us ! Seest thou
this bow-string ? With it can I surely hit my
mark ; for I have crooned fair sorceries over it !
[Places an arrow in the bow, which is strung .]
Hark ! hark ! that rushing in the air ? It is the
dead men's ride to Valhal : I have bewitched them
hither ; — we two will join them in their ride !

SIGURD.

[Shrinking back.] Hiordis, Hiordis — I fear
thee!

HIORDIS.

[Not heeding him.] Our fate no power can
alter now ! Oh, 'tis better so than if thou hadst
wedded me here in this life — if I had sat in thy
homestead weaving linen and wool for thee and
bearing thee children — pah !

SIGURD.

Hold, hold! Thy sorceries have been too
strong for thee ; they have made thee soul-sick,
Hiordis ! [Horror-struck.] Ha, see — see ! Gunnar's
hall — it is burning !

HIORDIS.

Let it burn, let it burn ! The cloud-hall up
yonder is loftier than Gunnar's rafter-roof !

SIGURD.
But Egil, thy son — they are slaying him !

ACT IV.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. Ill

HlORDIS.

Let him die — my shame dies with him !

SIGURD.

And Gunnar — they are taking thy husband's
life!

HlORDIS.

What care I ! A better husband shall I follow
home this night ! Ay, Sigurd, so must it be ;
here on this earth grows 110 happiness for me.
The White God is coming northward ; him will I
not meet ; the old gods are strong no longer ; —
they sleep, they sit half shadow-like on high ; —
with them will we strive ! Out of this life,
Sigurd ! I will enthrone thee king in heaven, and
I myself will sit by thy side. [The storm bursts
wildly.] Hark, hark, here comes our company !
Canst see the black steeds galloping ? — one is for
me and one for thee. [Draws the arrow to her ear
and shoots.] Away, then, on thy last ride home !

SIGURD.
Well aimed, Hiordis ! [He falls.

HlORDIS.

[Jubilant, rushes up to him] Sigurd, my brother,
— now art thou mine at last !

SIGURD.

Now less than ever. Here our ways part ; for
I am a Christian man.

HIORDIS.
[Appalled] Thou ! Ha, no, no !

112 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT IV.

SIGURD.

The White God is mine ; King ^Ethelstan taught
me to know him ; it is to him I go.

HIORDIS.

[In despair.] And I ! [Drops her bow.]

Woe ! woe !

SIGURD.

Heavy has my life been from the hour I tore

thee out of my own heart and gave thee to Gunnar.

I thank thee, Hiordis ; — now am I so light and

free. [Dies.

HIORDIS.

[Quietly.] Dead ! Then truly have I brought
my soul to wreck : [ The storm increases ; she
breaks forth wildly.] They come ! I have be-
witched them hither ! No, no ! I will not go
with you! I*Vill not ride without Sigurd! It
avails not — they see me ; they laugh and beckon
to me ; they spur their horses ! [Rushes out to the
edge of the cliff at the back.] They are upon me ; —
and no shelter, no hiding-place ! Ay, mayhap at
the bottom of the sea ! [She casts herself over.

[ORNULF, DAGNY, GUNNAR, with EGIL, gradually
followed by SIGURD'S and ORNULF'S men, enter
from the right.

ORNULF.

[Turning towards the grave-mound.} Now may
ye sleep in peace ; for ye lie not unavenged.

DAGNY.

[Entering.] Father, father — I die of fear — all
that blood and strife — and the storm; — hark,
hark!

ACT IV.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 113

GUNNAR.

[Carrying EGIL.] Peace, and shelter for ray
child.

ORNULF.
Gunnar !

GUNNAR.

Ay, Ornulf, ray homestead is burnt and my men
are slain ; 1 am in thy power ; do with me what
thou wilt !

ORNULF.

That Sigurd must look to. But in, under roof !
It is not safe out here.

DAGNY.

Ay, ay, in ! [Goes towards the boat-house, catches
sight of SIGURD'S body, and shrieks.] Sigurd, my
husband ! — They have slain him !

[Throwing herself upon him,

ORNULF.
[Rushes up.] Sigurd !

GUNNAR.
[Sets EGIL down.] Sigurd dead !

DAGNY.

[Looks despairingly at the men, who surround the
body] No, no, it is not so ; — he must be alive !
[Catches sight of the bow.} Ha, what is that ?

[Rises.
ORNULF.

Daughter, it is as first thou saidst — Sigurd is
slain.

GUNNAR.

[As if seized by a sudden thought.] And Hiordis !
— Has Hiordis been here ?

114 THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. [ACT IV.

DAGNY.

[Softly and with self-control.] I know not ; but
this I know, that her bow has been here.

GuNNAR.

Ay, I thought no less !

DAGNY.

Hush, hush ! [To herself.] So bitterly did she
hate him !

GUNNAR.

[Aside.] She has slain him — the night before
the combat ; then after all she loved me.

[A thrill of dread runs through the whole
group ; ASGARDSREIEN — the ride of the
fallen warriors to Valhal — hurtles through
the air.

EGIL.
[In terror. 1 Father ! See, see !

GUNNAR.
What is it ?

EGIL.
Up there — all the black horses !

GUNNAR.
It is the clouds that

ORNULF.
Nay, it is the dead men's home-faring.

EGIL.
[ With a shriek.'] Mother is with them .

DAGNY.
All good spirits !

ACT IV.] THE VIKINGS AT HELGELAND. 115

GUNNAR.

Child, what say'st thou ?

EGIL.

There — in front — on the black horse ! Father,
father !

[EoiL clings in terror to his father ; a short
pause ; the storm passes over, the clouds
part, the moon shines peacefully on the
scene.

GUNNAR.
[In quiet sorrow.] Now is Hiordis surely dead.

ORNULF.

So it must be, Gunnar; — and my vengeance
was rather against her than thee. Dear has this
meeting been to both of us ; — there is my hand ;
be there peace between us !

GUNNAR.

Thanks, Ornulf ! And now aboard ; I sail with
thee to Iceland.

ORNULF.

Ay, to Iceland ! Long will it be ere our forth-
faring is forgotten.

Weapon-wielding warriors' meeting,
woful, by the norland seaboard,
still shall live in song and saga
while our stem endures in Iceland.

THE 1ND

THE PRETENDERS

(1863)

CHARACTERS.

HAKON H!KONSSON, the King elected by the JBirehlegt.

INGA OP VABTEIG, his mother.

EARL SKULE.

LADY KAGNHILD, his wife.

SlGElD, his sister.

MABGEETE, his daughter.

GUTHOEM INGESSON.
SlGUED RlBBUNG.

NICHOLAS ABNESSON, Bishop of Oslo.

DAGFINN THE PEASANT, Hakon's marshal.

IVAE BODDE, his chaplain.

VEGA ED V^EBADAL, one of his guard.

GEEGOEIUS JONSSON, a nobleman.

PAUL FLIDA, a nobleman.

INGEBOEG, Andres SJcialdarband's wife.

PETEB, her son, a young priest.

SlEA VILIAM, Bishop Nicholas's chaplain.

MASTEE SIGAKD OF BRABANT, a physician.

JATGEIE SKALD, an Icelander.

BAKD BEATTE, a chieftain from the Trondhiem district.

Populace and Citizens of Bergen, Oslo, and Nidaros.

Priests, Monks, and Nuns.

Guests, Guards, and Ladies.

Men-at-Arms, etc. etc.

The action passes in the first half of the Thirteenth Century.

Pronunciation of Names: Hakon=Hoakoon ("oa" as in
"board"); Skule = Skoole ; Margrete=Margrayte; Guthorm =
Gootorm; Sigurd Ribbung=Sigoord Ribboong; Dagfinn ("a"
as in "hard"); Ivar Bodde^Eevar Bodde ; Vegard=Vaygard;
Jonsson = Yoonson ; Flida = Fleeda : Ingeborg = Ingheborg ;
Jatgeir = Yatgheir ; Bard Bratte = Board Bratte. The name
" Ingeborg" appears as " Ingebjorg " in Ibsen's text. The form
I have substituted is equally current in Norway, and less trouble
some to pronounce.

THE PRETENDERS.

HISTORIC PLAY IN FIVE ACTS.

ACT FIRST.

The churchyard of Christ Churchy Bergen. At
the back rises the churchy the main portal of
which faces the spectators. In front, on the left,
stands HAKON H!KONSSON, with DAGFINN THE
PEASANT, VEGARD OF V^ERADAL, IVAR BODDE,
and several other nobles and chieftains. Opposite
to him stand EARL SKULE, GREGORIUS JONSSON,
PAUL FLIDA, and others of the Earl's men.
Further back on the same side are seen SIGURD
RIBBUNG and his followers, and a little way from
him GUTHORM INGESSON, with several chiefs.
Men-at-arms line the approaches to the church ;
the common people Jill the churchyard ; many are
perched in the trees and seated on the walls ; all
seem to await, in suspense, the occurrence of
some event. All the church bells of the town
are ringing far and near.

EARL SKULE.
itiently, to Gi
Why tarry they so long in there ?

[Softly and impatiently, to GREGORIUS JONSSON.]
hv tarr

120 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
Hush ! The psalm is beginning.

[From inside the closed church doors, to the
accompaniment of trumpets, is heard a
CHOIR OF MONKS AND NUNS singing
Domine coeli, etc. etc. While the sing-
ing is going on} the church door is opened
from inside; in the porch BISHOP
NICHOLAS is seen, surrounded by Priests
and Monks.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

' Steps forward to the doorway and proclaims with
lifted crozier.] Inga of Varteig is even now
bearing the iron on behalf of Hakon the Pretender.
[The church door is closed again ; the singing
inside continues.

P
uphj

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

[In a low voice, to the EARL.] Call upon Holy King
Olaf to protect the right.

EARL SKULE.

[Hurriedly, with a deprecating gesture.] Not now.
Best not remind him of me.

IVAR BODDE.

[Seizing HAKON by the arm.] Pray to the Lord thy
God, Hakon Hakonsson.

HlKON.

No need ; I am sure of him.

r The singing in the church grows louder; all
uncover ; many fall upon their knees and
pray.

ACT I.] THE PRETENDERS. 121

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

[To the EARL.] A solemn hour for you and for
many !

EARL SKULE.

[Looking anxiously towards the church.^ A solemn
hour for Norway.

PAUL FLIDA.

[Near tffoEARL.] Now is the glowing iron in her
hands.

DAGFINN.

[Beside HAKON.] They are coming down the
nave.

IVAR BODDE.

Christ protect thy tender hands, Inga, mother
of the King !

HAKON.
Surely all my life shall reward her for this hour.

EARL SKULE.

[ Who has been listening intently, breaks out suddenly.]
Did she cry out ? Has she let the iron fall ?

PAUL FLIDA.
[Gocsup.~\ I know not what it was.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
Hark to the women weeping in the outer hall !

THE CHOIR IN THE CHURCH.
[Breaks forth in jubilation] Gloria in excelsis Deo !
[The doors are thrown open. ING A comes
forth, followed by Nuns, Priestst and
Monks.

122 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I.

INGA.

[On the church stepsJ] God has given judgment !
Behold these hands ; with them I bore the iron !

VOICES AMONGST THE MULTITUDE.

They are tender and white as before J

OTHER VOICES.
Fairer still !

THE WHOLE MULTITUDE.
He is Hakon's son ! He is Sverre's1 grandson !

HAKON.

[Embraces herJ\ Thanks to thee, tharks to thee,
blessed among women !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[In passing, to the EARL.] Twas ill done to press
for the ordeal.

EARL SKULE.

Nay, my lord Bishop, needs must we pray for
God's voice in this matter.

HAKON.

[Deeply moved, holding INGA by the handJ\ It is
done, then, that which my every fibre cried out
against — that which has made my heart shrivel
and writhe within me

DAGFINN.

Burning towards the multitude.'] Ay, look upon
this woman and bethink you, all that are gathered
here ! Who ever doubted her word, until certain
folk required that it should be doubted.
1 Pronounce Sverre.

ACT I.] THE PRETENDERS. 123

PAUL FLIDA.

Doubt has whispered in every corner from the
hour when Hakon the Pretender was borne, a little
child, into King Inge's 1 hall.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

And last winter it swelled to a roar, and sounded
forth over the land, both north and south ; I trow
every man can bear witness to that.

HAKON.

I myself can best bear witness to it. Therefore
have I yielded to the counsel of many faithful
friends, and humbled myself as no other chosen
king has done for many a day. I have proved my
birth by the ordeal, proved my right, as the son of
Hakon Sverresson, to succeed to the throne of
Norway. I will not now question who fostered the
doubt, and made it, as the Earl's kinsman says,
swell into a roar ; but this I know, that I have
suffered bitterly under it. I have been chosen
king from boyhood, but little kingly honour has
been shown me, even where it seemed I might look
for it most securely. I will but remind you of last
Palm Sunday in Nidaros,2 when I went up to the
altar to make my offering, and the Archbishop
turned away and made as though he saw me not,
to escape greeting me as kings are wont to be
greeted. Yet such slights I could easily have
borne, had not open war been like to break loose
in the land ; that I must needs hinder.

DAGFINN.
It may be well for kings to hearken to counsels

Pronounce Inght. « The old name for Trondhiem.

124 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I.

of prudence ; but had my counsel been heard in
this matter, it had not been with hot iron, but with
cold steel that Hakon Hakonsson had called for
judgment between himself and his foes.

HAKON.

Curb yourself, Dagfinn ; think what beseems the
man who is to be foremost in the State.

EARL SKULE.

[With a slight smile.] 'Tis easy to call every
one the King's foe who chimes not with the King's
will. Methinks he is the King's worst foe who
would counsel him against making good his right
to the kingship.

HAKON.

Who knows ? Were my right alone in question,
mayhap I had not paid so dear to prove it ; but
higher things are here at stake : my calling and
my duty. Deep and warm is the faith within me
— and 1 blush not to own it — that I alone am he
who in these times can sway the land to its weal.
Kingly birth begets kingly duty

EARL SKULE.

There are others here who bear themselves the
like fair witness.

SIGURD RIBBUNG.

That do I, and with full as good ground. My
grandfather was King Magnus Erlingsson

HlKON.

Ay, if your father, Erling Steinvaeg, was indeed
King Magnus's son ; but most folk deny it, and
in that matter none has yet faced the ordeal.

ACT I.] THE PRETENDERS. 125

SIGURD RIBBUNG.

The Ribbungs chose me as king of their own
free will, whereas 'twas by threats that Dagfinn the
Peasant and other Birchlegs l gained for you the
name of King.

HAKON.

Ay, so ill had you dealt with Norway that
the stock of Sverre had to claim its right with
threats.

GUTHORM INGESSON.
I am of the stock of Sverre as much as you

DAGFINN.
But not in the true male line.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
You come on the spindle side, Guthorm.

GUTHORM INGESSON.

Yet this I know, that my father, Inge Bardsson,
was lawfully chosen king of Norway.

HlKON.

Because none knew that Sverre's grandson was
alive. From the day that became known, he held
the kingdom in trust for me — not otherwise.

1 The " Birkebeiner " or Birchlegs were at this period a
political faction. They were so called because, at the time of
their first appearai>ce, when they seem to have been little more
than bandits, they eked out their scanty attire by making them-
selves leggings of birch-bark. Norway at this time swarmed
with factions, such as the "Baeler" or Croziers (Latin, baculus\
so called because Bishop Nicholas was their chief, the Ribbungs,
the Slittunss, etc., devoted, for the most part, to one or other of
the many Pretenders to the crown.

126 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I.

EARL SKULE.

That cannot truly be said ; Inge was king all his
days, with all lawful power and without reserve.
'Tis true enough that Guthorm has but little claim,
for he was born out of wedlock ; but I am King
Inge's lawfully begotten brother, and the law is
with me if I claim, and take, his full inheritance.

DAGFINN.

Ah, Sir Earl, of a truth you have taken full
inheritance, not of your father's wealth alone,
but of all the goods Hakon Sverresson left behind
him.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Not all, good Dagfinn. Respect the truth ; —
King Hakon has kept a brooch and the golden
ring he wears on his arm.

HAKON.

Be that as it will ; with God's help I shall win
myself wealth again. And now, ye barons and
thanes, ye churchmen and chieftains and men-at-
arms, now it is time we held the folkmote, as has
been agreed. I have sat with bound hands until
this day; methinks no man will blame me for
longing to have them loosed.

EARL SKULE.

There are others in like case, Hakon
Hakonsson.

HiKON.

[His attention arrested.] What mean you, Sir
Earl?

ACT I.] THE PRETENDERS. 127

EARL SKULE.

I mean that all we Pretenders have the same
cause for longing. We have all alike been straitly
bound, for none of us has known how far his right
might reach.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

The Church has been even as unstable as the
kingdom ; but now must we abide by the sainted
King Olaf s law.

DAGFINN.
[Half aloud.] Fresh subtleties !

[HAKON'S men gather more closely together.

HlKON.

[ With forced calmness, advances a couple of paces
towards the EARL.] I would fain think I have not
rightly taken your meaning. The ordeal has made
good my birthright to the kingdom, and therefore,
as I deem, the folkmote has nought to do but to
confirm my election, made at the Orething * six
years ago.

SEVERAL OF THE EARL'S AND SIGURD'S MEN.
No, no ! That we deny !

EARL SKULE.

'Twas with no such thought that we agreed to
hold the folkmote here. The ordeal has not given
you the kingdom ; it has but proved your title to
come forward to-day, along with the other Pre-
tenders here present, and contend for the right
you hold to be yours

1 A "thing," or assembly, held from time to time on the "ore"
or foreshore at the mouth of the river Nid, at Trondhiem.

128 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I.

HiKON.

[Constraining himself to be calm.] That means,
in brief, that for six years I have unlawfully borne
the name of King, and you, Sir Earl, have for six
years unlawfully ruled the land as regent for me.

EARL SKULE.

In no wise. When my brother died, 'twas
needful that some one should bear the kingly title.
The Birchlegs,and most of all Dagfinn the Peasant,
were active in your cause, and hastened your
election through before we others could set forth
our claims.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[To HAKON.] The Earl would say that that
election gave you but the use of the kingly power,
not the right to it.

EARL SKULE.

You have held all the marks of kingship ; but
Sigurd Ribbung and Guthorm Ingesson and I hold
ourselves to the full as near inheritors as you ;
and now shall the law judge between us, and say
whose shall be the inheritance for all time.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
In truth. Earl Skule reads the case aright.

EARL SKULE.

There has been talk more than once in these
years of both ordeal and folkmote ; but something
has ever come between. And, Sir Hakon, if you
deemed your right for ever fixed by the first
election, how came you to accept the ordeal ?

ACT I.] THE PRETENDERS. 129

[Exasperated.] To your swords, King's men,
t them decide!

DAGFINN.
^Exasperated.] T<

MANY OF THE KING'S MEN.
[Rushing forward.] Down with the King's
enemies !

EARL SKULE.

[Calls to his men.] Slay none ! Wound none !
Only keep them off.

HAKON.

[Restraining his men] Up with your blades, all
who have drawn them ! — Up with your blades, I
say ! [Calmly.] You make things tenfold worse
for me by such doings.

EARL SKULE.

Even so are men flying at each other's throats
all the country over. You see now, Hakon
Hakonsson ; does not this show clearly what you
have to do, if you care aught for the country's
peace and the lives of men ?

HAKON.

[After some reflection.] Yes — I see it. [Takes
INGA by the hand and turns to one of those standing
by him.] Torkell, you were a trusty man in my
father's guard ; take this woman to your own
abode and see you tend her well ; she was very
dear to Hakon Sverresson. — God bless you, my
mother, — now I must gird me for the folkmote,
[!NGA presses his hand, and goes with TORKELU
HAxoN is silent awhile, then steps forward and says
with emphasis :] The law shall decide, and it alone.
Ye Birchlegs who, at the Orething, took me for

II I

130 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I.

your King, I free you from the oath ye sware to
me. You, Dagfinn, are no longer my marshal ; I
will not appear with marshal or with guard,1 with
vassals or with henchmen. I am a poor man ; all
my inheritance is a brooch and this gold ring ; —
these are scant goods wherewith to reward so
many good men's service. Now, ye other Pre-
tenders, now we stand equal ; I will have no
advantage of you, save the right which I have
from above — that I neither can nor will share with
any one. — Let the assembly-call be sounded, and
then let God and the Holy King Olaf s law decide.
[Goes out with his men to the left ; blasts

of trumpets and horns are heard in the

distance.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

[To the EARL, as the crowd is departing.] Me-
thought you seemed afraid during the ordeal, and
now you look so glad and of good cheer.

EARL SKULE.

[ Well at ease.] Marked you that he had Sverre's
eyes as he spoke ? Whether he or I be chosen
king, the choice will be good.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

[Uneasily,] But do not you give way. Think
of all who stand or fall with your cause.

* The word hird is very difficult to render. It meant some-
thing between "court,"' "household," and "guard." I have
never translated it "court," as that word seemed to convey an
idea of peaceful civilisation foreign to the country and period ;
but I have used either " guard " or " household " as the context
seemed to demand. JHirdmAnd I have generally rendered
' ' man-at-arms.'' Lendcrmind I have represented by " baroa " ;
lagnund and sysselmand by "thane"; and stallare by
" marshal"— all mere tough approximations.

ACT I.] THE PRETENDERS. 131

EARL SKULE.

I stand now upon justice; I no longer fear to
call upon Saint Olaf.

[Goes out to the left with his followers.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Hastening after DAG FINN THE PEASANT.] All
goes well, good Dagfinn, all goes well ; — but keep
the Earl far from the King when he is chosen ; —
see you keep them far apart !

[All go out to the left, behind the church.

A hall in the Palace. In front, on the Ieft3 is a low
window ; on the rig/it, the entrance-door ; at the
back, a larger door which leads into the King's
Hall. By the window, a table; chairs and
benches stand about.

LA^Y RAGNHILD and MARGRETE enter by the smaller
door; SIGRID follows immediately.

LADY RAGNHILD.
In here ?

MARGRETE.
Ay, here it is darkest.

LADY RAGNHILD.

[Goes to the window ^\ And here we can look
down upon the mote-stead.

MARGRETE.

[Looks out cautiously.] Ay, there they are, all
gathered behind the church. [Turns, in tears.]
Yonder must now betide what will bring so much
in its train.

132 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I.

LADY RAGNHILD.
Who will be master in this hall to-morrow ?

MARGRETE.

Oh, hush ! So heavy a day I had never thought
to see.

LADY RAGNHILD.

It had to be ; to rule in another's name was no
full work for him.

MARGRETE.

Ay, it had to be ; he could never rest content
with but the name of king.

LADY RAGNHILD.
Of whom speak you ?

MARGRETE.
Of Hakon.

LADY RAGNHILD.

I spoke of the Earl.

MARGRETE.
There breathe not nobler men than they two.

LADY RAGNHILD.

See you Sigurd Ribbung ? With what a look
of evil cunning he sits there — like a wolf in chains.

MARGRETE.

Ay, see ! — He folds his hands before him on his
sword-hilt and rests his chin upon them.

LADY RAGNHILD.
He bites his beard and laughs

ACT I.] THE PRETENDERS. 133

MARGRETE.
Tis an evil laugh.

LADY RAGNHILD.

He knows that none will further his cause ;
— 'tis that which makes him wroth. Who is
yonder thane that speaks now ?

MARGRETE.
That is Gunnar Grionbak.

LADY RAGNHILD.
Is he for the Earl ?

MARGRETE.
No, he is for the King

LADY RAGNHILD.
[Looking at her.] For whom say you ?

MARGRETE.
For Hakon Hakonsson.

LADY RAGNHILD.

[Looks out; after a short pause.] Where sits
Guthorm Ingesson ? — I see him not.

MARGRETE.

Behind his men, lowest of all there — in a long
mantle.

LADY RAGNHILD.
Ay, there.

MARGRETB.
He looks as though he were ashamed

134 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I.

LADY RAONHILD.
That is for his mother's sake.

MARORETE.
So looked not Hakon.

LADY RAGNHILD.
Who speaks now ?

MARGRETE.

[Looking out.] Tord Skolle, the thane of
Ranafylke.

LADY RAGNHILD.
Is he for the Earl ?

MARGRETE.
No— for Hakon.

LADY RAGNHILD.
How motionless the Earl sits listening !

MARGRETE.

Hakon seems thoughtful — but strong none the
less. [With animation.] If there came a traveller
from afar, he could pick out those two amongst all
the thousand others.

LADY RAGNHILD.

See, Margrete ! Dagfinn the Peasant drags
forth a gilded chair for Hakon

MARGRETE.

Paul Flida places one like it behind the

Earl

LADY RAGNHILD.
Hakon's men seek to hinder it !

ACT I.] THE PRETENDERS. 135

MARGRETE.
The Earl holds fast to the chair !

LADY RAGNHILD.

Hakon speaks wrathfully to him. [Starts back,
with a cry, from the window.] Lord Jesus! Saw

you his eyes — and his smile ! No, that was

not the Earl !

MARGRETE.

[ Who has followed her in terror.] 'Twas not
Hakon either ! Neither one nor the other !

SIGRID.
[At the window.] Oh pitiful ! Oh pitiful !

MARGRETE.
Sigrid !

LADY RAGNHILD.
You here !

SIGRID.

Goes the path so low that leads up to the
throne !

MARGRETE.

Oh, pray with us, that all be guided for the
best.

LADY RAGNHILD.

[White and horror-stricken, to SIGRID.] Saw you

him ? Saw you my husband ? His eyes

and his smile — I should not have known him !

SISRID.
Looked he like Sigurd Ribbung ?

LADY RAGNHILD.
[Softly.] Ay, he looked like Sigurd Ribbung,

136 THE PRETENDERS. j^ACT I.

SlGRID.

Laughed he like Sigurd ?

LADY RAGNHILD.
Ay, ay!

SlGRID.

Then must we all pray.

LADY RAGNHILD.

[With the force of despair] The Earl must be
chosen King ! 'Twill work ruin in his soul if he
be not the first man in the land !

SlGRID.

[More loudly.'] Then must we all pray !

LADY RAGNHILD.

Hist ! What is that ? [At the window.] What
shouts ! All the men have risen ; all the banners
and standards wave in the wind.

SlGRID.

[Seizes her by the arm] Pray, woman ! Pray
for your husband !

LADY RAGNHILD.

Ay, Holy King Olaf, give him all the power in
this land !

SlGRID.

[Wildly.] None — none ! Else is he lost !

LADY RAGNHILD.

He must have the power. All the good in him
will grow and blossom should he win it. — Look

ACT I.] THE PRETENDERS. 137

forth, Margrete ! Listen ! [Starts back a step.]
All hands are lifted for an oath !

[MARGRETE listens at the window.

LADY RAGNHILD.
God and St. Olaf, to whom do they swear ?

SIGRID.
Pray!

[MARGRETE listens, and with uplifted hand
motions for silence.

LADY RAGNHILD.
[After a little while.} Speak !

[From the mote-stead is heard a loud blast
of trumpets and horns.

LADY RAGNHILD.

God and St. Olaf! To whom have they
sworn ? [A short pause.

MARGRETE.

[Turns her head and says .•] They have chosen
Hakon Hakonsson king.

[The music of the royal procession is heard,
first in the distance and then nearer and
nearer. LADY RAGNHILD clings weeping
to SIGRID, who leads her quietly out on the
right; MARGRETE remains immovable,
leaning against the window-frame. The
KING'S attendants open the great doors,
disclosing the interior of the Hall, which
is gradually Jilled by the procession from
the mote-stead.

HAKON.
[In the doorway, turning to IVAR BODDE.] Bring

138 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I.

me a pen and wax and silk — I have parchment
here. [Advances exultantly to the table and spreads
some rolls of parchment upon it.~\ Margrete, now
am I King !

MARGRETE.
Hail to my lord and King !

HAKON.

I thank you. [Looks at her and takes her hand.}
Forgive me ; I forgot that it must wound you.

MARGRETE.

[Drawing her hand awayJ\ It did not wound
me ; — of a surety you are born to be king.

HAKON.

\Willi animation.] Ay, must not all men own
it, who remember how marvellously God and the
saints have shielded me from all harm ? I was but
a year old when the Birchlegs bore me over the
mountains, in frost and storm, and through the
very midst of those who sought my life. At
Nidaros I came scatheless from the Baglers1 when
they burnt the town with so great a slaughter,
while King Inge himself barely saved his life by
climbing on shipboard up the anchor-cable.

MARGRETE.
Your youth has been a hard one.

HAKON.

[Looking steadily at her.] Methinks you might
have made it easier.

MARGRETE.
I?

» See note, p. 125.

ACT I.J THE PRETENDERS. 139

HAKON.

You might have been so good a foster-sister to
me, through all the years when we were growing
up together.

MARGRETE.

Bat it fell out otherwise.

HAKON.

Ay, it fell out otherwise ; — we looked at each
other, I from my corner, you from yours, but we

seldom spoke [Impatiently.} What is keeping

him ? [IvAR BODDE comes with the writing materials}
Are you there ? Give me the things !

[HiKON seats himself at the table and
writes. A little while after, EARL SKULE
comes in ; then DAGFINN THE PEASANT,
BISHOP NICHOLAS and VEGARD

VuERADAL.

HAKON.

[Looks up and lays down his pen} Know you, Sir
Earl, what I am writing here ? [The EARL
approaches} This is to my mother ; I thank her
for all her love, and kiss her a thousand times —
here in the letter you understand. She is to be
sent eastward to Borgasyssel, there to live with
all queenly honours,

EARL SKULE.
You will not keep her in the palace t

HAKON.

She is too dear to me, Earl ; — a king must have
none about him whom he loves too well. A king
must act with free hands ; he must stand alone

140 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I.

he must neither be led nor lured. There is so
much to be mended in Norway.

[Goes on writing.

VEGARD V^RADAL.

[Softly to BISHOP NICHOLAS.] Tis by my counsel
he deals thus with Inga, his mother.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
I knew your hand in it at once.

VEGARD V^ERADAL.
But now one good turn deserves another.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Wait. I will keep my promise.

HAKON.

[Gives the parchment to IVAR BODDE.] Fold it
together and bear it to her yourself, with many
loving greetings

IVAR BODDE.

[ Who has glanced at the parchment.] My lord —
you write here — " to-day " !

HlKON.

The wind is fair for a southward course.

DAGFINN.

[Slowly.'] Bethink you, my lord King, that she
has lain all night on the altar-steps in prayer and
fasting.

IVAR BODDE.

And sh<* may well be weary after the ordeal.

ACT I.] THE PRETENDERS. 141

HAKON.

True, true ; — my good, kind mother

[Collects himself.] Well, if she be too weary, let
her wait until to-morrow.

IVAR BoDDE.

It shall be as you will. [Puts another parchment
forward.] But this other, my lord.

HAKON.
That other ? — Ivar Bodde, I cannot.

DAGFINN.

[Points to the letter for INGA.] Yet you could do
that.

IVAR BODDE.

All things sinful must be put away.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

\Who has drawn near in the meantime.] Bind the
Earl's hands, King Hakon.

HAKON.
[In a low voice.] Think you that is needful ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

At no cheaper rate can you buy peace in the
land.

HAKON.

Then I can do it ! Give me the pen !

[Writes.
EARL SKULE.

[To the BISHOP, who crosses to the right] You
have the King's ear, it would seem.

H2 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
For your behoof.

EARL SKULE.
Say you so ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Before nightfall you will thank me.

[He moves away.

HiKON.

[Hands the EARL the parchment.] Read that,
Earl Skule.

EARL SKULE.

[Reads, looks in surprise at the KING, and says in a
low voice.] You break with Kanga the Young ?

HAKON.

With Kanga whom I have loved more than all
the world. From this day forth she must never
more cross the King's path.

EARL SKULE.

This that you do is a great thing, Hakon. Mine
own memory tells me what it must cost.

HlKON.

Whoever is too dear to the King must away. —
Tie up the letter. [Gives it to IVAR BODDE.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Bending over the chair.] You have made a
great stride towards the Earl's friendship, my lord
King.

HAKON.

[Holds out his hand to him.] 1 thank you, Bishop

ACT I.] THE PRETENDERS. 143

Nicholas ; you counselled me for the best. Ask
a grace of me, and I will grant it.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Will you ?

HiKON.

I promise it on my kingly faith.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Then make Vegard Vaeradal thane of Haloga-
land.

HiKON.

Vegard ? He is well-nigh the trustiest friend I
have ; I am loath to send him so far from me.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

The King's friend must be royally rewarded.
Bind the Earl's hands as I have counselled you,
and you will be secure for ever and a day.

HiKON.

[Takes a sheet of parchment.] Vegard shall bear
rule in Halogaland. [Writing.] I hereby grant it
under my royal hand. [The BISHOP retires.

EARL SKULE.
[Approaches the table.] What write you now ?

HiKON.

[Hands him the sheet.] Read.

EARL SKULE.

[Reads, and looks steadily at the KINO.] Vegard
Vaeradal ? In Halogaland ?

144 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I

HiKON.

The northern part stands vacant.

EARL SKULE.

Bethink you that Andres Skialdarband1 has also
a charge in the north. They two are bitter foes ; —
Andres Skialdarband is of my following

HiKON.

[Smiling and rising.] And Vegard Vaeradal of
mine. Therefore they must e'en make friends
again, the sooner the better. Henceforth there
must be no enmity between the King's men and
the Earl's.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Ha ! — this may go too far. [Approaches, uneasy.

EARL SKULE.
Your thoughts are wise and deep, Hakon.

HiKON.

[Warmly.] Earl Skule, to-day have I taken
the kingdom from you — let your daughter share
it with me !

EARL SKULE.
My daughter !

MARGRETE.
Oh, God !

HiKON.

Margrete, will you be my Queen ?

[MARGRETE is silent.

HiKON.

[Takes her hand] Answer me.

Pronounce Shaldarband.

ACT I.]

THE PRETEND-EBS.

145

MARGRETE.
[Softly.] I will gladly be your wife.

EARL SKULE,

[Pressing H!KON'S hand.] Peace and friendship
from my heart !

HAKON.
I thank you.

IVAR BODDE.

[To DAGFINN.] Heaven be praised ; here is the
dawn.

DAGFINN.

I almost believe it. Never before have I liked
the Earl so well.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Behind him.'] Ever on your guard, good Dag-
finn — ever on your guard.

IVAR BODDE.

[To VEGARD.] Now are you thane in Haloga-
land ; here you have it under the King's hand.

[Gives him the letter.

VEGARD V.ERADAL.

I will thank the King for his favour another
time. [About to go.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Stops him.] Andres Skialdarband is an ugly
neighbour ; be not cowed by him.

VEGARD V.ERADAL.
No one has yet cowed Vegard Vaeradal. [Goes.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[Following.] Be as rock and flint to Andres

II K

146 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I.

Skialdarband, — and, while I think on't, take my
blessing with you.

IVAR BODDE.

[ Who has been waiting behind the KING with the
parchments in his hand.] Here are the letters, my
lord.

HAKON.

Good ; give them to the Earl.

IVAR BODDE.
To the Earl ? Will you not seal them ?

HAKON.
The Earl is wont to do that ;— he holds the seal.

IVAR BODDE.

[Softly.] Ay, hitherto — while he was regent—
but now .'

HiKON.

Now as before ; — the Earl holds the seal.

[Moves away.
EARL SKULE.
Give me the letters, Ivar Bodde.

[Goes to the table with them, takes out the
Great Seal which he wears under his girdle,
and seals the letters during the following.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

{Muttering."] Hakon Hakonsson is King — and
the Earl holds the royal seal ; — I like that— I like
that.

HAKON.

What says my lord Bishop ?

ACT I.] THE PRETENDERS. 147

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

I say that God and St. OJaf watch over their
holy church. [Goes into the Kings Hall.

HiKON.

[Approaching MARGRETE.] A wise queen can
do great things in the land : I chose you fearlessly,
for I know you are wise.

MARGRETE.
Only that?

HiKON.

What mean you ?

MARGRETE.
Nothing, my lord, nothing.

HiKON.

And you will bear me no grudge if for my sake
you have had to forgo fair hopes ?

MARGRETE.
I have forgone no fair hopes for your sake.

HiKON.

And you will stand ever near me, and give me
good counsel ?

MARGRETE.
I would fain stand near to you.

HAKON.

And give me good counsel. I thank you for
that; a woman's counsel profits every man, and
henceforth I have none but you — my mother I
had to send away

148 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT I.

MARGRETE.
Ay, she was too dear to you

HAKON.

And I am King. Farewell then, Margrete !
You are so young yet ; but next summer shall
our bridal be, — and from that hour I swear to
keep you by my side in all seemly faith and
honour.

MARGRETE.

[Smiles sadly.] Ay, 'twill be long, I know, ere
you send me away.

HAKON.

[Brightly.'] Send you away ? That will I never
do.

MARGRETE.

[With tears in her eyes.] No, that Hakon does
only to those who are too dear to him.

[She goes towards the entrance door. HAKON
gazes thoughtfully after her.

LADY RAGNHILD.

[From the right.] The King and the Earl tariy
here so long ! My fears are killing me ; — Margrete,
what has the King said and done ?

MARGRETE.

Oh, much, much ! Last of all, he chose a thane
and a Queen.

LADY RAGNHILD.
You, Margrete !

MARGRETE.
[Throws her arms rotmd her mother s neck.] Yes !

ACT I.] THE PRETENDERS. 149

LADY RAGNIIILD.
You are to be Queen !

MARGRETE.

Queen only ; — but I think I am glad even of
that. [She and her mother go out to the right.

EARL SKULE.

[To IVAR BODDE.] Here are our letters ; bear
them to the King's mother and to Kanga.

[IvAR BODDE bows and goes'.

DAGFINN.

[In the doorway of the hall.] The Archbishop
of Nidaros craves leave to offer King Hakon
Hakonsson his homage.

HAKON.

[Draws a deep breath] At last, then, I am King
of Norway.

EARL SKULE.

[Places the Great Seal in his girdle.] But / rule the
realm.

ACT SECOND.

Banquet Hall in the Palace at Bergen. A large bay-
window in the middle of the back wall, along which
there is a dais with seals for the ladies. Against
the left wall stands the throne, raised some steps
above thejloor ; in the centre of the opposite wall
is the great entrance door. Banners, standards,
shields and weapons }with many-coloured draperies,
hang from the wall-timbers and from the carven
rafters. Around the hall stand drin king-tables,
with flagons, horns, and beakers.

KING HAKON sits upon the dais, with MARGRETE,
SIGRID, LADY RAGNHILD, and many noble ladies.
IVAR BODDE stands behind the King's chair.
Round the drinking-tabtes are seated the King's
and the Earls men, with guests. At the foremost
table on the right sit, among others, DAGFINN
THE PEASANT, GREGORIUS JONSSON, and PAUL
FLIDA. EARL SKULE and BISHOP NICHOLAS are
playing chess at a table on the left. The Earl's
house-folk go to and fro, bearing cans of liquor.
From an adjoining room, music is heard during
the following scene.

DAGFINN.

The fifth day now wears on, yet the henchmen
are none the less nimble at setting forth the
brimming flagons.

PAUL FLIDA.
It was never the Earl's wont to stint his guests.

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. 151

DAGFINN.

No, so it would seem. So royal a bridal-feast
was never seen in Norway before.

PAUL FLIDA.

Earl Skule has never before given a daughter in
marriage.

DAGFINN.
True, true ; the Earl is a mighty man.

A MAN-AT-ARMS.

He holds a third part of the kingdom. That
is more than any earl has held heretofore.

PAUL FLIDA.
But the King's part is larger.

DAGFINN.

We talk not of that here ; we are friends now,
and fully at one. [Drinks to PAUL.] So let King
be King and Earl be Earl.

PAUL FLIDA.

[Laughs.] 'Tis easy to hear that you are a
King's man.

DAGFINN.
That should the Earl's men also be.

PAUL FLIDA.

Never. We have sworn fealty to the Earl, not
to the King.

DAGFINN.
That may yet have to be done.

152 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[To the EARL, under cover of the game.] Hear
you what Dagfinn the Peasant says ?

EARL SKULE.
[Without looking up.] I hear.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

[Looking steadily at DAGFINN.] Has the King
thoughts of that ?

DAGFINN.
Nay, nay, — let be ; — no wrangling to-day.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

The King would force your men to swear him
fealty, Earl.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

[Louder.] Has the King thoughts of that, I
ask?

DAGFINN.

I will not answer. Let us drink to peace and
friendship between the King and the Earl. The
ale is good.

PAUL FLIDA.
It has had time enough to mellow.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

Three times has the Earl prepared the bridal —
three times the King promised to come — three
times he came not.

DAGFINN.

Blame the Earl for that : he gave us plenty te
do in Viken.

ACT II.]

THE PRETENDERS.

153

PAUL FLIDA.

'Tis said Sigurd Ribbung gave you still more to
do in Vermeland.

DAGFINN.

[Flaring up.] Ay, and who was it that let
Sigurd Ribbung slip through their fingers ?

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

Sigurd Ribbung fled from us at Nidaros, that
all men know.

DAGFINN.

But no man knows that you did aught to hinder
him.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[To the EARL, who is pondering on a move.] Hear
you, Earl ? It was you who let Sigurd Ribbung
escape.

EARL SKULE.
[Makes a move.] That is an old story.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

Have you not heard, then, of the Icelander
Andres Torsteinsson, Sigurd Ribbung' s friend

DAGFINN.

Ay ; when Sigurd had escaped, you hanged
the Icelander — that I know.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Makes a move and says laughingly to the EARL.]
I take the pawn, Sir Earl.1

1 Bishop Nicholas's speech, " Nu slar jeg bonden, herre jarl,"
means literally, "Now I strike (or slay) the peasant"; the pawn
being called in Norwegian "bonde," peasant, as in German

154 THE PRETENDERS. ^ACT II.

EARL SKULE.

[Aloud.] Take him; a pawn is of small
account. [Makes a move.

DAGFJNN.

Ay ; that the Icelander found to his cost, when
Sigurd Ribbung escaped to Vermeland.

[Suppressed laughter amongst the King's
men; the conversation is continued in a
low tone ; presently a man comes in and
whispers to GREGORIUS JONSSON.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Then I move here, and you have lost.

EARL SKULE.
So it would seem.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Leaning back in his chair.] You did not guard
the king well at the last.

EARL SKULE.

[Strews the pieces topsy-turvy and rises.] I have
long been weary of guarding kings.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

[Approaches and says in a low tone.] Sir Earl,
Jostein1 Tamb sends word that the ship now
lies ready for sea.

"Bauer." Thus in this speech and the next the Bishop and the
Earl are girding at Dagfinn the Peasant. [Our own word
" pawn" comes from the Spanish peon - a foot-soldier or day-
labourer.]
1 Pronounce Yostein.

ACT II.]

THE PRETENDERS.

155

EARL SKULE.

[Softly.] Good. [Takes out a sealed parchment.]
Here is the letter.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

[Shaking his head.] Earl, Earl,— is this well
bethought ?

EARL SKULE.
What ?

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
It bears the King's seal.

EARL SKULE.
I am acting for the King's good.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
Then let the King himself reject the offer.

EARL SKULE.

That he will not, if he has his own way. His
whole heart is bent on cowing the Ribbungs,
therefore he is fain to secure himself on other
sides.

GREGORIUS JoNsson.
Your way may be wise, — but it is dangerous.

EARL SKULE.

Leave that to me. Take the letter, and bid
Jostein sail forthwith.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
It shall be as you command.

[Goes out to the right, and presently comes
in again.

156 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[To the EARL.] You have much to see to, it
would seem.

EARL SKULE.
But small thanks for it.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
The King has risen.

[HlKON comes down; all the men nsefrom
the tables.

HiKON.

[To the BISHOP.] We are rejoiced to see you
bear up so bravely and well through all these days
of merriment.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

There comes a flicker now and again, my lord
King; but 'twill scarce last long. I have lain
sick all the winter through.

HAKON.

Ay, ay, — you have lived a strong life, rich in
deeds of fame.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Shakes his head.] Ah, 'tis little enough I have
done, and I have much still left to do. If I but
knew whether I should have time for it all !

HiKON.

The living must take up the tasks of those who
go before, honoured lord ; we all have the welfare
of the land at heart. [Turns to the EARL.] I
marvel much at one thing : that neither of our
thanes from Halogaland has come to the bridal.

ACT II.J

THE PRETENDERS.

157

EARL SKULE.

True ; I doubted not that Andres Skialdarband
would be here.

HlKON.

[Smiling.'] And Vegard Vaeradal too.

EARL SKULE.

Ay, Vegard too.

HlKON.

[In jest.~\ And I trust you would now have
received my old friend better than you did seven
years ago on Oslo wharf, when you stabbed him
in the cheek so that the blade cut its way out.

EARL SKULE.

[With a forced laugh.'] Ay, the time that
Gunnulf, your mother's brother, cut off the right
hand of Sira Eiliv, my best friend and counsellor.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Merrily.] And when Dagfinn the Peasant and
the men-at-arms set a strong night-watch on the
King's ship, saying that the King was unsafe in
the Earl's ward ?

HiKON.

[Seriously.] Those days are old and forgotten.

DAGFINN.

[Approaching.] Now may we sound the call tc
the weapon-sports on the green, if so please you,
my lord.

HlKON.

Good. To-day will we give up to nought but

158 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT H.

merriment ; to-morrow we must turn our thoughts
again to the Ribbungs and the Earl of Orkney.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Ay, he denies to pay tribute, is it not so ?

HAKON.

Were I once well rid of the Ribbungs, I would
myself fare westward.

[HAKON goes towards the dais, gives his
hand to MARGRETE, and leads her out to
the right ; the others gradually follow.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[To IVAR BODDE.] Who is the man called
Jostein Tamb ?

IVAR BODDE.

There is a trader from Orkney who bears that
name.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

From Orkney ? So, so ! And now he sails
home again ?

IVAR BODDE.
So I think.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[Softly.] With a precious freight, Ivar Bodde.

IVAR BODDE.
Corn and raiment, most like.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
And a letter from Earl Skule.

IVAR BODDE.
[Starling.] To whom ?

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. 159

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
I know not j it bore the King's seal

IV ARBODDE.

[Seizes him by the arm.~\ Lord Bishop, — is it as
you say ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Hush ! Do not mix me up in the matter.

[Retires.

IVAR BODDE.

Then must I straightway Dagfinn the

Peasant ! Dagfinn ! Dagfinn !

[Pushes through the crowd towards the door.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[In a tone of commiseration, to GREGORIUS
JONSSON.] Never a day but one or another must
suffer in goods or freedom.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
Who is it now ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

A poor trader, — Jostein Tamb methinks they
called him.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

Jostein ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Dagfinn the Peasant would forbid him to set
sail.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
Dagfinn, would forbid him, say you ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
He went even now.

160 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
Pardon, my lord ; I must make speed •

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Ay, do even so, my dear lord ; — Dagfinn the
Peasant is so hasty.

[GREGORIUS JONSSON hastens out to the
right along with the remainder of the
company ; only EARL SKULE and BISHOP
NICHOLAS are left behind in the hall.

EARL SKULE.

[Walks up and down in deep thought; he seems
suddenly to awaken ; looks round him, and says :]
How still it has become here of a sudden !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
The King has gone.

EARL SKULE.
And every one has followed him.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
All, save us.

EARL SKULE.
It is a great thing to be King.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[Tentatively.] Are you fain to try it, Earl ?

EARL SKULE.

[With a serious smile .] I have tried it; every
night that brings me sleep makes me King of
Norway.

ACT il.] THE PRETENDERS. l6l

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Dreams forbode.

EARL SKULE.
Ay, and tempt.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Not you, surely. In bygone days, that I could
understand — but now, when you hold a third part
of the kingdom, rule as the first man in the land,
and are the Queen's father

EARL SKULE.
Now most of all — now most of all.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Hide nothing ! Confess ; for verily I can see a
great pain is gnawing you.

EARL SKULE.

Now most of all, I say. This is the great
curse that lies upon my whole life : to stand so
near to the highest, — with an abyss between. One
leap, and on the other side are the kingship, and
the purple robe, the throne, the might, and all !
I have it daily before my eyes — but can never
reach it.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

True, Earl, true.

EARL SKULE.

When they made Guthorm Sigurdsson king, I
was in the full strength of my youth ; It was
as though a voice cried aloud within me : Away
with the child, — I am the man, the strong man ! —

162 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II

But Guthorm was the king's son ; there yawned
an abyss between me and the throne.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
And you dared not venture

EARL SKULE.

Then Erling Steinvseg was chosen by the
Slittungs. The voice cried within me again :
Skule is a greater chieftain than Erling Steinvaeg !
But I must needs have broken with the Birch-
legs, — that was the abyss that time.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

And Erling became king of the Slittungs, and
after of the Ribbungs, and still you waited '

EARL SKULE.
I waited for Guthorm to die.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

And Guthorm died, and Inge Bardsson, your
brother, became king.

EARL SKULE.

Then I waited for my brother's death. He was
sickly from the first ; every morning, when we met
at holy mass, I would cast stolen glances to see
whether his sickness increased. Every twitch of
pain that crossed his face was as a puff of wind in
my sails, and bore me nearer to the throne.
Every sigh he breathed in his agony sounded to
me like an echoing trumpet-blast, like a herald
from afar, proclaiming that the throne should soon
be mine. Thus I tore up by the roots every

ACT II.]

THE PRETENDERS.

163

thought of brotherly kindness; and Inge died,
and Hakon came — and the Birchlegs made him
king.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
And you waited.

EARL SKULE.

Methought help must come from above. I felt
the kingly strength within me, and I was grow-
ing old ; every day that passed was a day taken
from my life-work. Each evening I thought :
To-morrow will come the miracle that shall strike
him down and set me in the empty seat.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Small was then Hakon' s power ; he was no
more than a child ; it wanted but a single step
from you — yet you took it not.

EARL SKULE.

That step was hard to take ; it would have
parted me from my kindred and from all my
friends.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Ay, there is the rub, Earl Skule, — that is the
curse which has lain upon your life. You would
fain know every way open at need, — you dare not
break all your bridges and keep only one, defend
it alone, and on it conquer or fall. You lay snares
for your foe, you set traps for his feet, and hang
sharp swords over his head ; you strew poison in
every dish, and you spread a hundred nets for
him ; but when he walks into your toils you dare
not draw the string ; if he stretch out his hand
for the poison, you think it safer he should fall by

THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

the sword; if he is like to be caught in the
morning, you hold it wiser to wait till eventide.

EARL SKULE.

[Looking earnestly at him.] And what would
you do, my lord Bishop ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Speak not of me ; my work is to build up
thrones in this land, not to sit on them and rule.

EARL SKULE.

[After a short pause.] Answer me one thing,
my honoured lord, and answer me truly. How
comes it that Hakon can follow the straight
path so unflinchingly ? He is no wiser, no bolder
than I.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Who does the greatest work in this world ?

EARL SKULE.
The greatest man.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
But who is the greatest man ?

EARL SKULE.
The bravest.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

So says the warrior. A priest would say : the
man of greatest faith, — a philosopher : the most
learned. But it is none of these, Earl Skule. The
most fortunate man1 is the greatest man. It is

Den lykkeligste mand. The word lykke means not only luck
or fortune, but happiness. To render lykkeligste completely, we
should require a word in which the ideas " fortunate " and
" happy " should be blent.

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. 165

the most fortunate man that does the greatest
deeds — he whom the cravings of his time seize
like a passion, begetting thoughts he himself
cannot fathom, and pointing to paths which lead
he knows not whither, but which he follows and
must follow till he hears the people shout for joy,
and, looking around him with wondering eyes,
finds that he has done a mighty deed.

EARL SKULE.

Ay, there is that unswerving confidence in
Hakon.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

It is that which the Romans called ingenium. —
Truly I am not strong in Latin ; but 'twas called
ingenium.

EARL SKULE.

[Thoughtfully at Jirst, afterwards in increasing
excitement.] Is Hakoii made of other clay than
mine ? The fortunate man ? — Ay, does not every-
thing thrive with him ? Does not everything
shape itself for the best, when he is concerned ?
Even the peasants note it ; they say the trees bear
fruit twice, and the fowls hatch out two broods
every summer, whilst Hakon is king. Vermeland,
where he burned and harried, stands smiling with
its houses built afresh, and its cornlands bending
heavy-eared before the breeze. 'Tis as though
blood and ashes fertilised the land where Hakon's
armies pass ; 'tis as though the Lord clothed with
double verdure what Hakon has trampled down ;
'tis as though the holy powers made haste to blot
out all evil in his track. And how easy has been
his path to the throne ! He needed that Inge
should die early, and Inge died : his youth needed

1G6 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT n.

to be watched and warded, and his men kept
watch and ward around him ; he needed the
ordeal, and his mother arose and bore the iron for
him.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[With an involuntary outburst.] But we — we

two !

EARL SKULE.
We?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
You, I would say — what of you ?

EARL SKULE.
The right is Hakon's, Bishop.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

The right is his, for he is the fortunate one ;
'tis even the summit of fortune, to have the
right. But by what right has Hakon. the right,
and not you ?

EARL SKULE.

[After a short pause.] There are things I pray
God to save me from thinking upon.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Saw you never an old picture in Christ's Church
at Nidaros ? It shows the Deluge rising and rising
over all the hills, so that there is but one single
peak left above the waters. Up it clambers a
whole household, father and mother and son and
son's wife and children ; — and the son is hurling the
father back into the flood to gain better footing ;
and he will cast his mother down and his wife and
all his children, to win to the top himself; — for up
there he sees a handsbreadth of ground, where he

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. l6?

may keep life in him for an hour. — That, Earl,
that is the saga of wisdom, and the saga of every
wise man.

EARL SKULE.
But the right !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

The son had the right. He had strength, and
the craving for life ; — fulfil your cravings and use
your strength : so much right has every man.

EARL SKULE.
Ay, for that which is good.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Words, empty words ! There is neither good
nor evil, up nor down, high nor low. You must
forget such words, else will you never take the
last stride, never leap the abyss. [In a subdued
voice and insistently.] You must not hate a
party or a cause for that the party or the cause
would have this and not that; but you must
hate every man of a party for that he is against
you, and you must hate all who gather round a
cause, for that the cause clashes with your will.
Whatever is helpful to you, is good — whatever
lays stumbling-blocks in your path is evil.

EARL SKULE.

[Casing thoughtfully before him.] What has
that throne not cost me, which yet I have not
reached ! And what has it cost Hakon, who
now sits in it so securely ! I was young, and I
forswore my sweet secret love to ally myself
with a powerful house. I prayed to the saints

168 THE PRETENDERS. ^ACT II.

that I might be blessed with a son — I got only
daughters.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Hakon will have sons, Earl — mark that !

EARL SKULE.

[Crossing to the window on the right.] Ay — all
things fall out to Hakon's wish.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

And you — will you suffer yourself to be outlawed
from happiness all your life through ? Are you
blind ? See you not that it is a stronger might
than the Birchlegs that stands at Hakon's back,
and furthers all his life-work ? He has help from
above, from — from those that are against you —
from those that have been your enemies, even from
your birth ! And will you bow before these your
enemies ? Rouse you, man; straighten your
back ! To what end got you your masterful soul ?
Bethink you that the first great deed in all the
world was done by one who rose against a mighty
realm !

EARL SKULE.

Who?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

The angel who rose against the light !

EARL SKULE.
And was hurled into the bottomless pit

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Wildly.] And founded there a kingdom,
and made himself a king, a mighty king —

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. l69

mightier than any of the ten thousand — earls up
yonder ! [Sinks down upon a bench beside the table.

EARL SKULE.

[Looks long at him.] Bishop Nicholas, are you
something more or something less than a man ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS. »

[Smiling.'] I am in the state of innocence : I
know not good from evil.

EARL SKULE.

[Half to himself.] Why did they send me into
the world, if they meant not to order it better for
me ? Hakon has so firm and unswerving a faith
in himself — all his men have so firm and unswerving
a faith in him

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Let it not be seen that you have no such faith
in yourself ! Speak as though you had it, swear
great oaths that you have it — and all will believe
you.

EARL SKULE.

Had I a son ! Had I but a son, to take all the
great heritage after me !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[Eagerly.] Earl — if you had a son ?

EARL SKULE.
I have none.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Hakon will have sons.

170 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

EARL SKULE
[Wringing his hands.] And is king-born !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[Rising.] Earl — if he were not so ?

EARL SKULE.
Has he not proved it ? The ordeal

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
And if he were not — in spite of the ordeal ?

EARL SKULE.

Do you say that God lied in the issue of the
ordeal ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

What was it Inga of Varteig called upon God to
witness ?

EARL SKULE.

That the child she bore in the eastland, in
Borgasyssel, was the son of Hakon Sverresson.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Nods, looks round, and says softly.] And if King
Hakon were not that child ?

EARL SKULE.

[Starts a step backwards.] Great God !

[Controls himself] It is beyond belief.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Hearken to me, Earl Skule. I have lived
seventy years and six ; it begins to go sharply
downhill with me now, and I dare not take this
secret with me over yonder

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. 171

EARL SKULE.

Speak, speak ! Is he not the son of Hakon
Sverresson ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Hear me. It was known to none that Inga was
with child. Hakon Sverresson was lately dead,
and doubtless she feared Inge Bardsson, who was
then king, and you, and — well, and the Baglers l
too mayhap. She was brought to bed secretly in
the house of Trond the Priest, in Heggen parish,
and after nine days she departed homewards ; but
the child remained a whole year with the priest,
she not daring to look to it, and none knowing
that it breathed saved Trond and his two sons.

EARL SKULE.
Ay, ay — and then ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

When the child was a year old, it could scarce
be kept hidden longer. So Inga made the matter
known to Erlend of Huseby — an old Birchleg of
Sverre's days, as you know.

EARL SKULE.
Well? ^

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

He and other chiefs from the Uplands took the
child, bore it over the mountains in midwinter,
and brought it to the King, who was then at
Nidaros.

EARL SKULE.
And yet you can say that ?

* See note, p. 125.

172 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Needless to say, 'twas a dangerous task for a
humble priest to rear a king's child. So soon as
the child was born, he laid the matter before
one of his superiors in the church, and prayed for
his counsel. This his superior bade Trond send
the true king's son with secrecy to a place of
safety, and give Inga another, if she or the
Birclilegs should afterwards ask for her child.

EARL SKULE.

[Indignantly. ~\ And who was the hound that
gave that counsel ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
It was I.

EARL SKULE.

You? Ay, you have ever hated the race of
Sverre.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

I deemed it not safe for the king's son to fall
into your hands.

EARL SKULE.
But the priest ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Promised to do as I bade.

EARL SKULE.

[Seizing him by the arm.] And Hakon is the
other child ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
If the priest kept his promise.

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. 173

EARL SKULE.
If he kept it?

BISHOP NICHOLAS

Trond the Priest departed the land the same
winter that the child was brought to King Inge.
He journeyed to Thomas Beckett's grave, and
afterwards abode in England till his death.

EARL SKULE.

He departed the land, say you? Then must
he have changed the children and dreaded the
vengeance of the Birchlegs.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Or he did not change the children, and dreaded
my vengeance.

EARL SKULE.
Which surmise hold you for the truth ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Either may well be true.

EARL SKULE.
But the priest's sons of whom you spoke ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

They went with the crusaders to the Holy
Land.

EARL SKULE.
And there have since been no tidings of them ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Ay, tidings there have been

174 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

EARL SKULE.
Where are they ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

They were drowned in the Greek Sea on the
journey forth.

EARL SKULE.
And Inga ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Knows nought, either of the priest's confession
or of my counsel.

EARL SKULE.

Her child was but nine days old when she left
it, you said ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Ay, and the child she next saw was over a

year

EARL SKULE.

Then no living creature can here bring light !
[Paces rapidly to and fro.] Almighty God, can
this be true ? Hakon — the King — he who holds
sway over all this land, not born of royal blood ! —
And why should it not be like enough ? Has not
all fortune miraculously followed him ? — Why not
this also, to be taken as a child from a poor
cottar's hut and laid in a king's cradle ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Whilst the whole people believes that he is the

king's son

EARL SKULE.

Whilst he himself believes it, Bishop— that
is the heart of his fortune, that is the girdle of

ACT II.]

THE PRETENDERS.

175

strength ; [Goes to the rvindow.~\ See how bravely
he sits his horse ' None rides as he does. His
eyes are filled with laughing, dancing sunshine ;
he looks forth into the day as though he knew
himself created to go forward, ever forward.
[Turns towards the BISHOP.] I am a king's arm,
mayhap a king's brain as well ; but he is the
whole King.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Yet no king after all, mayhap.

EARL SKULE
Mayhap no king after all.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Lays his hand on the Earl's shoulder."] Hearken
to me, Earl Skule

EARL SKULE.

[Still looking out.} There sits the Queen.
Hakon speaks gently to her; she turns red and
white with joy. He took her to wife because it
was wise to choose the daughter of the mightiest
man in the land. There was then no thought of
love for her in his heart; — but it will come; Hakon
has fortune with him. She will shed light over

h is life [Stops, and cries out in wonder.] What

is this?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

What?

EARL SKULE.

Dagfinn the Peasant bursts violently through
the crowd. Now he is giving the King some
tidings.

176 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Looking out from behind the EARL.] Hakon
seems angered — does he not ? He clenches his

fist

EARL SKULE.
He looks hitherward — what can it be ?

[About to go.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Holding him back.] Hearken to me, Earl
Skule — there may yet be one means of winning
assurance as to Hakon's right.

EARL SKULE.
One means, you say ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Trond the Priest, ere he died, wrote a letter
telling his whole tale, and took the sacrament in
witness of its truth.

EARL SKULE.

And that letter — for God's pity's sake — where
is it ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

You must know that [Looks towards the

door.] Hush ! — here comes the King.

EARL SKULE.
The letter, Bishop— the letter!

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
The K ng is here.

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. 177

[HAKON enters, followed by his Guard and many
guests. Immediately afterwards, MARGRETE
appears ; she seems anxious and alarmed, and if
about to rush up to the King, when she is restrained
by LADY RAGNHILD, who, with other ladies, has
followed her. SIGRID stands somewhat apart,
towards the back. The EARL'S men appear uneasy,
and gather in a group on the right, where SKULE
is standing, but some way behind him.

HAKON.

[/» strong but repressed excilementl\ Earl Skule,
who is king in this land ?

EARL SKULE.
Who is king ?

HAKON.

That was my question. I bear the kingly title,
but who holds the kingly might ?

EARL SKULE.

The kingly might should dwell with him who
has the kingly right.

HAKON.

So should it be ; but is it so ?

EARL SKULE.
Do you summon me to judgment?

HAKON.

That do I ; for that right I have toward every
man in the land.

EARL SKULE.
I fear not to answer for my dealings.

178 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

HAKON.

Well for us all if you can. [Mounts a step of
throne-dais, and leans upon one arm of the throne.]
Here stand I as your king, and ask . Know you
that Jon, Earl of Orkney, has risen against me ?

EARL SKULE.
Yes.

HAKON.
That he denies to pay me tribute ?

EARL SKULE.
Yes.

HAKON.

And is it true that you, Sir EarL have this day
sent him a letter ?

EARL SKULE.
Who says so ?

IVAR BODDE.

That do I.

DAGFINN.

Jostein Tamb dared not deny to carry it, since
it bore the King's seal.

HAKON.

You write to the King's foes under the King's
seal, although the King knows nought of what is
written ?

EARL SKULE.

So have I done for many a year, with your good
will.

HlKON.

Ay, in the days of your regency.

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. 179

EARL SKULE.

Never have you had aught but good thereby.
Earl Jon wrote to me praying that I would mediate
on his behalf ; he offered peace, but on terms
dishonourable to the King. The war in Vermeland
has weighed much upon your mind ; had this
matter been left to you, Earl Jon had come too
lightly off. I can deal better with him.

HAitoN.

'Twas our will to deal with him ourself. — And
what answer made you ?

EARL SKULE.
Read my letter.

HAKON.
Give it me !

EARL SKULE.
I deemed you had it.

DAGFINN.

Nay, you know better than that. Gregorius
Jonsson was too swift of foot; when we came on
board, the letter was gone.

EARL SKULE.

[Turns to GREGORIUS JONSSON.] Sir Baron, give
the King the letter.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
to him, iint

EARL SKULE.

[Coming close to him, uneasily.] Hearken
Earl !

What now?

180 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

[Softly.] Bethink you, there were sharp words
in it concerning the King.

EARL SKULE.
My words I shall answer for. The letter !

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
I have it not.

EARL SKULE.
You have it not !

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

Dagfinn the Peasant was at our heels. I snatched
the letter from Jostein Tarab, tied a stone to it

EARL SKULE.
Well?

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
It lies at the bottom of the fiord.

EARL SKULE.
You have done ill — ill.

HiKON.

I await the letter, Sir Earl.

EARL SKULE.
I cannot give it you.

HAKON.

You cannot !

EARL SKULE.
[Advancing a step towards the KING.] My pride

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. 181

brooks not to be put to shifts, as you and your
men would call it

HAKON.

[Controlling his rising wrath.] And so ?

EARL SKULE.
In one word — I will not give it you !

HAKON.

Then you defy me !

EARL SKULE.
Since so it must be — yes, I defy you.

IVAR BODDE.

[Forcibly.] Now, my lord King, I scarce think
you or any man can now need further proof !

DAGFINN.
Nay, now I think we know the Earl's mind.

HiKON.

[Coldly, to the EARL.] You will hand the Great
Seal to Ivar Bodde.

MARGRETE.

[Rushes with clasped hands towards the dais, where
the KING is standing] Hakon, be a kind and
gracious husband to me !

[HAKON makes an imperative gesture towards
her; she hides her face in her veil} and
goes up towards her mother again.

EARL SKULE.
[To IVAR BODDE.] Here is the Great Seal.

182 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IL

IVAR BODDE.

This was to be the last evening of the feast. It
has ended in a heavy sorrow for the King ; but
sooner or later it needs must come, and methinks
every true man must rejoice that it has come.

EARL SKULE.

And I think every true man must feel bitter
wrath to see a priest thus make mischief between
us Birchlegs ; — ay, Birchlegs, I say ; for I am every
whit as good a Birchleg as the King or any of his
men. I am of the same stock, the stock of Sverre,
the kingly stock — but you, Priest, you have built
up a wall of distrust around the King, and shut
me out from him; that has been your task this
many a year.

PAUL FLIDA.

[Enraged, to the bystanders.} Earl's men Shall
we abide this longer ?

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

[Steps forward.} No, we can and will no more
abide it. "Tis time to say it plainly — none of the
Earl's men can serve the King in full trust and love,
so long as Ivar Bodde conies and goes in the
palace, and makes bad blood between us.

PAUL FLIDA.

Priest ! I bid you look to life and limb, where-
soever I meet you — in the field, on shipboard, or
in any unconsecrated house.

MANY EARL'S MEN.
I too ! I too 1 You are an outlaw to us I

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. 183

IVAR BODDE.

God forbid that I should stand between the
King and so many mighty chieftains.— Hakon, my
gracious lord, my soul bears me witness that I have
served you in all faithfulness. True, I have warned
you against the Earl ; but if I have ever done him
wrong, I pray God forgive me. Now have I no
more to do in the palace ; here is your Seal ; take
it into your own hands ; there it should have rested
long ago.

HAKON.

[Who has come down from the da'isJ] You shall
remain !

IVAR BODDE.

I cannot. If I did, my conscience would gnaw
and rend me night and day. Greater evil can no
man do in these times than to hold the King and
the Earl asunder.

HAKON.
Ivar Bodde, I command you to remain !

IVAR BODDE.

If the Holy King Olaf should rise from his silver
shrine to bid me stay, still I needs must go.
[Places the Seal in the KING'S hand.] Farewell, my
noble master ! God bless and prosper you in all
your work !

[Goes out through the crowd, to the right.

HAKON.

[Gloomily y to the EARL and his menl\ There have
I lost a trusty friend for your sakes ; what requital
can you offer to make good that loss ?

184 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

EARL SKULE.
I offer myself and all my friends.

HA RON.

I almost fear 'twill not suffice. Now must I
gather round me all the men I can fully trust.
Dagfinn the Peasant, let a messenger set out
forthwith for Halogaland ; Vegard Vaeradal must
be recalled.

•DAGFINN.

[ Who has been standing somewhat towards the back,
in conversation with a man in travelling dress who has
entered the hall, approaches and says with emotion :]
Vegard cannot come, my lord.

HAKON.

How know you that ?

DAGFINN.
I have even now had tidings of him.

HAKON.

What tidings ?

DAGFINN.
That Vegard Vaeradal is slain.

MANY VOICES.
Slain !

HlKON.

Who slew him ?

DAGFINN.
Andres Skialdarband, the Earl's friend.

[A short pause ; uneasy whispers pass among
the men.

\CT II.] THE PRETENDERS. 185

HAKON.
Where is the messenger ?

DAGFINN.

[Leading the man forward.] Here, my lord King.

HAKON.
What caused the slaying ?

THE MESSENGER.

That no man knows. The talk fell upon the
Finnish tribute, and on a sudden Andres sprang up
and gave him his death-wound.

HAKON.

Had there been quarrels between them before ?

THE MESSENGER.

Ever and anon. Andres would often say that a
wise councillor here in the south had written to
him that he should be as rock and flint toward
Vegard Vaeradal.

DAGFINN.

Strange ! Ere Vegard set forth he told me that
a wise councillor had said h e should be as rock and
flint toward Andres Skialdarband.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[Spitting.'] Shame upon such councillors.

HAKON.

We will not question more closely from what root
this wrong has grown. Two faithful souls have I
lost this day. I could weep for Vegard , but 'tis
no time for weeping ; it must be life for life. Sir

186 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

Earl, Andres Skialdarband is your sworn retainer ;
you offered me all service in requital for Ivar Bodde.
I take you at your word, and look to you to see
that this misdeed be avenged.

EARL SKULE.

Of a truth, bad angels are at work between us
to-day. On any other of my men, I would have
suffered you to avenge the murder

HAKON.

[Expectantly.] Well ?

EARL SKULE.
But not on Andres Skialdarband.

HAKON.
[Flashing out] Will you shield the murderer ?

EARL SKULE.
This murderer I must shield.

HlKON.

And the reason ?

EARL SKULE.
That none but God in heaven ma}' know.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[Softly, to DAGFINN.] I know it.

DAGFINN,
And I suspect it.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Say nought, good Dagfiim '

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. 187

HiKON.

Earl, I will believe as long as I may, that you
mean not in good sooth what you have said to

me

EARL SKULE.

Were it my own father Andres Skialdarband
had slain, he should still go free. Ask me no more.

HAKON.

Good. Then we ourselves must do justice in
the matter !

EARL SKULE.

[With an expression of alarm .] There will be
bloodshed on both sides, my lord King !

HlKON.

So be it; none the less shall the deed be avenged.

EARL SKULE.
It shall not be !— It cannot be '

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Nay, there the Earl is right.

HAKON.
Say you so, my honoured lord ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Andres Skialdarband has taken the Cross.

HAKON AND EARL SKULE.
Taken the Cross!

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
And has already sailed from the land.

188 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

EARL SKULE.
Tis well for all of us !

HAKON.

The day wanes ; the bridal- feast must now be
at an end. I thank you, Sir Earl, for all the honour
that has been shown me in these days. — You are
bound for Nidaros, as I think t

EARL SKULE.
That is my intent.

HAKON.

And I for Viken. — If you, Margrete, choose
rather to abide in Bergen, then do so.

MARGRETE.
Whither you go, I go, until you forbid.

HlKON.

Good ; then come with me.

SlGRID.

Now is our kindred spread far abroad. [Kneels
to HAKON.] Grant me a grace, my lord King.

HlKON.

Rise, Lady Sigrid ; whatever you crave shall be
granted.

SIGRID.

I cannot go with the Earl to Nidaros. The
nunnery at Rein will soon be consecrated ; write
to the Archbishop — take order that I be made
Abbess.

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. 189

EARL SKULE.
You, my sister ?

HAKON.
You will enter a nunnery '

SIGRID.

[Rising.'] Since my wedding-night of blood,
when the Baglers came and hewed down my bride-
groom, and many hundreds with him, and fired
Nidaros town at all its corners — since then, it has
been as thougli the blood and flames had dulled
and deadened my sight for the world around me.
But power was given me to catch glimpses of that
which other eyes see not — and one thing I see
now : a time of great dread hanging over this
land!

EARL SKULE.

[Vehemently.] She is sick ! Heed her not !

SIGRID.

A plenteous harvest is ripening for him that
reaps in the darkness. Every woman in Norway
will have but one task now — to kneel in church
and cloister, and pray both day and night.

HAKON.

[Shaken.] Is it prophecy or soul-sickness that
speaks thus ?

SIGRID.
Farewell, my brother — we shall meet once more.

EARL SKULE.
[Involuntarily.] When ?

190 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

SlGRID.

[Softly.] When you take the crown ; in the hour
of danger, — when you are fain of me in your direst
need.

[Goes out to the right, with MARGRETE, LADY
RAGNHILD, and the women.

HAKON.

\Afler a short pause, draws his sword, and says with
quiet determination.] All the Earl's men shall take
the oath of fealty.

EARL SKULE.

[Vehemently. ] Is this your settled purpose?
[Almost imploringly.] King Hakon, do not so !

HAKON.

No Earl's man shall leave Bergen ere he has
sworn fealty to the King.

[Goes out with his Guard. All except the
EARL and the BISHOP follow him.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
He has dealt hardly with you to-day !

[EARL SKULE if silent, and looks out after the
KING, as though struck dumb.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[More loudly.] And mayhap not king-born after
all.

EARL SKULE.

[Turns suddenly, in strong excitement, and seizes the
BISHOP by the arm.] Trond the Priest's confession-—
v/here is it ?

ACT II. J THE PRETENDERS. 191

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

He sent it to me from England ere he died ; I
know not by whom — and it never reached me.

EARL SKULE.
But it must be found !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
I doubt not but it may.

EARL SKULE.
And if you find it, you will give it into my hands ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
That I promise.

EARL SKULE.
You swear it by your soul's salvation ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
I swear it by my soul's salvation '

EARL SKULE.

Good ; till that time I will work against Hakon,
wherever it can be done secretly and unnoted.
He must be hindered from growing mightier than
I, ere the struggle begins.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

But should it prove that he is in truth king-
born — what then ?

EARL SKULE.
Then I must try to pray — to pray for humble-

192 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT II.

ness, that I may serve him with all my might, as a
faithful chieftain.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
And if he be not the rightful king ?

EARL SKULE.

Then shall he give place to me ! The kinglj
title and the kingly throne, host and guard, fleet
and tribute, towns and strongholds, all shall be
mine !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
He will betake him to Viken

EARL SKULE.
I will drive him out of Viken !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
He will establish himself in Nidaros.

EARL SKULE.
I will storm Nidaros !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
He will shut himself up in Olaf's holy

church

EARL SKULE.

I will force the sanctuary

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
He will fly to the high altar, and cling to Olaf s

shrine

EARL SKULE.

I will drag him down from the altar, though I
drag the shrine along with him

ACT II.] THE PRETENDERS. 193

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

But the crown will still be on his head, Earl
Skule !

EARL SKULE.

I will strike off the crown with my sword !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
But if it sits too tight ?

EARL SKULE.

Then, in God's name or Satan's — I will strike off
the head along with it ! [Goes out to the right.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Looks out after him, nods slowly, and says :] Ay
—ay — 'tis in this mood I like the Earl !

ACT THIRD.

A room in the Bishop s Palace at Oslo* On the right
is the entrance door. In the back, a small dour,
standing open, leads into the Chapel, which ts
lighted up. A curtained door in the left wall lead.?
into the Bishop's sleeping-room. Jn front, on the
same side, stands a cushioned couch. Opposite,
on the right, is a writing-table, with letters, docu-
ments, and a lighted lamp.

At first the room is empty ; behind the curtain on the
left, the singing of monks is heard. Present h/
PAUL FLIDA, in travelling dress, enters from the
right, stops by the door, traits, looks around, and
then knocks three times with his staff upon the
Jloor.

SlRA VlLIAM.

[Comes out from the left, a?id exclaims in a hushed
voice.'] Paul Flida ! God be praised ; — then the
Earl is not far off.

PAUL FLIDA.

The ships are already at Hoved-isle ; I came on
ahead. And how goes it with the Bishop ?

SIRA VILIAM.

He is even now receiving the Extreme
Unction.

1 An ancient city close to the present Christiania.

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 1Q5

PAUL FLIDA.
Then there is great danger.

SIRA VILIAM.

Master Sigard of Brabant has said that he can-
not outlive the night.

PAUL FLIDA.
Then meseems he has summoned us too late.

SIRA VILIAM.

Nay, nay, — he has his full senses and some
strength to boot; every moment he asks if the
Earl comes not soon.

PAUL FLIDA.

You still call him Earl ; know you not that the
King has granted him the title of Duke ?

SIRA VILIAM.

Ay, ay, we know it ; 'tis but old custom. Hist !
[He and PAUL FLIDA cross themselves and
bow their heads. From the BISHOP'S door
issue two acolytes with candles, then two
more with censers; then priests bearing
chalice, paten, and crucifix, and a church
banner ; behind them a file of priests and
monks; acolytes with candles and censers
close the procession, which passes slowly
into the chapel. The door is shut behind
them.

PAUL FLIDA.

So now the old lord has made up his account
with the world.

196 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

SlRA VlLIAM.

I can tell him that Duke Skule comes so sooi*
«e may be ?

PAUL FLIDA.

He comes straight from the wharf up here to

the Palace. Farewell ! [Goes.

[Several priests, among them PETER, with

some of the BISHOP'S servants, come out

from the left with rugs, cushions, and a

large brazier.

SIRA VILIAM.
Why do you this ?

A PRIEST.

[Arranging the couch.'] The Bishop wills to lie
out here.

SIRA VILIAM.
But is it prudent ?

THE PRIEST.

Master Sigard thinks we may humour him.
Here he is.

BISHOP NICHOLAS enters, supported by MASTER SIGARD
and a priest. He is in his canonicals, but without
crozier and mitre.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Light more candles. [He is led to a seat upon
the couch, near the brazier, and is covered with rugs.~\
Viliam ! Now have I been granted forgiveness
for all my sins ! They took them all away with
them ; — meseems I am so light now.

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 19?

SlR A VlLIAM.

The Duke sends you greeting, my lord ; he has
already passed Hoved-isle !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Tis well, very well. Belike the King, too,
will soon be here. I have been a sinful hound in
my day, Viliam; I have grievously trespassed
against the King. The priests in there averred
that all my sins should be forgiven me ; — well
well, it may be so ; but 'tis easy for them to
promise ; 'tis not against them that I have tres-
passed. No no ; it is safest to have it from the
King's own mouth. [Exclaims impatiently.] Light,
I say ! 'tis so dark in here.

SIRA VILIAM.
The candles are lighted

MASTER SIGARD.

[Stops him by a sign, and approaches the BISHOP.]
How goes it with you, my lord ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
So-so — so-so ; my hands and feet are cold.

MASTER SIGARD.

[Half aloud, as he moves the brazier nearer '.] Ha
— 'tis the beginning of the end.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Apprehensively, to VILIAM.] I have commanded
that eight monks shall chant and pray for me in

193 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT lit.

the chapel to-night. Have an eye to them ; there

are idle fellows among them.

[SiRA VILIAM points silently towards the
chapel, whence singing is heard, which
continues during what follows.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

So much still undone, and to go and leave it
all ! So much undone, Viliam !

SIRA VILIAM.
My lord, think of heavenly things !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

I have time before me ; — till well on in the
morning, Master Sigard thinks

SIRA VILIAM.
My lord, my lord !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Give me mitre and crozier ! — 'Tis very well for

you to say that I should think [A priest

brings themj\ So, set the cap there, 'tis too
heavy for me ; give me the crozier in my hand ;

there, now am I in my armour. A bishop !

The Evil One dare not grapple with me now !

SIRA VILIAM.
Desire you aught beside ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

No. Stay — tell me : — Peter, Andres Skialdar-
band's son, — all speak well of him

ACT III.J THE PRETENDERS. 199

SlRA VlLIAM.

In truth, his is a blameless soul.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Peter, you shall watch beside me until the
King or the Duke shall come. Leave us, mean-
while, ye others, but be at hand.

[All except PETER go out on the right.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[After a short pause.] Peter !

PETER.
[Approaches.] My lord ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Hast ever seen old men die ?

PETER.
No.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

They are all afeard ; that I dare swear. There
on the table lies a large letter with seals to it ;
give it to me. [PETER brings the letter.] 'Tis to
your mother.

PETER.
To my mother?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

You must get you northward with it to Halo-
galand. I have written to her touching a great
and weighty matter ; tidings have come from your
father.

PETER.
He is fighting as a soldier of God in the Holy

200 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

Land. Should he fall there, he fulls on hallowed
ground; for there every foot's-breadth of earth
is sacred. I commend him to God in all my
prayers.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Is Andres Skialdarband dear to you ?

PETER.

He is an honourable man ; but there lives
another man \vhose greatness my mother, as it
were, fostered and nourished me withal.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[Hurriedly and eagerly.] Is that Duke Skule ?

PETER.

Ay, the Duke — Skule Bardsson. My mother
knew him in younger days. The Duke must sure
be the greatest man in the land !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

There is the letter ; get you northward with it
forthwith ! — Are they not singing in there ?

PETER.
They are, my lord !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Eight lusty fellows with throats like trumpets,
they must surely help somewhat, methinks.

PETER.
My lord, my lord ! Why not pray yourself !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
I have too much still undone, Peter. Life is

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 201

all too short; — besides, the King will surely for-
give me when he comes [Gives a start in pain

PETER,
You are suffering ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

I suffer not ; but there is a ringing in mine ears,
a twinkling and flickering before mine eyes

PETER.

'Tis the heavenly bells ringing you home, and
the twinkling of the altar-lights God's angels
have lit for you.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Ay, sure 'tis so ; — there is no danger if only
they lag not with their prayers in there Fare-
well ; set forth at once with the letter.

PETER.
Shall I not first ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Nay, go ; I fear not to be alone.

PETER.

Well met again, then, what time the heavenly
^ells shall sound for me too.

[Goes out on the right.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

The heavenly bells, — ay, 'tis easy talking when
you still have two stout legs to stand upon. — So
much undone ! But much will live after me,
notwithstanding. I promised the Duke by my
soul's salvation to give him Trortd the Priest's

202 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

confession if it came into my hand ; — 'tis well I
have not got it. Had he certainty, he would
conquer or fall ; and then one of the twain would
be the mightiest man that ever lived in Norway.
No no, — what / could not reach none other shall
reach. Uncertainty serves best ; so long as the
Duke is burdened with that, they two will waste
each other's strength, wheresoever they may ;
towns will be burnt, dales will be harried, —
neither will gain by the other's loss — [ Terrified*]
Mercy, pity ! It is I who bear the guilt — I, who
set it all agoing ! [Calming himself.] Well, well,
well ! but now the King is coming — 'tis he that
suffers most — he will forgive me — prayers and
masses shall be said ; there is no danger ; — I am
a bishop, and I have never slain any man with
mine own hand. — 'Tis well that Trond the Priest's
confession came not ; the saints are with me, they
will not tempt me to break my promise. — Who
knocks at the door ? It must be the Duke !
[Rubs his hands with glee] He will implore me for
proofs as to the kingship, — and I have no proofs
to give him :

INGA OF VARTEIG enters ; she is dressed in
black, with a cloak and hood.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[Starts.] Who is that ?

INGA.

A woman from Varteig in Borgasyssel, my
honoured lord.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
The King's mother !

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 203

INGA.

So was I called once.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Go, go ! 'Twos not I counselled Hakon to send
you away.

INGA.

What the King does is well done ; 'tis not there-
fore I come.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Wherefore then ?

INGA.
Gunnulf, my brother, is come home from

England

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

From England !

INGA.

He has been away these many years, as you
know, and has roamed far and wide ; now has he
brought home a letter

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[Breathlessly.] A letter ?

INGA.

From Trond the Priest. Tis for you, my lord.

[Hands it to him.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Ah, truly ; — and you bring it ?

INGA.

It was Trend's wish. I owe him great thanks
since the time he fostered Hakon. It was told

204 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III,

me that you were sick ; therefore I set forth at
once ; I liave come hither on foot — —

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
There was no such haste, Inga !

DAGFINN THE PEASANT enters from the right.

DAGFINN.

God's peace, my honoured lord !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Comes the King ?

DAGFINN.

He is now riding down the Ryen hills, with
the Queen and the King-child and a great
following.

INGA.

[Rushes up to DAGFINN.] The King, — the King !
Conies he hither?

DAGFINN.
Inga ! You here, much-suffering woman !

INGA.

She is not much-suffering who has so great a
son.

DAGFINN.
Now will his hard heart be melted.

INGA.

Not a v/ord to the King of me. Yet, oh, I
must see him ! — Tell me, — comes he hither ?

DAGFINN.

Ay, presently.

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 205

INGA.

And it is dark evening. The King will be
lighted on his way witli torches ?

DAGFINN.
Yes.

INGA.

Then will I hide me in a gateway as he goes
by ; — and then home to Varteig. But first will
I into Hall yard's church ; the lights are burning
there to-night ; there will I call down blessings
on the King, on my fair son.

[Goes out to the right.

DAGFINN.

I have fulfilled mine errand ; I go to meet the
King.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Bear him most loving greeting, good Dagfinn !

DAGFINN.

[As he goes out to the right.] I would not be
Bishop Nicholas to-morrow.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Trond the Priest's confession ! So it has

come after all — here I hold it in my hand [Muses
with a Jixed gaze] A man should never promise
aught by his soul's salvation, when he is as old
as I. Had I years before me, I could always
wriggle free from such a promise ; but this
evening, this last evening — no, that were im-
prudent.— But can I keep it ? Is it not to endanger
all that I have worked for, my whole life through ?
— [Whispering] Oh, could I but cheat the Evil

206* THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

One, only this one more time ! [Listens.] What
was that ? [Calls.] Viliam, Viliam !

SIRA VILIAM enters from the right.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
What is it that whistles and howls so grimly ?

SIRA VILIAM.
"Pis the storm ; it grows fiercer.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
The storm grows fiercer ! Ay truly, I will keep

my promise ! The storm, say you ? Are they

singing in there ?

SIRA VILIAM.
Yes, my lord.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Bid them bestir themselves, and chiefly brother
Aslak ; he always makes such scant prayers ; he
shirks whenever he can ; he skips, the hound !
[St jibes the Jloor with his crozier.] Go in and
say to him 'tis the last night I have left ; he shall
bestir himself, else will I haunt him from the
dead !

SIRA VILIAM.

My lord, shall I not fetch Master Sigard ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Go in, I say ! [VILIAM goes into the chapcL~\
It must doubtless be heaven's will that I should
reconcile the King and the Duke, since it sends
me Trend's letter now. This is a hard thing,
Nicholas ; to tear down at a single wrench what

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 207

you have spent your life in building up. But
there is no other way ; I must e'en do the will of
heaven this time. — If I could only read what is
written in the letter ! But I cannot see a word !
Mists drive before my eyes ; they sparkle and
flicker; and I dare let none other read it for me !

To make such a promise ! Is human cunning,

then, so poor a thing that it cannot govern the
outcome of its contrivances in the second and
third degree ? I spoke so long and so earnestly
to Vegard Vaeradal about making the King send
Inga from him, that at length it came to pass.
That was wise in the first degree ; but had 1 not
counselled thus, then Inga had not now been at
Varteig, the letter had not corne into my hands in
time, and I had not had any promise to keep —
therefore 'twas unwise in the second degree. Had

I yet time before me ! but only the space of

one night, and scarce even that. I must, I will
live longer ! [Knocks niLh, his crozier ; a priest
enters from the right] Bid Master Sigard come !
[The priest goes; the BISHOP crushes the letter in
his hands.] Here, under this thin seal, lies
Norway's saga for a hundred years ! It lies and
dreams, like the birdling in the egg ! Oh, that I
had more souls than one — or else none ! [Presses
the letter mildly to his breast .] Oh, were not the
end so close upon me, — and judgment and doom
I would hatch you out into a hawk that should
cast the dreadful shadow of his wings over all the
land, and strike his sharp talons into every heart !
[With a sudden shudder.] But the last hour is at
hand ! [Shrieking.] No, no ! You shall become
a swan, a white swan ! [Throws the letter far from
him, on to the floor, and calls:] Master Sigard,
Master Sigard !

208 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

MASTER SIGARD.
[From ike right.] How goes it, honoured lord !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Master Sigard — sell me three days' life !

MASTER SIGARD.
I have told you

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Yes, yes ; but that was in jest ; 'twas a little
revenge on me. I have been a tedious master
to you ; therefore you thought to scare me. Fie,
that was evil, — nay, nay — 'twas no more than I
deserved ! But, now be good and kind ! I will
pay you well ; — three days' life, Master Sigard,
only three days' life f

MASTER SISARD.

Though I myself were to die in the same hour as
you, yet could I not add three days to your span.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

One day, then, only one day ! Let it be light,
let the sun shine when my soul sets forth ! Listen,
S:gard ! [Beckons him over, and drags him down
upon the couch.] I have given well-nigh all my
gold and silver to the Church, to have high
masses sung for me. I will take it back again ;
you shall have it all ! How now, Sigard, shall we
two fool them in there ? He-he-he I You will be
rich, Sigard, and can depart the country ; I shall
have time to cast about me a little, and make
shift with fewer prayers. Come, Sigard, shall
we ! [SIGARD feels his pulse ; the BISHOP

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS 209

exclaims anxiously :] How now, why answer you
not?

MASTER SIGARD.

[Rising.] I have no time, my lord. I must
prepare you a draught that may ease you some-
what at the last.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Nay, wait with that! Wait, — and answer me !

MASTER SIGARD.

I have no time ; the draught must be ready
within an hour. [Goes out to the right.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Within an hour ! [Knocks wildly.} Viliam !
Viliam »

[SiRA VILIAM comes out from the chapel.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Call more to help in there ! The eight are not
enough !

SIRA VILIAM.
My lord ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

More to help, I say ! Brother Kolbein has lain
sick these five weeks, — he cannot have sinned
much in that time

SIRA VILIAM.
He was at shrift yesterday.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[Eagerly.} Ay, he must be good; call him f

II O

210 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

I VILIAM goes into the chapel again.] Within an hour !
[Dries the sweat off his brow.] Pah — how hot it is
here! — The miserable hound — what boots all his
learning, when he cannot add an hour to my life?
There sits he in his closet day by day, piecing
together his cunning wheels and weights and
levers; he thinks to fashion a machine that shall
go and go and never stop — perpetuwn mobile
he calls it. Why not rather turn his art and
his skill to making man such a perpetuum mobile ?
[Stops and thinks; his eyes light up.] Perpetuum
mobile, — I am not strong in Latin — but it means
somewhat that has power to work eternally,
through all the ages. If I myself, now, could

but ? That were a deed to end my life

withal ! That were to do my greatest deed in my
latest hour ! To set wheel and weight and lever
at work in the King's soul and the Duke's ; to set
them a-going so that no power on earth can stop
them ; if I can but do that, then shall I live
indeed, live in my work — and, when I think of it,
mayhap 'tis that which is called immortality. —
Comfortable, soothing thoughts, how ye do the old
man good ! [Draws a deep breath, and stretches
himself comfortably upon the couch J] Diabolus has
pressed me hard to-night. That comes of lying idle ;
otivm est pulvis — pulveris — pooh, no matter for the

Latin Diabolus shall no longer have power

over me ; I will be busy to the last ; I will ;

how they bellow in yonder [Knocks ; VILIAM

comes outJ] Tell them to hold their peace; they
disturb me. The King and the Duke will soon
be here ; I have weighty matters to ponder.

SIRA VILIAM.
My lord, shall 1 then ?

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 211

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Bid them hold awhile, that I may think in peace-
Look you, take up yonder letter that lies upon the
floor. — Good. Reach me the papers here

SIRA VILIAM.
[Goes to the writing-table.} Which, my lord ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

It matters not ; the sealed ones ; those

that lie uppermost — So ; go now in and bid
them be silent. [VILIAM goes.] To die, and yet
rule in Norway ! To die, and yet so contrive
things that no man may come to raise his head
above the rest. A thousand ways may lead
towards that goal ; yet can there be but one that
will reach it ; — and now to find that one — to find

it and follow it Ha ! The way lies so close, so

close at hand ! Ay, so it must be. 1 will keep
my promise ; the Duke shall have the letter in
his hands ; — but the King — he shall have the
thorn of doubt in his heart. Hakon is upright, as
they call it ; many things will go to wreck in his
soul along with the faith in himself and in his
right. Both of them shall doubt and believe by
turns, still swaying to and fro, and finding no firm
ground beneath their feet — perpetmim mobile ! —
But will Hakon believe what I say ? Ay, that will
he; am I not a dying man ? — And to prepare the
way I will feed him up with truths. — My strength
fails, but fresh life fills my soul; — I no longer lie
on a sick-bed, I sit in my workroom ; I will work
the last night through, work— till the light goes

out •

DUKE SKULE.

[Enters from the right and advances towards the

212 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

BISHOP.] Peace and greeting, my honoured lord !
I hear it goes ill with you.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

I am a corpse in the bud, good Duke ; this
night shall I break into bloom ; to-morrow you
may scent my perfume.

DUKE SKULE.
Already to-night, say you ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Master Sigard says : within an hour.

DUKE SKULE.
And Trond the Priest's letter ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Think you still upon that ?

DUKE SKULE.
'Tis never out of my thoughts.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

The King has made you Duke ; before you, no
man in Norway has borne that title.

DUKE SKULE.

Tis not enough. If Hakon be not the rightful
king, then must I have all '

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Ha, 'tis cold in here ; the blood runs icy
through my limbs.

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 213

DUKE SKULE.

Trond the Priest's letter, my lord ! For
Almighty God's sake, — have you it ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
At least, I know where it may be found.

DUKE SKULE.
Tell me then, tell me !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Wait

DUKE SKULE.

Nay, nay — lose not your time ; I see it draws to
an end ; — and 'tis said the King comes hither.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Ay, the King comes ; thereby you may best see
that I am mindful of your cause, even now.

DUKE SKULE.
What is your purpose ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Mind you, at the King's bridal — you said that
Hakon's strength lay in his steadfast faith in
himself ?

DUKE SKULE.
Well ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

If I confess, and raise a doubt in his mind, then
his faith will fall, and his strength with it.

DUKE SKULE.

My lord, this is sinful, sinful, if he be the rightful
king.

THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

'Twill be in your power to restore his faith.
Ere I depart hence, I will tell you where Trond
the Priest's letter may be found.

SIRA VILIAM.

[From the right.} The King is now coming up
the street, with torch-bearers and attendants.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

He shall be welcome. [VILIAM goes.] Duke, 1
beg of you one last service : do you carry on my
feuds against all mine enemies. [Takes out a
letter.] Here I have written them down. Those
whose names stand first I would fain have hanged,
if it could be so ordered.

DUKE SKULE.

Think not upon vengeance now ; you have but
little time left

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Not on vengeance, but on punishment. Promise
me to wield the sword of punishment overall mine
&aemies when I am gone. They are your foemen
no less than mine ; when you are King you must
chastise them ; do you promise me that ?

DUKE SKULE.
I promise and swear it; but Trend's letter !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

You shall learn where it is ; — but see — the King
comes ; hide the list of our foemen !

[The DUKE hides the paper; at the same
moment HAKON enters from the right.

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 215

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Well met at the grave-feast, my lord King.

HAKON.

You have ever withstood me stubbornly ; but
that shall be forgiven and forgotten now ; death
wipes out even the heaviest reckoning.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

That lightened my soul ! Oh how marvellous
is the King's clemency! My lord, what you
have done for an old sinner this night shall be
tenfold

HlKON.

No more of that ; but I must tell you that I
greatly marvel you should summon me hither to
obtain my forgiveness, and yet prepare for me such
a meeting as this.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Meeting, my lord ?

DUKE SKULE.

'Tis of me the King speaks. Will you, my lord
Bishop, assure King Hakon, by my faith and
honour, that I knew nought of his coming, ere I
landed at Oslo wharf?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Alas, alas ! The blame is all mine ! I have
been sickly and bedridden all the last year ; I
have learnt little or nought of the affairs of the
kingdom ; I thought all was now well between
the princely kinsmen 1

216 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT HI.

HAKON.

I have marked that the friendship between the
Duke and myself thrives best when we hold aloof
from one another ; therefore farewell, Bishop
Nicholas, and God be with you Avhere you are now
to go. [Goes towards the door.

DUKE SKULE.

[Softly and uneasily.} Bishop, Bishop, be is
going !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Suddenly and with mid energy.} Stay, King
Hakon !

HAKON.

[Stops.] What now ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

You shall not leave this room until old Bishop
Nicholas has spoken his last word !

HlKON.

[Instinctively lays his hand upon his sword.]
Mayhap you have come well attended to Viken,
Duke.

DUKE SKULE.

I have no part in this.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Tis by force of words that I will hold you.
Where there is a burial in the house, the dead
man ever rules the roost ; he can do and let alone
as he will — so far as his power may reach. There-
fore will I now speak my own funeral-speech ; in
days gone by, I was ever sore afraid lest King
Sverre should come to speak it

III.] THE PRETENDERS. 21?

HAKON.
Talk not so wildly, my lord !

DUKE SKULE.
You shorten the precious hour still left to you !

HAKON.
Your eyes are already dim

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Ay, my sight is dim ; I scarce can see you where
you stand ; but before my inward eye, my life
is moving in a blaze of light. There I see

sights ; hear and learn, O King ! — My race

was the mightiest in the land ; many great
chieftains had sprung from it ; 7 longed to be
the greatest of them all. I was yet but a boy
when I began to thirst after great deeds; me-
seemed I could by no means wait till I were
grown. Kings arose who had less right than I, —

Magnus Erlingsson, Sverre the Priest ; I also

would be king ; but I must needs be a chieftain
first. Then came the battle at Ilevoldene ; 'twas
the first time I went out to war. The sun went
up, and glittering lightnings flashed from a
thousand burnished blades. Magnus and all his
men advanced as to a game ; I alone felt a
tightness at my heart. Fiercely our host swept
forward ; but I could not follow — I was afraid !
All Magnus's other chieftains fought manfully,
and many fell in the fight ; but I fled up over the
mountain, and ran and ran, and stayed not until
I came down to the fiord again, far away. Many
a man had to wash his bloody clothes in
Trondheim-fiord that night ; — I had to wash mine

218 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

too, but not from blood. Ay, King, I was afraid ;
— born to be a chieftain — and afraid ! It fell
upon me as a thunderbolt ; from that hour I
hated all men, I prayed secretly in the churches,
I wept and knelt before the altars, I gave rich
gifts, made sacred promises ; I tried and tried in
battle after battle, at Saltosund, at Jonsvoldene
that summer the Baglers lay in Bergen, — but ever
in vain. Sverre it was who first noted it ; he
proclaimed it loudly and with mockery, and from
that day forth, not a man in the host but laughed
when Nicholas Arnesson was seen in war-weed.
A coward, a coward — and yet was I filled with
longing to be a chief, to be a king; nay, I felt I
was born to be King. I could have furthered
God's kingdom upon earth ; but 'twas the saints
themselves that barred the way for me.

Accuse not heaven, Bishop Nicholas ! You have
hated much.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Ay, I have hated much ; hated every head in
this land that raised itself above the crowd. But
I hated because 1 could not love. Fair women, —
oh, I could devour them even now with glistening
eyes ! I have lived eighty years, and yet do I
yearn to kill men and clasp women ; — but my lot
in love was as my lot in war : nought but an
itching will, my strength sapped from my birth ;
dowered with seething desire — and yet a weak-
ling ! So I became a priest : king or priest must
that man be who would have all might in his
hands. [Laughs.] I a priest ! I a churchman !
Yes, for one clerkly office Heaven had notably

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 219

fitted me — for taking the high notes — for singing
with a woman's voice at the great church-festivals.
And yet they up yonder claim of me — the half-
man — what they have a right to claim only of
those whom they have in all things fitted for their
life-work ! There have been times when I fancied
such a claim might be just ; I have lain here on
my sick-bed crushed by the dread of doom and
punishment. Now it is over; my soul has fresh
marrow in its bones ; / have not sinned ; it is /
that have suffered wrong ; / am the accuser !

DUKE SKULE.

[Sqfthj.] My lord— the letter! You have little
time left .

HAKON.

Think of your soul, and humble you !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

A man's life-work is his soul, and my life-work
still shall live upon the earth. But you, King
Hakon, you should beware ; for as Heaven has
stood against m e, and reaped harm for its reward,
so are you standing against the man who holds
the country's welfare in his hand

HAKON.

Ha — Duke, Duke ! Now I see the bent of this
meeting !

DUKE SKULE.

[Vehemently, to the BISHOP.] Not a word more of
this !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[To HAKON.] He will stand against you so long

220 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

as his head sits fast on his shoulders. Share with
him ! I will have no peace in my coffin, I will
rise again, if you two share not the kingdom!
Neither of you shall add the other's height to his
own stature. If that befell, there would be a
giant in the land, and here shall no giant be ; for
I was never a giant !

[Sinks back exhausted on the couch.

DUKE SKULE.

[Falls on his knees beside the couch and cries to
HAKON.] Summon help ! For God's pity's sake;
the Bishop must not die yet !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

How it waxes dusk before my eyes ! — King, for
the last time — will you share with the Duke ?

HAKON.

Not a shred will I let slip of that which God
gave me.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Well and good. [Softly.] Your faith, at least,
you shall let slip. [Calls.] Viliam !

DUKE SKULE.
[Softly.] The letter ! The letter !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[Not listening to him.] Viliam ! [VILIAM enters ;
the "BISHOP draws him c/ose down to him and whispers.]
When I received the Extreme Unction, all my sins
were forgiven me ?

SIRA VILIAM.

All your sins from your birth, till the moment
you received the Unction.

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS.

221

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
No longer ? Not until the very end ?

SIRA VILIAM.
You will not sin to-night, my lord !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Who can tell ? Take the golden goblet

Bishop Absalon left me — give it to the Church —
and say seven high masses more.

SIRA VILIAM.
God will be gracious to you, my lord !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Seven more masses, I say — for sins 1 may
commit to-night ! Go, go ! [VILIAM goes ; the
BISHOP turns to SKULE.] Duke, if you should
come to read Trond the Priest's letter, and it
should mayhap prove that Hakon is the rightful
king-^-what would you do then ?

DUKE SKULE.
In God's name — king he should remain.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

Bethink you ; much is at stake. Search every
fold of your heart ; answer as though you stood
before your Judge ! What will you do, if he be
the rightful king?

DUKE SKULE.
Bow my head and serve him.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[Mumbles.] So, so : then bide the issue. [To

222 THE PRETENDERS. [.\CT III.

SKULE.] Duke, I am weak and weary ; a mild and
charitable mood comes over me

DUKE SKULE.

It is death ! Trond the Priest's letter ! Where
is it ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
First another matter ; — I gave you the list of

my enemies

DUKE SKULE.

[Impatiently] Yes, yes ; I will take full revenge
upon them — —

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

No, my soul is filled with mildness ; I will for-
give, as the Scripture commands. As you would
forgo might, I will forgo revenge. Burn the
list!

DUKE SKULE.
Ay, ay ; as you will.

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
Here, in the brazier ; so that I may see it

DUKE SKULE.

[Throws the paper into the fire] There, then ;
see, it burns. And now, speak, speak. You risk
thousands of lives if you speak not now !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[With sparkling eyes.] Thousands of lives.
[Shrieks.] Light ! Air!

HAKON.

[Rm/ies to the door and cries.] Help ! The Bishop
is dying !

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 223

SIRA VILIAM and several of the BISHOP'S men enter.

DUKE SKULE.

[Shakes the BISHOP'S arm.] You risk Norway's
happiness through hundreds of years, mayhap its
greatness to all eternity !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

To all eternity ! [Triumphantly.] Perpetuum
mobile !

DUKE SKULE.

By your soul's salvation, — where is Trond the
Priest's letter ?

BISHOP NICHOLAS.
[Calls.] Seven more masses, Viliam !

DUKE SKULE.
[Beside himself.] The letter ! The letter !

BISHOP NICHOLAS.

[S?nili?ig in his death-agony.] 'Twas it you burned,
good Duke ! [Falls back on the couch and dies.

DUKE SKULE.

[With an involuntary cry, starts backwards and
covers his face with his hands.] Almighty God I

THE MONKS.

[Rushing in Jlight from the chapel.] Save you,
all who can !

SOME VOICES.
The powers of evil have broken loose !

OTHER VOICES.
There rang a loud laugh from the corner I — A

224 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

voice cried : " We have him ! " All the

lights went out '

HAKON.
Bishop Nicholas is even now dead.

THE MONKS.
[Fleeing to the right.] Pater noster — Pater noster

HAKON.

[Approaches SKULE, and says in a low voice.]
Duke, I will not question what secret counsel you
were hatching with the Bishop ere he died ; — but
from to-morrow must you give up your powers and
dignities into my hands ; I see clearly now that
we two cannot go forward together.

DUKE SKULE.

[Looks at him absently.] Go forward to-
gether ?

HAKON.

To morrow I hold an Assembly in the Palace;
then must all things be made clear between us.

[Goes out to the right.

DUKE SKULE.

The Bishop dead and the letter burnt ! A life
full of doubt and strife and dread ! Oh, could I
but pray! — No — I must act; this evening must the
stride be taken, once for all! [To VILIAM.] Whither
went the King ?

SIRA VILIAM.

[Terrified.] Christ save me, — what would you
with him ?

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 225

DUKE SKULE.
Think you I would slay him to-night ?

[Goes out to the right.

SIRA VILIAM.

[Looks after him, shaking his head, while the house-
folk bear the body out to the left.] Seven more
masses, the Bishop said ; I think 'twere safest we
should say fourteen. [Follows the others.

A room in the Palace. In the back is the entrance
door ; in each of the side walls a smaller door ;
in front, on the right, a window. Hung from
the roof, a lamp is burning. Close to the door
on the left stajids a bench, and further back a
cradle, in which the King-child is sleeping;
MARGRETE is kneeling beside the child.

MARGRETE.
[Rocks the cradle and sings.]

Now roof and rafters blend with
the starry vault on high ;
now flieth little Hakon
on dream-wings through the sky.

There mounts a mighty stairway
from earth to God's own land ;
there Hakon with the angels
goes climbing, hand in hand.

God's angel-babes are watching
thy cot, the still night through;
God bless thee, little Hakon,
thy mother watcheth too.
II P

226 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IJI.

A short pause. DUKE SKULE enters from the back.

MARGRETE.

[Starts up with a cry of joy and rushes to meet him.]
My father ! — Oh, how I have sighed and yearned
for this meeting !

DUKE SKULE.

God's peace be with you, Margrete ! Where is
the King ?

MARGRETE.
With Bishop Nicholas. .

DUKE SKULE.
Ha, — then must he soon be here.

MARGRETE.

And you will talk together and be at one, be
friends again, as in the old days ?

DUKE SKULE.
That would I gladly.

MARGRETE.

'Twould rejoice Hakon no less ; and I pray to
God every day that so it may be. Oh, but come

hither and see

[Takes his hand and leads him to the cradle,

DUKE SKULE.
Your child !

MARGRETE.

Ay, that lovely babe is mine ; — is it not mar-
vellous ? He is called Hakon, like the King !
See, his eyes — nay, you cannot see them now he
is sleeping — but he has great blue eyes ; and he

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS, 22?

can laugh, and reach forth his hands to take hold
of me, — and he knows me already.

[Smoothes out the bed-clothes tenderly.

DUKE SKULE.
Hakon will have sons, the Bishop foretold.

MARGRETE.

To me this little child is a thousand times
dearer than all Norway's land — and to Hakon too.
Meseems I cannot rightly believe my happiness ;
I have the cradle standing by my bedside ; every
night, as often as I waken, I look to see if it be
there — I am fearful lest it should prove to be all

a dream

DUKE SKULE.

[Listens and goes to the window.] Is not that the
King ?

MARGRETE.

Ay; he is going up the other stair ; I will bring
him. [Takes her fathers hand and leads him play-
fully up to the cradle] Duke Skule ' Keep
watch over the King-child the while — for he is a
King-child too — though I can never remember it!
Should he wake, then bow deeply before him, and
hail him as men hail kings ! Now will I bring
Hakon. Oh, God, God ! now at last come light and
peace over our house. [Goes out to the right.

DUKE SKULE.

[After a short and gloomy silence.] Hakon has a
son. His race shall live after him. If he die, he
leaves an heir who stands nearer the throne than
all others. All things thrive with Hakon. May-
hap he is not the rightful king ; but his faith in

THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

himself stands firm as ever; the Bishop would
have shaken it, but Death gave him not time., God
gave him not leave. God watches over Hakon,
and suffers him to keep the girdle of strength.
Were I to tell him now ? Were I to make oath
to what the Bishop told me ? What would it
avail? None would believe me, neither Hakon
nor the others. He would have believed the
Bishop in the hour of death ; the doubt would
have rankled poisonously in him ; but it was not
to be. And deep-rooted as is Hakon's faith, so is
my doubt deep-rooted ; what man on earth can
weed it out ? None, none. The ordeal has been
endured, God has spoken, and still Hakon may
not be the rightful king, while my life goes to
waste. [Seats himself broodingly beside a table on
the right.] And if, now, I won the kingdom,
would not the doubt dwell with me none the less,
gnawing and wearing and wasting me away, with
its ceaseless icy drip, drip. — Aye ; but 'tis better
to sit doubting on the throne than to stand down
in the crowd, doubting of him who sits there in
your stead. — There must be an end between me
and Hakon ! An end ? But how ? [jRz.?c*.]
Almighty, thou who hast thus bestead me, thou
must bear the guilt of the issue ! [Goes to and
fro, slops and reflects.] I must break down all
bridges, hold only one, and there conquer or fall
— as the Bishop said at the bridal-feast at Bergen.
That is now nigh upon three years since, and
through all that time have I split up and spilt my
strength in trying to guard all the bridges. [With
energy J\ Now must I follow the Bishop's counsel ;
now or never ! Here are we both in Oslo ; this
time I have more men than Hakon ; why not
seize the advantage — 'tis so seldom on my side.

ACT III.] THE

PRETENDERS.

229

[Vacillating.] But to-night ? At once ?

No, no ! Not to-night ! Ha-ha-ha — there
again ! — pondering, wavering! Hakon knows not
what that means ; he goes straight forward,
and so he conquers ! [Going up the room, stops
suddenly beside the cradle.] The King-child ! —
How fair a brow ! He is dreaming. [Smoothes
out the bed-clothes, and looks long at the child.] Such
an one as thou can save many things in a man's
soul. I have no son. [Bc?ids over the cradle] He

is like Hakon [Shrinks suddenly backwards]

The King-child, said the Queen ! Bow low before
him arid hail him as men hail kings ! Should
Hakon die before me, this child will be raised to
the throne ; and I — I shall stand humbly before
him, and bow low and hail him as king ! [In
rising agitation] This child, Hakon's son, shall sit
on high, on the seat that should in right, mayhap,
be mine — and I shall stand before his footstool,
white-haired and bowed with age, and see my
whole life-work lying undone — die without having
been king ! — I have more men than Hakon — there
blows a storm to-night, and the wind sweeps down

the fiord ! If I took the King-child ? I am

safe with the Tronders. x What would Hakon
dare attempt, were his child in my power ? My
men will follow me, fight for me and conquer.
Their reward shall be kingly, and they know it. —
So shall it be ! I will take the stride ; I will
leap the abyss, for the first time ! Could I but
see if thou hast Sverre's eyes — or Hakon Sverres-

son's ! He sleeps. I cannot see them. [A

pause] Sleep is as a shield. Sleep in peace, thou
little Pretender ! [Goes over to the table] Hakon
shall decide ; once again will I speak with him.
1 Men of the Trondheim district. /

230 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

MARGRETE.

[Enters, with the KING, from the room on the right.]
The Bishop dead ! Oh, trust me, all strife dies
with him.

HAKON.

To bed, Margrete ! You must be weary after
the journey.

MARGRETE.

Yes, yes. [To the DUKE.] Father, be kind and
yielding — Hakon has promised to be the like ! A
thousand good-nights, to both of you !

[Makes a gesture of farewell at the door on
the left, and goes out ; two women carry
out the cradle.

DUKE SKULE.

King Hakon, this time we must not part as foes.
All evil will follow ; there will fall a time of dread
upon the land.

HAKON.

The land has known nought else through many
generations ; but, see you, God is with me ; every
foeman falls that would stand against me. There
are no more Baglers, no Slittungs, no Ribbungs ;
Earl Jon is slain, Guthorm Ingesson is dead, Sigurd
Ribbung likewise — all claims that were put forth
at the folkmote at Bergen have fallen powerless
— from whom, then, should the time of dread come
now ?

DUKE SKULE.

Hakon, I fear me it might come from me !

HAKON.

When I came to the throne, I gave you the third
part of the kingdom

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 231

DUKE SKULE.
But kept two-thirds yourself !

HiKON.

You ever thirsted after more ; I eked out your
share until now you hold half the kingdom.

DUKE SKULE.
There lack ten ship-wards.1

HiKON.

I made you Duke ; that has no man been in

Norway before you.

DUKE SKULE.

But you are king ! I must have no king over
me ! I was not born to serve you ; I must rule in
my own right !

HiKON.

[Looks at him for a moment, and says coldly .•]
Heaven guard your understanding, my lord. Good
night. [Going.

DUKE SKULE.

[Blocking the n>ay.~\ You shall not go from me
thus ! Beware, or I will forswear all faith with
you ; you can no longer be my overlord ; we two
must share !

HiKON.

You dare to say this to me !

DUKE SKULE.

I have more men than you in Oslo, Hakon
Hakonsson.

1 Ski&redcr, districts each of which furnished a ship to the
fleet.

232 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

HAKON.

Mayhap you think to

DUKE SKULE.

Hearken to me ! Think of the Bishop's words !
Let us share ; give me the ten ship-wards ; let me
hold my share as a free kingdom, without tax or
tribute. Norway has ere this been parted into two
kingdoms ; — we will hold firmly together

HAKON.

Duke, you must be soul-sick, that you can crave
such a thing.

DUKE SKULE.

Ay, I am soul-sick, and there is no other healing
for me. We two must be equals ; there must be
no man over me !

HAKON.

Every treeless skerry is a stone in the building
which Harald Harfager and the sainted King Olaf
reared ; would you have me break in twain what
they have mortised together ? Never !

DUKE SKULE.

Well, then let us reign by turns; let each bear
sway for three years ! You have reigned long ;
now my turn has come. Depart from the land for
three years ; — I will be king the while ; I will even
out your paths for you against your home-coming ;
I will guide all things for the best; — it wears and
blunts the senses to sit ever on the watch. Hakon,
hear me — three years each ; let us wear the crown
by turns !

HAKON.

Think you my crown would fit well on your brow ?

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 233

DUKE SKULE.
No crown is too wide for me !

HAKON.

It needs a God-sent right and a God-sent calling
to wear the crown.

DUKE SKULE.

And know you so surely that you have a God-
sent right ?

HAKON.
I have God's own word for it.

DUKE SKULE.

Rest not too surely on that. Had the Bishop
had time to speak — but that were bootless now ;
you would not believe me. Ay, truly you have
mighty allies on high ; but I defy you none the
less ! You will not reign by turns with me ?
Well — then must we try the last resort ; — Hakon,
let us two fight for it, man to man, with heavy
weapons, for life or death !

HiKON.

Speak you in j est, my lord ?

DUKE SKULE.

I speak for my life-work and for my soul's
salvation !

HAKON.

Then is there small hope for the saving of your
soul.

DUKE SKULE.
You will not fight with me? You shall, you shall !

234 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

HAKON.

Oh blinded man ! I cannot bu t pity you. You
think 'tis the Lord's calling that draws you toward
the throne ; you see not that 'tis nought but pride
of heart. What is it that allures you ? The royal
circlet, the purple-bordered mantle, the right to
be seated three steps above the floor; — pitiful,
pitiful : Were that kingship, I would cast it into
your hat, as I cast a groat to a beggar.

DUKE SKULE.

You have known me since your childhood, and
you judge me thus !

HAKON.

You have wisdom and courage and all noble
gifts of the mind ; you are born to stand nearest a
king, but not to be a king yourself.

DUKE SKULE.
That will we now put to the proof!

HAKON.

Name me a single king's-task you achieved in
all the years you were regent for me ! Were the
Baglers or the Ribbungs ever mightier than then?
You were in ripe manhood, yet the land was
harried by rebellious factions; did you quell a single
one of them ? I was young and untried when I
came to the helm — look at me — all fell before me
when I became king; there are no Baglers, no
PJbbungs left !

DUKE SKULE.

Beware how you boast of that; for there lies
the greatest danger. Party must stand against
party, claim against claim, region against region,

ACT III.] TtlE PRETENDERS. 235

if the king is to have the might. Every village,
every family, must either need him or fear him.
If you strike at the root w faction, at the same
stroke you kill your own power.

HiKON.

And you would be king — you, who think such
thoughts ! You had been well fitted for a chief-
tain's part in Erling Skakke's days ; but the time
has grown away from you, and you know it not.
See you not, then, that Norway's realm, as Harald
and Olaf built it up, may be likened to a church
that stands as yet unconsecrate ? The walls soar
aloft with mighty buttresses, the vaultings have a
noble span, the spire points upward, like a fir-tree
in the forest ; but the life, the throbbing heart,
the fresh blood-stream, is lacking to the work ;
God's living spirit is not breathed into it ; it stands
unconsecrate. — / will bring consecration ! Norway
has been a kingdom, it shall become a people.
The Tronder has stood against the man of Viken,
the Agdeman against the Hordalander, the Halo-
galander against the Sogndalesman; all shall be
one hereafter, and all shall feel and know that
they are one ! That is the task which God has
laid on my shoulders; that is the work which now
lies before the King of Norway. That life-work,
Duke, I think you were best to leave untried, for
truly it is beyond you.

DUKE SKULE.

[Impressed.] To unite ? To unite the

Tronders and the men of Viken, — all Norway ?

[Sceptically.] 'Tis impossible! Norway's saga
tells of no such thing !

236 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

HlKON.

For you 'tis impossible, for you can but work
out the old saga afresh ; for me, 'tis as easy as for
the falcon to cleave the clouds.

DUKE SKULE.

[In uneasy agitation.] To unite the whole people
— to awaken it so that it shall know itself one !
Whence got you so strange a thought ? It runs
through me like ice and fire. [ Vehemently.] It
comes from the devil, Hakon ; it shall never be
carried through while I have strength to buckle
on my helm.

HiKON.

'Tis from God the thought comes to me, and
never shall I let it slip while I bear St. Olaf's
circlet on my brow !

DUKE SKULE.

Then must St. Olaf's circlet fall from your
brow !

HAKON.
Who will make it fall ?

DUKE SKULE.
I, if none other.

HAKON.

You, Skule, will be harmless after to-morrow's
Assembly.

DUKE SKULE.

Hakon ! Tempt not God ! Drive me not out
upon the last ledge of the deep !

HlKON.

[Points to the door.] Go, my lord — and be it

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 237

forgotten that we have spoken with sharp tongues
this night.

DUKE SKULE.

[Looks hard at him for a moment, and says ;]
Next time, 'twill be witli sharper tongues we speak.

[Goes to the back.
HAKON.

[After a short pause.] He threatens ! No, no, it
cannot come to that. He must, he shall give way
and do my will ; I have need of that strong arm,
that cunning brain. — Whatsoever courage and
wisdom and strength there maybe in this land, all
gifts that God has endowed men withal, are but
granted them to my uses. For my service did all
noble gifts fall to Duke Skule's share ; to defy me
is to defy Heaven ; 'tis my duty to punish whoso-
ever shall set himself up against Heaven's will —
for Heaven has done so much for me.

DAGFINN THE PEASANT.

[Enters from the backJ] Be on your guard to-
night, my lord ; the Duke has surely evil in his
mind.

HAKON.
What say you ?

DAGFINN.

WThat may be his drift, I know not ; but sure am
I that something is brewing.

HAKON.

Can he think to fall upon us? Impossible,
impossible !

DAGFINN.

No, 'tis something else. His ships lie clear for
sailing ; he has summoned an Assembly on board
them.

238 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

You must misl
me sure tidings.

HlKON.

You must mistake ! Go, Dagfinn, and bring

DAGFINN.
Ay ay, trust to me. [Goes.

HAKON.

No, — 'tis not to be thought of! The Duke dare
not rise against me. God will not suffer it — God,
who has hitherto guided all things for me so
mnrvellously. I must have peace now, for 'tis now
I must set about my work ! — I have done so little
yet ; but I hear the unerring voice of the Lord
calling to me : Thou shalt do a great king's-work
in Norway !

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

[Enters from the back.] My lord and King !

HAKON.
Gregorius Jonsson ! Come you hither ?

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

I offer myself for your service. Thus far have
I followed the Duke ; but now I dare follow him
no further.

HAKON.
What has befallen?

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

That which no man will believe, when 'tis
rumoured through the land.

HAKON.
Speak, speak !

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 239

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

I tremble to hear the sound of my own words ;
know theii-

[He seizes the KING'S arm and whispers.

HA RON.

[Starts backwards with a cry.] Ha, are you dis-
traught ?

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
Would to God I were.

HAKON.
Unheard of ! No, it cannot be true !

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
By Christ's dear blood, so is it !

HiKON.

Go, go ; sound the trumpet-call for my guard ;
get all my men under arms.

[GREGORIUS JONSSON goes.

HlKON.

[Paces the room once or twice, then goes quickly up
to the door O/MARGRETE'S chamber, knocks at it, takes
one or two more turns through the room, then goes again
to the door, knocks, and calls.'] Margrete !

[Goes on pacing up and down.

MARGRETE.

[In the doorway, attired for the night, with her hair
down ; she has a red cloak round her shoulders, hold-
ing it close together over her breast.] Hakon ! Is it
you?

240 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

HAKON.

Yes, yes ; come hither.

MARGRETE.

Oh, but you must not look at me ; I was in bed
already.

HAKON.
I have other things to think of.

MARGRETE.
What has befallen.

HAKON.

Give me a good counsel ! I have even now
received the worst tidings.

MARGRETE.
[Alarmed.] What tidings, Hakon ?

HAKON.

That there are now two kings in Norway.

MARGRETE.

Two kings in Norway ! — Hakon, where is my
father ?

HAKON.

He has proclaimed himself king on board his
ship ; now he is sailing to Nidaros to be crowned.

MARGRETE.

Oh God, thou almighty !

[Sinks down on the bench, covers her face
rviih her hands and weeps.]

HAKON.
Two kings in the land !

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 241

MARGRETE.
My husband the one — my father the other !

HlKON.

[Pacing restlessly up and down.'] Give me a good
counsel, Margrete ! Should I cross the country by
way of the Uplands, come first to Nidaros, and
prevent the crowning ? No, it may not be done ;
My men are too few ; there in the north he is more
powerful than I. — Give me counsel ; how can I
have the Duke slain, ere he come to Nidaros ?

MARGRETE.
[Imploringly, with folded hands. ] Hakon, Hakon !

HAKON.

Can you not hit upon a good device, I say, to
have the Duke slain ?

MARGRETE.

[Sinks down from the bench in agony and remains
kneeling.'] Oh, can you so utterly forget that he is
my father ?

HlKON.

Your father ; ay, ay, it is true ; I had for-
gotten. [Raises her up.] Sit, sit, Margrete ;
comfort you ; do not weep ; you have no fault in
this. [Goes over to the window.] Duke Skule will
be worse for me than all other foemen ! God,
God, — why hast thou stricken me so sorely, when
I have in nowise sinned ! [A knock at the door in
the back ; he starts , listens, and cries :] Who knocks
so late ?

INGA'S VOICE.

[Without.] One who is a-cold, Hakon !

II Q

242 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT III.

HAKON.

f With a cry.] My mother !

MARGRETE.
[Springs upj\ Inga !

HAKON.

[Rushes to the door and opens it ; INGA is sitting on
the doorstepJ] My mother ! Sitting like a dog
outside her son's door ! ,-. And I ask why God has
stricken me !

INGA.

[Stretches out her arms towards him.~\ Hakon, my
child! Blessings upon you !

HAKON.

[Raising her up.~] Come — come in ; here are
light and warmth !

INGA.
May I come in to you ?

HAKON.

Never shall we part again.

INGA.

My son — my King — oh, but you are good and
loving ! I stood in a corner and saw you, as you
came from the Bishop's Palace ; you looked so
sorrowful; I could not part from you thus.

HAKON.

God be thanked for that ! No one, truly,
could have come to me more welcome than you
Margrete — my mother — I have sorely sinned ; I
have barred my heart against you two, who are so
rich in love.

ACT III.] THE PRETENDERS. 243

MARGRETE.

[Falls on his neck.] Oh, Hakon, my beloved
husband ; do I stand near you now ?

HlKON.

Ay, near me, near me ; not to give me cunning
counsels, but to shed light over my path. Come
what will, I feel the Lord's strength within me I

DAG FINN THE PEASANT.

[Enters hastily from the back.] My lord, my lord !
The worst has befallen !

HiKON.

[Smiles confidently while he holds MARQRETE and
INGA closely to him.] I know it ; but there is nought
to fear, good Dagfinn ! If there be two kings
in Norway, there is but one in Heaven— and He
will set all straight .'

ACT FOURTH.

The great hall in Oslo Palace, KING SKULE is
feasting with the Guard and his Chiefs. In
front, on the left, stands the throne, where SKULE
sits, richly attired, with a purple mantle and the
royal circlet on his head. 1 'he supper-table, by
which the guests are sealed, stretches from the
throne towards the background. Opposite to
SKULE sit PAUL FLIDA and BARD BRATTE. Some
of the humbler guests are standing, to the right.
It is late evening ; the hall is brightly lighted.
The banquet is drawing to a close ; the men are
very merry, and some of them drunk ; they drink
to each other, laugh, and all talk together^

PAUL FLIDA.

[Rises and strikes the table.] Silence in the hall ;
Jatgeir Skald will say forth his song in honour of
King Skule.

JATGEIR.

[Stands out in the middle of the floor.1
Duke Skule he summoned the Orething2
when 'twas mass-time in Nidaros town ;
and the bells rang and swords upon bucklers

clashed bravely
when Duke Skule he donned the crown.

King Skule marched over the Dovrefjeld,
his host upon snow-shoes sped ;

1 The metre of this song is very rugged in the original, and
the wording purposely uncouth. 2 See note, p. 127.

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 245

the Gudbranddalesman he grovelled for grace,
but his hoard must e'en ransom his head.

King Skule south over Miosen fared, —
the Uplander cursed at his banner;
King Skule hasted through Raumarike
toLaka in Nannestad manor.

'Twas all in the holy Shrove-tide week

we met with the Birchleg horde ;

Earl Knut was their captain — the swords with

loud tongue
in the suit for the throne made award.

They say of a truth that since Sverre's days
was never so hot a fight ;
red-sprent, like warriors' winding-sheets,,
grew the upland that erst lay white.

They took to their heels did the Birchenlegs,
flinging from them both buckler and bill there ;
many hundreds, though, took to their heels

nevermore,
for they lay and were icily chill there.

No man knows where King Hakon hideth ; —
King Skule stands safe at the helm.
All hail and long life to thee, lord, in thy state
as King of all Norway's realm I

SKULE'S MEN.

[Spring up with loud jubilation, hold goblets
and beakers aloft, clash their weapons,
and repeat :

All hail and long life to thee, lord, in thy state
as King of all Norway's realm !

KING SKULE.
Thanks for the song, Jatgeir Skald ! 'Tis as

246 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

I best like it; for it gives my men no less praise
than myself.

JATGEIR.

The King is honoured when his men are
praised.

KING SKULE.

Take as guerdon tnis arm-ring, stay with me,
and be of my household ; I will have many skalds
about me.

JATGEIR.

'Twill need many, my lord, if all your great
deeds are to be sung.

KING SKULE.

I will be threefold more bountiful than Hakon ;
the skald's song shall be honoured and rewarded
like all other noble deeds, so long as I am king.
Be seated; now you belong to my household;
all you have need of shall be freely given you.

JATGEIR.

[Seatg himself.] Ere long there will be a dearth
of what I most need, my lord.

KING SKULE.
What mean you ?

JATGEIR.

Foes to King Skule, whose flight and fall I can
sing.

MANY OF THE MEN.

[Amid laughter and applause.] Well said,
Icelander !

PAUL FLIDA.
[To JATGEIR.] The song was good; but 'tis

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 24-7

known there goes a spice of lying to every skald-
work, and yours was not without it.

JATGEIR.
Lying, Sir Marshal ?

PAUL FLIDA.

Ay ; you say no man knows where King Hakon
is hiding; that is not true; we have certain
tidings that Hakon is at Nidaros.

KING SKULE.

[Smiling."] He has claimed homage for the
King-child, and given it the kingly title.

JATGEIR.

That have I heard ; but I knew not that any
man could give away that which he himself does
not possess.

KING SKULE.

'Tis easiest to give what you yourself do not
possess.

B!RD BRATTE.

But it can scarce be easy to beg your way in
midwinter from Bergen to Nidaros.

JATGEIR.

The fortunes of the Birchlegs move in a ring ;
they began hungry and frozen, and now they end
in like case.

PAUL FLIDA.

'Tis rumoured in Bergen that Hakon has for-
sworn che Church and all that is holy ; he heard
not mass on New Year's dny.

24)8 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

BARD BRATTE.

He could plead lawful hindrance, Paul ; he
stood all day cutting his silver goblets and dishes
to pieces — he had naught else wherewith to pay
his household.

[Laughter and loud talk among the guests.

KING SKULE.

[Raises his goblet.] I drink to you, Bard Bratte,
and thank you and all my new men. You fought
manfully for me at Laka, and bore a great part in
the victory.

B!RD BRATTE.

It was the first time I fought under you, my
lord ; but I soon felt that 'tis easy to conquer when
such a chieftain as you rides at the head of the
host. But I would we had not slain so many and
chased them so far ; for now I fear 'twill be long
ere they dare face us again.

KING SKULE.

Wait till the spring : we shall meet them again,
never fear. Earl Knut lies with the remnant at
Tunsberg rock, and Arnbiorn Jonsson is gathering
a force eastward in Viken ; when they deem
themselves strong enough, they will soon let us
hear from them.

B!RD BRATTE.

They will never dare to, after the great
slaughter at Laka.

KING SKULE.
Then will we lure them forth with cunning.

MANY VOICES.
Ay, ay — do so, lord King !

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 249

BARD BRATTE.

You have good store of cunning, King Skule.
Your foemen have never warning ere you fall upon
them, and you are ever there where they least
await you.

PAUL FLIDA.

'Tis therefore that the Birchlegs call us
Varbaelgs.1

KING SKULE.

Others say Vargbaelgs ; but this I swear, that
when next we meet, the Birchlegs shall learn how
hard it is to turn such Wolf-skins inside out.

BARD BRATTE.

With their good will shall we never meet —
'twill be a chase the whole country round.

KING SKULE.

Ay, that it shall be. First we must purge
Viken, and make sure of all these eastward parts ;
then will we get our ships together, and sail round
the Naze and up the coast to Nidaros.

BARD BRATTE

And when you come in such wise to Nidaros,
I scare think the monks will deny to move

1 The derivation of this word is doubtful. In the form
Vargbcelg it means Wolf-skin, from Icelandic Vargr = '& wolf,
and Belgr = ihe. skin of an animal taken off whole. The more
common form, however, is Varbelg, which, as P. A. Munch
suggests ("Det Norske Folks Historic," iii. 219), may possibly
come from var (our word " ware "), a covering, and may be an
allusion to the falsity and cunning of the faction. What Ibsen
understands by the form Varbcelg I cannot discover. Var
(Icelandic V&r) means the springtide. The nick-name had been
applied to a political faction as early as 1190, and was merely
revived as a designation for Skule's adherents.

250 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

St. Olafs shrine out to the mote-stead, as they
did in the autumn, when we swore allegiance.

KING SKULE.

The shrine shall out ; I will bear my kingship
in all ways lawfully.

JATGEIR.

And I promise you to sing a great death-song,
when you have slain the Sleeper.

[An outburst of laughter among the men.

KING SKULE.
The Sleeper ?

JATGEIR.

Know you not, my lord, that King Hakon is
called " Hakon the Sleeper," because he sits as
though benumbed ever since you came to the
throne ?

BARD BRATTE.

They say he lies ever with his eyes closed.
Doubtless he dreams that he is still king.

KING SKULE,

Let him dream ; he shall never dream himself
back into the kingship.

JATGEIR.

Let his sleep be long and dreamless, then shall
I have stuff for songs.

THE MEN.
Ay, ay, do as the skald says !

KING SKULE.I
When so many good men counsel as one, the

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 251

counsel must be good ; yet will we not talk now
of that matter. But one promise I will make :
each of my men shall inherit the weapons and
harness, and gold and silver, of whichever one of
the enemy he slays ; and each man shall succeed
to the dignities of him he lays low. He who slays
a baron shall himself be a baron ; he who slays a
thane, shall receive his thaneship ; and all they
who already hold such dignities and offices, shall
be rewarded after other kingly sort.

THE MEN.

[Spring up in wild delight.'] Hail, hail, King
Skule ! Lead us against the Birchlegs !

BARD BRATTE.
Now are you sure to conquer in all battles.

PAUL FLIDA.

I claim Dagfinn the Peasant for myself; he
owns a good sword that I have long hankered
after.

B!RD BRATTE.

I will have Bard Torsteinsson's hauberk ; it
saved his life at Laka, for it withstands both cut
and thrust.

JATGEIR.

Nay, but let me have it ; 'twill fit me better ;
you shall have five golden marks in exchange.

BARD BRATTE.
Where will you find five golden marks, Skald ?

JATGEIR.

I will take them from Gregorius Jonsson when
we come northward.

252 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

THE MEN.

[All talking together.] And I will have — I will
have [The rest becomes indistinct in the hubbub.

PAUL FLIDA.

Away ! Every man to his quarters ; bethink
you that you are in the King's hall.

THE MEN.
Ay, ay, — hail to the King, hail to King Skule !

KING SKULE.

To bed now, good fellows ! We have sat long
over the drinking-table to-night.

A MAN-AT-ARMS.

[As the crowd is trooping out."] To-morrow we
will cast lots for the Birchlegs' goods.

ANOTHER.
Rather leave it to luck !

SEVERAL.
Nay, nay !

OTHERS.
Ay, ay !

B!RD BRATTE.

Now the Wolf-skins are fighting for the bear-
fell.

PAUL FLIDA.

And they have yet to fell the bear.

[All go out by the back.

KING SKULE.
[Waits till the men are gone; the tension of

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 253

his features relaxes ; he sinks upon a bench."] How
weary I am, weary to death. To live in the
midst of that swarm day out and day in, to look
smilingly ahead as though I were so immovably
assured of right and victory and fortune. To have
no creature with whom I may speak of all that
gnaws me so sorely. [Rises with a look of terror.]
And the battle at Laka ! That I should have
conquered there ! Hakon sent his host against
me ; God was to judge and award between the
two kings— and I conquered, conquered, as never
any before has conquered the Birchlegs ! Their
shields stood upright in the snow, but there was
none behind them — the Birchlegs took to the
woods, and fled over upland and moor and lea as
far as their legs would carry them. The unbe-
lievable came to pass ; Hakon lost and I won.
There is a secret horror in that victory. Thou
great God of Heaven ! there rules, then, no cer-
tain law on high, that all things must obey ? The
right carries with it no conquering might? [With a
change of tone, wildly] I am sick, I am sick! —
Wherefore should not the right be on my side ?
May I not deem that God himself would assure
me of it, since he let me conquer? [ Brooding]
The possibilities are even j — not a feather-weight
more on the one side than on the other ; and yet
— [shakes his head] — yet the balance dips on
Hakon's part. I have hatred and hot desire to
cast into my scale, yet the balance dips on Hakon's
part. When the thought of the kingly right comes
over me unawares, 'tis ever he, not I, that is the
true king. When I would see myself as the true
king, I must do it with forethought, I must build
up a whole fabric of subtleties, a work of cunning ;
I must hold memories aloof, and take faith by

254* THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

storm. It was not so before. What has befallen
to fill me so full of doubt ? The burning of the
letter ? No — that made the uncertainty eternal,
but did not add to it. Has Hakon done any great
and kingly deed in these later days ? No, his
greatest deeds were done while I least believed
in him. [Seals himself on the right J\ What is it?
Ha, strange ! It comes and goes like a marsh-fire ;
it dances at the tip of my tongue, as when one has
lost a word and cannot find it. [Springs tip.] Ha !

Now I have it ! No ! Yes, yes ! Now I have

it ! — "Norway has been a kingdom, it shall be-
come a people ; all shall be one, and all shall feel
and know that they are one ! " Since Hakon spoke
those madman's words, he stands ever before me
as the rightful king. [ Whispers with fixed and appre-
hensive gaze.] What if God's calling glimmered
through these strange words ? If God had gar-
nered up the thought till now, and would now
strew it forth — and had chosen Hakon for his
sower ?

PAUL FLIDA.

[Enters from the back.] My lord King, I have
tidings for you.

KING SKULE.

Tidings ?

PAUL FLIDA.

A man who comes from down the fiord brings
news that the Birchlegs inTunsberg have launched
their ships, and that many men have gathered in
the town in these last days.

KING SKULE.

Good, we will go forth to meet them — to-morrow
or the day after.

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 255

PAUL FLIDA.

It might chance, my lord King, that the Birch-
legs had a mind to meet us first.

KING SKULE.
They have not ships enough for that, nor men.

PAUL FLIDA.

But Arnbiorn Jonsson is gathering both men
and ships, all round in Viken.

KING SKULE.

The better for us ; we will crush them at one
blow, as we did at Laka.

PAUL FLIDA.

My lord, 'tis not so easy to crush the Birchlcgs
twice following.

KING SKULE.
And wherefore not ?

PAUL FLIDA.

Because Norway's saga tells not that the like
has ever befallen. Shall I send forth scouts to
Hoved-isle ?

KING SKULE.

'Tis needless ; the night is dark, and there is a
sea-fog to boot.

PAUL FLIDA.

Well well, the King knows best ; but bethink
you, my lord, that all men are against you here in
Viken. The townsfolk of Oslo hate you, and should
the Birchlegs come, they will make common cause
with them.

256 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

KING SKULE.

[With animation.] Paul Flida, were it not
possible that I could win over the men of Viken
to my side ?

PAUL FLIDA.

[Looks at him in astonishment, and shakes his
head.] No, my lord, it is not possible.

KING SKULE.
And wherefore not ?

PAUL FLIDA.

Why, for that you have the Tronders on your
side.

KING SKULE.

I will have both the Tronders and the men of
Viken !

PAUL FLIDA.
Nay, my lord, th?it cannot be !

KING SKULE.

Not possible ! cannot be ! And wherefore —
wherefore not ?

PAUL FLIDA.

Because the man of Viken is the man of Viken,
the Tronder is the Tronder; because so it has
always been, and no saga tells of a time when it
was otherwise.

KING SKULE.
Ay, ay — you are right. Go.

PAUL FLIDA.

And send forth no scouts ?

KING SKULE.
Wait till daybreak. [PAUL FLIDA goes] Nor-

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 257

way's saga tells of no such thing ; it has never
been so yet ; Paul Flida answers me as I answered
Hakon. Are there, then, upward as well as down-
ward steps ? Stands Hakon as high over me as I
over Paul Flida ? Has Hakori an eye for unborn
thoughts, that is lacking in me ? Who stood so
high as Harold Harfager in the days when every
headland had its king, and he said : Now they
must fall — hereafter shall there be but one ? He
threw the old saga to the winds, and made a new
saga. [A pause ; he paces up and down lost in thought;
then he stops.] Can one man take God's call-
ing from another, as he takes weapons and gold
from his fallen foe ? Can a Pretender clothe him-
self in a king's life-task, as he can put on the
kingly mantle ? The oak that is felled to be a
ship's timber, can it say : Nay, I will be the mast,
I will take on me the task of the fir-tree, point
upwards, tall and shining, bear the golden vane
at my top, spread bellying white sails to the sun-
shine, and meet the eyes of all men, from afar ! —
No, no, thou heavy gnarled oak-trunk, thy place is
down in the keel; there shalt thou lie, and do thy
work, unheard-of and unseen by those aloft in the
daylight ; it is thou that shalt hinder the ship from
being whelmed in the storm ; while the mast with
the golden vane and the bellying sail shall bear it
forward toward the new, toward the unknown,
toward alien strands and the saga of the future !
[Vehemently.'] Since Hakon uttered his great
king-thought, I can see no other thought in the
world but that only. If I cannot take it and act it
out, I see no other thought to fight for. [Brood-
ing.] And can I not make it mine ? If I can-
not, whence comes my great love for Hakon's
thought ?

258 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

JATGEIR.
[Enters from the back.] Forgive my coming,

lord King

KING SKULE.

You come to my wish, Skald !

JATGEIR.

I overheard some townsfolk at my lodging
talking darkly of

KING SKULE.

Let that wait. Tell me, Skald : you who have
fared far abroad in strange lands, have you ever
seen a woman love another's child ? Not only
have kindness for it — 'tis not that I mean ; but
love it, love it with the warmest passion of her
soul.

JATGEIR.

That do only those women who have no child of
their own to love.

KING SKULE.
Only those women ?

JATGEIR.
And chiefly women who are barren.

KING SKULE.

Chiefly the barren ? They love the children

of others with all their warmest passions ?

JATGEIR.
That will oftentimes befall.

KING SKULE.
And does it not sometimes befall that such a

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 259

barren woman will slay another's child, because
she herself has none ?

JATGEIR.
Ay, ay ; but in that she does unwisely.

KING SKULE.
Unwisely ?

JATGEIR.

Ay, for she gives the gift of sorrow to her whose
child she slays.

KING SKULE.
Think you the gift of sorrow is a great good ?

JATGEIR.
Yes, lord.

KING SKULE.

[Looks fixedly at him.] Me thinks there are two
men in you, Icelander. When you sit amid the
household at the merry feast, you draw cloak and
hood over all your thoughts ; when one is alone
with you, sometimes you seem to be of those among
whom one were fain to choose his friend. How
comes it ?

JATGEIR.

When you go to swim in the river, my lord, you
would scarce strip you where the people pass by
to church ; you seek a sheltered privacy.

KING SKULE.
True, true.

JATGEIR.

My soul has the like shamefastness ; therefore
I do not strip me when there are many in the
hall.

260 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

KING SKULE.

Ha. [A short pause.] Tell me, Jatgeir, how
came you to be a skalo? Who taught you skald-
craft ?

JATGEIR.
Skaldcraft cannot be taught, my lord,

KING SKULE.
Cannot be taught ? How came it then?

JATGEIR.

The gift of sorrow came to me, and I was a
skald.

KING SKULE.

Then 'tis the gift of sorrow the skald has need
of?

JATGEIR.

/ needed sorrow ; others there may be who need
faith, or joy — or doubt

KING SKULE.
Doubt as well ?

JATGEIR.

Ay ; but then must the doubter be strong and
sound.

KING SKULE.

And whom call you the unsound doubter?

JATGEIR.
He who doubts of his own doubt.

KING SKULE.
[Slowly.} That, methinks, were death.

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 26l

JATGEIR.
Tis worse ; 'tis neither day nor night.

KING SKULE.

[Quickly, as if shaking off his thoughts.] Where
are my weapons ? I will fight and act — not think.
What was it you would have told me when you
came ?

JATGEIR.

'Twas what I noted in my lodging. The towns-
men whisper together secretly, and laugh mock-
ingly, and ask if we be well assured that King
Hakon is in the westland; there is somewhat they
are in glee over.

KING SKULE.

They are men of Viken, and therefore against
me.

JATGEIR.

They scoff because King Olaf s shrine could not
be brought out to the mote-stead when you were
chosen king ; they say it boded ill.

KING SKULE.

When next I come to Nidaros, the shrine shall
out ! It shall stand under the open sky, though
I should have to tear down St. Olaf s church and
widen out the mote-stead over the spot where it
stood.

JATGEIR.

That were a strong deed ; but I shall make a
song of it, as strong as the deed itself.

KING SKULE,

Have you many unmade songs within you,
Jatgeir ?

262 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

JATGEIR.

Nay, but many unborn ; they are conceived
one after the other, come to life, and are brought
forth.

KING SKULE.

And if I, who am King and have the might, if
I were to have you slain, would all the unborn
skald-thoughts you bear within you die along with
you ?

JATGEIR.
My lord, it is a great sin to slay a fair thought.

KING SKULE.

I ask not if it be a sin ; I ask if it be
possible !

JATGEIR.
I know not.

KING SKULE.

Have you never had another skald for your
friend, and has he never unfolded to you a great
and noble song he thought to make ?

JATGEIR.
Yes, lord.

KING SKULE.

Did you not then wish that you could slay him,
to take his thought and make the song yourself?

JATGEIR.

My lord, I am not barren ; I have children of
my own ; I need not to love those of other men.

[Goes.

KING SKULE.

[After a pauseJ] The Icelander is in very deed a
skald. He speaks God's deepest truth and knows

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 263

it not / am as a barren woman. Therefore

I love Hakon's kingly thought-child, love it with
the warmest passion of my soul. Oh, that I could
but adopt1 it ! It would die in my hands. Which
were best, that it should die in my hands, or wax
great in his ? Should I ever have peace of soul if
that came to pass ? Can I forgo all ? Can I stand
by and see Hakon make himself famous for all
time ! How dead and empty is all within me —
and around me. No friend — ; ah, the Icelander !
[Goes to the door and calls :] Has the skald gone
from the palace ?

A GUARD.

[Outside.] No, my lord ; he stands in the
outer hall talking with the watch.

KINO SKULE.

Bid him come hither. [Goes forward to the
table ; presently JATGEIR enters.] I cannot sleep,
Jatgeir; 'tis all my great kingly thoughts that
keep me awake, you see.

JATGEIR.

'Tis with the king's thoughts as with the skald's,
I doubt not. They fly highest and grow quickest
when there is night and stillness around.

KING SKULE.
Is it so with the skald's thoughts too ?

JATGEIR.

Ay, lord ; no song is born by daylight ; it may
be written down in the sunshine ; but it makes
itself in the silent night.

1 KncBsatte, see note, p. 19.

264 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

KING SKULE.
Who gave you the gift of sorrow* Jatgeir ?

JATGEIR.
She whom I loved.

KING SKULE.
She died, then.

JATGEIR,
No, she deceived me.

KING SKULE.
And then you became a skald ?

JATGEIR.
Ay, then I became a skald.

KING SKULE.

[Seises him by the arm.] What gift do / need
to become a king ?

JATGEIR.

Not the gift of doubt; else would you not
question so.

KING SKULE.
What gift do I need ?

JATGEIR.
My lord, you are a king.

KING SKULE.

Have you at all times full faith that you are a
skald?

JATGEIR.

[Looks silently at him for a while, and asks.] Have
you never loved ?

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 265

KING SKULE.
Yes, once — burningly, blissfully, and in sin.

JATGEIR.
You have a wife.

KING SKULE.
Her I took to bear me sons.

JATGEIR.

But you have a daughter, my lord — a gracious
and noble daughter.

KING SKULE.

Were my daughter a son, I would not ask you
what gift I need. [Vehemently.] I must have
some one by me who sinks his own will utterly in
mine — who believes in me unflinchingly, who will
cling close to me in good hap and ill, who lives
only to shed light and warmth over my life, and
must die if I fall. Give me counsel, Jatgeir
Skald'

JATGEIR.

Buy yourself a dog, my lord.

KING SKULE.
Would no man suffice ?

JATGEIR.
You would have to search long for such a man.

KING SKULE.

[Suddenly.] Will you be that man to me,
Jatgeir ? Will you be a son to me ? You shall
have Norway's crown to your heritage — the whole
land shall be yours, if you will be a son to me, and
live for my life-work, and believe in me.

266 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

JATGEIR.
And what should be my warranty that I did not

feign ?

KING SKULE.

Give up your calling in life ; sing no more songs,
and then will I believe you !

JATGEIR.
No, lord — that were to buy the crown too dear.

KING SKULE.

Bethink you well — 'tis greater to be a king than
a skald.

JATGEIR.
Not always.

KING SKULE.
'Tis but your unsung songs you must sacrifice !

JATGEIR.
Songs unsung are ever the fairest.

KING SKULE.

But I must — I must have one who can trust in
me ! Only one ! I feel it — had I that one, I
were saved !

JATGEIR.
Trust in yourself and you will be saved !

PAUL FLIDA.

[Enters hastily .] King Skule, look to yourself!
Hakon Hakons«oii lies off Elgjarnese with all his
fleet !

KING SKULE.

Off Elgjarness ! ThenJie is close at hand.

ACT

IV.l THE PRETENDERS. 267

JATGEIR.

Get we to arms then ! If there be bloodshed
to-night, I will gladly be the first to die for you !

KING SKULE.
You, who would not live for me !

JATGEIR.

A man can die for another's life-work ; but if
he go on living, he must live for his own. [Goes.

PAUL FLIDA.

[Impatiently.'] Your commands, my lord ! The
Birchlegs may be in Oslo this very hour.

KING SKULE,

'Twere best if we could fare to St. Thomas
Beckett's grave ; he has helped so many a sorrow-
ful and penitent soul.

PAUL FLIDA.

[More forcibly.'] My lord, speak not so wildly
now ; I tell you, the Birchlegs are upon us !

KING SKULE.

Let all the churches be opened, that we may
betake us thither and find grace.

PAUL FLIDA.

You can crush all your foemen at one stroke^
and yet would betake you to the churches !

KING SKULE.
Yes, yes, keep all the churches open !

268 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

PAUL FLIDA.

Be sure Hakon will break sanctuary, when 'tis
Varbaelgs he pursues.

KING SKULE.

That will he not ; God will shield him from such
a sin ; — God always shields Hakon.

PAUL FLIDA.

[In deep and sorrowful wrath.] To hear you
speak thus, a man could not but ask : Who is king
in this land ?

KING SKULE.

[Smiling mournfully.] Ay, Paul Flida, that is
the great question : Who is king in this land?

PAUL FLIDA.

[Imploringly.] You are soul-sick to-night, my
lord ; let me act for you.

KING SKULE.
Ay, ay, do so.

PAUL FLIDA.

[Going.] First will I break down all the
bridges.

KING SKULE.

Madman ! Stay ! — Break down all the bridges !
Know you what that means ? / have assayed it ;
— beware of that !

PAUL FLIDA.
What would you then, my lord ?

KING SKULE.
I will talk with Hakon.

A.CT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 26®

PAUL FLIDA.
He will answer you with a tongue of steel.

KING SKULE.
Go, go ; — you shall learn my will anori.

PAUL FLIDA.

Every moment is precious ! [Seizes his hand.]
King Skule, let us break down all the bridges,
fight like Wolves,1 and trust in Heaven !

KING SKULE.

[Softly.] Heaven trusts not in me ; I dare
not trust in Heaven.

PAUL FLIDA.
Short has been the saga of the Vargbaelgs.

[Goes out by the back.

KING SKULE.

A hundred cunning heads, a thousand mighty
arms, are at my beck ; but not a single loving,
trusting heart. That is kingly beggary ; no more,
no less.

B!RD BRATTE.

[From the back.] Two wayfarers from afar
stand without, praying to have speech with you
my lord.

KING SKULE.

Who are they ?

BARD BRATTE.
A woman and a priest.

1 Varger, the first part of tlvi word Varglalg.

270 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

KING SKULE.
Let the woman and the priest approach.

[BARD goes ; KING SKULE seats himself,
musing, on the right ; presently there
enters a black-robed woman; she wears
a long cloak, a hood, and a thick veil,
which conceals her face; a priest follows
her, and remains standing by the door.

KING SKULE.
Who are you ?

THE WOMAN.
One you have loved.

KING SKULE.

[Shaking his head.] There lives no one who
remembers that I have loved. Who are you, I
ask?

THE WOMAN.
One who loves you.

KING SKULE.
Then are you surely one of the dead.

THE WOMAN.

[Comes close to him and says softly and passion-
ately} Skule Bardsson !

KING SKULE.
[Rises with a ciy.] Ingeborg !

INGEBORG.
Do you know me now, Skule e

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 271

KING SKULE.
Ingeborg, — Ingeborg !

INGEBORG.

Ob, let me look at you — look long at you, so
long ! [Seizes his hands ; a pause.] You fair, you
deeply loved, you faithless man !

KING SKULE.

Take off that veil ; look at me with the eyes
that once were as clear and blue as the sky.

INGEBORG.

These eyes have been but a rain-clouded sky
for twenty years ; you would not know them
again, and you shall never see them more.

KING SKULE.

But your voice is fresh and soft and young as
ever!

INGEBORG.

I have used it only to whisper your name, to
imprint your greatness in a young heart, and to
pray to the sinners' God for grace toward us
twain, who have loved in sin.

KING SKULE.
You have done that ?

INGEBORG.

I have been silent save to speak loving words
of you ; — therefore has my voice remained fresh
and soft and young.

272 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

KING SKULE.

There lies a life-time between. Every fair
memory from those days have I wasted and let
slip—

INGEBORG.
It was your right.

KING SKULE.

And meantime you, Ingeborg, loving, faithful
woman, have dwelt there in the north, guard-
ing and treasuring your memories, in ice-cold
loneliness !

INGEBORG.
It was my happiness.

KING SKULE.

And I could give you up to win might and
riches ! With you at my side, as my wife, I had
found it easier to be a king.

INGEBORG.

God has been good to me in willing it other-
wise. A soul like mine had need of a great sin,
to arouse it to remorse and expiation.

KING SKULE.
And now you come ?

INGEBORG.
As Andres Skialdarband's widow.

KING SKULE.
Your husband is dead !

INGEBORG.
On the way from Jerusalem.

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 273

KING SKULE.
Then has he atoned for the slaying of Vegard.

INGEBORG.

'Twas not therefore that my noble husband
took the Cross.

KING SKULE.
Not therefore?

INGEBORG.

No ; it was my sin he took upon his strong,
loving shoulders ; 'twas that he went to wash
away in Jordan stream ; 'twas for that he bled.

KING SKULE.
[Softly.] Then he knew all.

INGEBORG.

From the first. And Bishop Nicholas knew it,
for to him I confessed. And there was one other
man that came to know it, though how I cannot
guess.

KING SKULE.
Who."

INGEBORG.
Vegard Vseradal.

KING SKULE.
Vegard !

INGEBORG.

He whispered a mocking word of me into my
husband's ear; and thereupon Andres Skialdar-
band drew his sword, and slew him on the spot.

KING SKULE.

He kept ward over her whom /betrayed and
forgot. — And wherefore seek you me now ?

274> THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

INGEBORG.
To bring you the last sacrifice.

KING SKULE.
What mean you ?

INGEBORG.

[Points to the Priest who stands by the door.\
Look at him ! — Peter, my son, come hither !

KING SKULE.

Your son !

INGEBORG.
And yours, King Skule !

KING SKULE.
[Half bewildered.] Ingeborg !

[PETER approaches in silent emotion, and
throws himself be fore KING SKULE.

INGEBORG.

Take him! For twenty years has he been the
light and comfort of my life. — Now are you King
of Norway ; the King's son must enter on his
heritage ; I have no longer any right to him.

KING SKULE.

[Raises him up, in a storm of joy.] Here, to
my heart, you whom I have yearned for so burn-
ingly ! [Presses him in his arms, lets him go, looks
at him, and embraces him again.] My son ! My
son ! I have a son ! Ha- ha -ha ! who can stand
against me now ? [Goes over to INGEBORG and
seizes her hand.] And you, you give him to me,

ACT IV.]

THE PRETENDERS.

275

Ingeborg ! You take not back your word ? You
give him to me indeed ?

INGEBORG.

Heavy is the sacrifice, and scarce had I strength
to make it, but that Bishop Nicholas sent him to
me, bearing a letter with tidings of Andres Skial-
darband's death. 'Twas the Bishop that laid on
me the heavy sacrifice, to atone for all my sin.

KING SKULE.

Then is the sin blotted out, and henceforth he
is mine alone ; is it not so, mine alone ?

INGEBORG.
Yes ; but one promise I crave of you.

KING SKULE.
Heaven and earth, crave all you will J

INGEBORG.

He is pure as a lamb of God, as I now give him
into your hands. 'Tis a perilous path that leads
up to the throne ; let him not take hurt to his
soul. Hear you, King Skule : let not my child
take hurt to his soul !

KING SKULE.
That I promise and swear to you !

INGEBORG.

[Seises his arm.] From the moment you mark
that his soul suffers harm, let him rather die !

KING SKULE.
Rather die ! I promise and swear it 1

276 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

INGEBORG.

Then shall I be of good cheer as I go back to
Halogaland.

KING SKULE.

Ay, you may be of good cheer.

•

INGEBORG.

There will I repent and pray, till the Lord calls
me. And when we meet before God, he shall
come back to me pure and blameless.

KING SKULE.

Pure and blameless ! [Turning to PETER.] Let
me look at you ! Ay, your mother's features and
mine ; you are he for whom I have longed so
sorely.

PETER.

My father, my great, noble father! Let me
live and fight for you ! Let your cause be mine ;
and be your cause what it may — I know that I
am fighting for the right !

KING SKULE.

[ With a cry of joy.] You trust in me ! You
trust in me !

PETER.
Immovably !

KING SKULE.

Then all is well ; then am I surely saved !
Listen : you shall cast off the cowl ; the Archbishop
shall loose you from your vows ; the King's son
shall wield the sword, shall go forward unwavering
to might and honour.

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 277

PETER.

Together with you, my noble father ! We will
go together .'

KING SKULE.

[Drawing the youth close up to himself.] Ay,
together, we two alone !

INGEBORG.

[To herself.] To love, to sacrifice all and be
forgotten, that is my saga.1

[Goes quietly out by the back.

KING SKULE.

Now shall a great kirig's-work be done in
Norway ! Listen, Peter, my son ! We will
awaken the whole people, and gather it into one ;
the man of Viken and the TrOnder, the Haloga-
lander and the Agdeman, the Uplander and the
Sogndaleman, all shall be o ne great family ! Then
shall you see how the land will come to flourish J

PETER.
What a great and dizzy thought

KING SKULE.
Do you grasp it ?

PETER.
Yes— yes !— Clearly !

KING SKULE.
And have you faith in it ?

As to the earlier text of this scene, see Brandes' Ibsen and
Bjontson (Heinemann, 1899), p. 29.

278 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

PETER.
Yes, yes ; for I have faith in you !

KING SKULE.
[Wildly.] Hakon Hakonsson must die

PETER.
If you will it, then it is right that he die.

KING SKULE.
'Twill cost blood ; but that we cannot heed !

PETER.

The blood is not wasted that flows in your
cause.

KING SKULE.

All the might shall be yours when I have built
up the kingdom. You shall sit on the throne
with the circlet on your brow., with the purple
mantle flowing wide over your shoulders ; all men

in the land shall bow before you [The sounds

of distant horns x are heard.] Ha ! what was
that ? [With a cry.} The Birchleg host ! What

was it Paul Flida said ?

[Rushes towards the back.

PAUL FLIDA.

[Enters and cries*] The hour is upon us, King
Skule !

KING SKULE.

[Bewildered.] The Birchlegs ! King Hakon's
host ! Where are they ?

1 Lur, the long wooden horn still used among the mountains
in Norway.

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 2?9

PAUL FLIDA.

They are swarming in thousands down over the
Ekeberg.

KING SKULE.

Sound the call to arms ! Sound, sound ! Give
counsel ; where shall we meet them ?

PAUL FLIDA.
All the churches stand open for us.

KING SKULE.
Tis of the Birchlegs I ask ?

PAUL FLIDA.
For them all the bridges stand open.

KING SKULE.
Unhappy man, what have you done

PAUL FLIDA.
Obeyed my King !

KING SKULE.

My son ! My son ! Woe is me ; I have lost
your kingdom !

PETER.

No, you will conquer ! So great a king's-
thought cannot die !

KING SKULE.

Peace, peace ! [Horns and shouts are heard,
nearer at hand.] To horse ! To arms ! More is
here at stake than the life and death of men !

[Rushes out by the back ; the others jollonr
him.

280 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

A street in Oslo. On each side, low wooden houses,
with porches. At the back, St. Hallvard's church-
yard, enclosed by a high wall with a gate. On
the left, at the end of the wall, is seen the
church, the chief portal of which stands open.
It is still night ; after a little, the day begins
to dawn. The alarm-bell is ringing : far away
on the right are heard battle-shouts and confused
noises.

KING SKULE'S HORNBLOWER.
[Enters from the right, blows his horn, and shouts]
To arms ! To arms,, all King Skule's men !

[Blows his horn again, and proceeds on his
way ; presently he is heard blowing and
shouting in the next street.

A WOMAN.

[Appears at a house door on the right] Great
God of mercy, what is astir ?

A TOWNSMAN.

[ Who has come out, half dressed, from a house on
the other side of the street.] The Birchlegs are in
the town ! Now will Skule have his reward for
all his misdeeds.

ONE OF SKULE'S MEN.

[Enters with some others, bearing their cloaks and
weapons on their arms, from a side street on the left.]
Where are the Birchlegs ?

ANOTHER OF SKULE'S MEN.
[Coming from a house on the right.] I know
not!

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 281

THE FIRST.

Hist ! Listen ! — They must be down at the
Geite-bridge !

THE SECOND.
Off to the Geite-bridge then !

[They all rush out to the right; a town*,
man comes running in from the same side.

THE FIRST TOWNSMAN.
Hey, neighbour, whence come you ?

THE SECOND TOWNSMAN.

From down at the Lo-river ; there's ugly work
there.

THE WOMAN.

St. Olaf and St. Hallvard ! Is it the Birchlegs,
or who is it ?

THE SECOND TOWNSMAN.

Who else but the Birchlegs ! King Hakon is
with them ; the whole fleet is laying in to the
wharves ; but he himself landed with his best men
out at Ekeberg.

THE FIRST TOWNSMAN.

Then will he take revenge for the slaughter at
Laka!

THE SECOND TOWNSMAN.
Ay, be sure of that.

THE FIRST TOWNSMAN.
See, see ! The Varbselgs are flying already !

282 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

A troop of SKULE'S men enter in full flight, from
the right.

ONE OF THEM.

Into the church ! None can stand against the
Birchlegs as they lay about them to-night.

[The troop rushes into the church and bars
the door on the inside.

THE SECOND TOWNSMAN.

[Looking out to the right.] 1 see a standard far
down the street ; it must be King Hakon's.

THE FIRST TOWNSMAN.
See, see, how the Varbaelgs are running !

A second troop enters from the right.

ONE OF THE FUGITIVES.

Let us take to the church and pray for grace.
[They rush at the door.

SEVERAL VARBAELGS.
'Tis barred ! 'tis barred !

THE FIRST.
Up over Martestokke then !

ANOTHER.
Where is King Skule ?

THE FIRST.

I know not. Away ! yonder I see the Birchlegs
standard !

[They flee past the church, out to the left.

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 283

HAKON enters from the right with his Standard-
bearer, GREGORIUS JONSSON, DAGFINN THE
PEASANT, and several other

DAGFINN.

Hark to the war-cry ! Skule is gathering his
men behind the churchyard.

AN OLD TOWNSMAN.

[Calls from his porch, to HAKON.] Take heed for
yourself, dear my lord ; the Vargbaelgs are fierce,
now they are fighting for life.

HiKON.

Is it you, old Guthorm Erlendsson ? You have
fought both for my father and for my grandfather

THE TOWNSMAN.
Would to God I could fight for you as well.

HAKON.

For that you are too old, and there is no need ;
men pour in upon me from all sides.

DAGFINN.

[Pointing off over the wall to the right.] There
comes the Duke's standard !

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

The Duke himself! He rides his white war-
horse.

DAGFINN.

We must hinder his passage through the gate
here!

284 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

HlKON.

Wind the horn, wind the horn ! [The Hornblorver
does so.] You blew better, you whelp, when you
blew for money on Bergen wharf.

[The Hornblorver winds another blast, louder
than the Jirst ; many men come rushing
in.

A VlRB;ELG.

[From the right, fleeing towards the church, pursued
by a Birchleg.] Spare my life ! Spare my life !

THE BIRCHLEG.

Not though you sat on the altar ! [Cuts him
down.] 'Tis a costly cloak you wear, methinks
'twill fit me well. [/* about to take the cloak, but
utters a cry and casts away his sword.] My lord
King ! Not another stroke will I strike for you !

DAGFINN.
You say that in such an hour as this ?

THE BIRCHLEG.
Not another stroke !

DAGFINN.
[Cuts him down.] Well, you may e'en let it alone.

THE BIRCHLEG.

[Pointi?ig to the dead VarbcelgJ] Methought I
had done enough when I slew my own brother.

[Dies.

HiKON.

His brother !

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 285

DAGFINN.
What ! [Goes up to the Farbcelg's body.

HlKON.

Is it true ?

DAGFINN.
I fear me it is.

HlKON.

[Shaken.] Here see we what a war we are
waging. Brother against brother, father against
son ; — by God Almighty, this must have an end !

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

There comes the Duke, in full fight with Earl
Knut's troop !

DAGFINN.
Bar the gate against him, king's men !

On the other side of the wall, the combatants come in
sight. The Varboelgs are forcing their way
towards the left, driving the Birchlegs back, foot
by foot. KING SKULE rides his white war-horse,
with his sword drawn. PETER walks at his side,
holding the horse's bridle, and with his left
hand uplifting a crucifix. PAUL FLIDA bears
SKULE'S standard, which is blue, with a golden
lion rampant, without the axe.1

KING SKULE.

Cut them down ! Spare no man ! There is
come a new heir 2 to the throne of Norway !

1 The arms of Norway consist of a lion rampant, holding
an axe.

2 Rt nyt kongs-emne.

286 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV

THE BIRCHLEGS.
A new heir, said he ?

HlKON.

Skule Bardsson, let us share the kingdom !

KING SKULE.
All or nought !

HAKON.
Think of the Queen, your daughter !

KING SKULE.

I have a son, I have a son ! I think of none
but him !

HAKON.

I too have a son ; — if I fall the kingdom will be
his!

KING SKULE.

Slay the King- child, wherever you find it ! Slay
it on the throne ; slay it at the altar ; slay it —
slay it in the Queen's arms !

HAKON.
There did you utter your own doom !

KING SKULE.

[Slashing about him.] Slay, slay without mercy !
King Skule has a son ! Slay, slay !

[The fighting gradually passes away to the
left.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.
The Vargbaelgs are hewing their way through !

DAGFINN.
Ay, but only to flee.

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 287

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

Yes, by Heaven., — the other gate stands open ;
they are fleeing already !

DAGFINN.

Up towards Martestokke. [Call? out.] After
them, after them, Earl Knut ! Take vengeance
for the slaughter at Laka !

HAKON.

You heard it : he proclaimed my child an out-
law— my innocent child, Norway's chosen king
after me !

THE KING'S MEN.
Ay, ay, we heard it !

HAKON.
And what is the punishment for such a crime ?

THE MEN.
Death !

HiKON.

Then must he die ! [Raises his hand to make
oath.] Here I swear it : Skule Bardsson shall die,
wherever he be met on unconsecrated ground '

DAGFINN.
'Tis every true man's duty to slay him.

A BIRCHLEG.
[From the left.] Duke Skule has taken to flight i

THE TOWNSFOLK.
The Birchlegs have conquered !

288 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

HiKON.

What way ?

THE BIRCHLEG.

Past Martestokke, up towards Eidsvold ; most
of them had horses waiting up in the streets, else
had not one escaped with his life.

HiKON.

Thanks be to God that has helped us yet again !
Now may the Queen safely come ashore from the
fleet.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

[Points off to the right.] She has already landed,
my loi d ; there she comes !

HiKON.

[To those nearest him.] The heaviest task is yet
before me ; she is a loving daughter ; — listen — no
word to her of the danger that threatens her
child. Swear to me, one and all, to keep ward
over your King's son ; but let her know nothing.

THE MEN.
[Softly.] We swear it.

MARGRETE.

[Enters, with ladies and attendants, Jrom the right.]
Hakon, my husband ! Heaven has shielded you ;
you have conquered and are unhurt !

HiKON.

Yes, I have conquered. Where is the child ?

MARGRETE.

On board the King's ship, in the hands of trust j
men.

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 289

HlKON.

Go more of you thither. [Some of the men go.

MARGRETE.
Hakon, where is— Duke Skule ?

HiKON.

He has made for the Uplands.

MARGRETE.

He lives, then ! — My husband, may I thank God
that he lives ?

HAKON.

[In painful agitation.] Hear me, Margrete : you
have been a faithful wife to me, you have followed
me through good hap and ill, you have been un-
speakably rich in love ; — now must I cause you a
heavy sorrow ; I anUoath to do it ; but I am King,
therefore must I

MARGRETE.
[In suspense.] Has it to do with — the Duke ?

HiKON.

Yes. No bitterer lot could befall me than to
live my life far from you ; but if you think it must
be so after what I now tell you — if you feel that
you can no longer sit by my side, no longer look
at me without turning pale — well, we must even
part — live each alone — and I shall not blame you
for it.

MARGRETE.

Part from you ! How can you think such a
thought ? Give me your hand 1

II T

290 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT IV.

HiKON.

Touch it not ! — It has even now been lifted in
oath

MARGRETE.
In oath ?

HiKON.

An oath that set its sacred seal upon a death-
warrant.

MARGRETE.

[With a shriek.] My father ! Oh, my father !
[Totters; two women rush forward to
support her.

HiKON.

Yes, Margrete — his King has doomed your
father to death.

MARGRETE.

Then well I know he has committed a greater
crime than when he took the kingly title.

HiKON.

That has he ; — and now, if you feel that we must
part, so let it be.

MARGRETE.

[Coming close to him, firmly.] We can nevei
part ! I am your wife, nought else in the world
but your wife '

HiKON.

Are you strong enough ? Did you hear and
understand all ? I have doomed your father.

MARGRETE.

I heard and understood. You have doomed my
father.

ACT IV.] THE PRETENDERS. 291

HlKON.

And you ask not to know what was his crime ?

MARGRETE.
Tis enough that you know it.

HiKON.

But it was to death that I doomed him !

MARGRETE.

[Kneels before the KING, and kisses hix hand.'] My
husband and noble lord, your doom is just !

ACT FIFTH.

A room in the palace at Nidaros. The entrance door is
on the right; in front, on the same side, a window ;
to the left a smaller door. It is after night-fall.
PAUL FLIDA, BARD BRATTE, and several of KING
SKULE'S principal followers are standing at the
window and looking upward.

A MAN-AT-ARMS.
How red it glows !

A SECOND.

It stretcLes over half the sky, like a flaming
sword.

B!RD BRATTE.

Holy King Olaf, what bodes such a sign of
dread ?

AN OLD V!RB^ELG.
Assuredly it bodes a great chief's death.

PAUL FLIDA.

Hakon's death, my good Varbaelgs. He is lying
out in the fiord with his fleet ; we may look for
him in the town to-night. This time, 'tis our turn
to conquer !

B!RD BRATTE.

Trust not to that ; there is little heart in the
host now.

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 293

THE OLD V!RB>BLG.

And reason enough, in sooth ; ever since the
flight from Oslo has King Skule shut himself in,
and will neither see nor speak with his men.

THE FIRST MAN-AT-ARMS.

There are those in the town who know not
whether to believe him alive or dead.

PAUL FLIDA.

The King must out, however sick he may be.
Speak to him, Bard Bratte — the safety of all is at
stake.

B!RD BRATTE.
It avails not; I have spoken to him already.

PAUL FLIDA.

Then must I try what I can do. [Goes to the
door on the left, and knocks.] My lord King,
you must take the helm in your own hands ;
things can no longer go on in this fashion.

KING SKULE.
[Within.} I am sick, Paul Flida.

PAUL FLIDA.

What else can you look for ? You have eaten
nought these two days; you must nourish and
strengthen you

KING SKULE.
I am sick.

PAUL FLIDA.
By the Almighty, 'tis no time for sickness.

294 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V

King Hakon lies out in the fiord, and may at an1
time be upon us here in Nidaros.

KING SKULE.
Strike him down for me ! Slay him and the
King-child.

PAUL FLIDA.
You must be with us, my lord !

KING SKULE.
No, no, no, — you are surest of fortune am
victory when I am not there.

PETER.

[Enters from the nght ; he is in armourJ] The
townsfolk are ill at ease ; they fiock together in
great masses before the palace.

BARD BRATTE.
Unless the King speak to them, they will deserl
him in the hour of need.

PETER.

Then must he speak to them. [At the door on
the Ieft.~\ Father ! The Tronders, your trustiest
subjects, will fall away from you if you give them
not courage.

KING SKULE.
What said the skald ?

PETER.
The skald ?

KING SKULE.

The skald who died for rny sake at Oslo. A

man cannot give what he himself does not possess,

he said.

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 295

PETER.

Then neither can you give away the kingdom ;
for it is mine after you !

KING SKULE.
Now I will come !

PAUL FLIDA.
God be praised !

KING SKULE.

[Comes forward in the doorway ; he is pale and
haggard; his hair has grown very grey] You shall
not look at me ! I will not have you look at me
now that I am sick ! [Goes up to PETER.] Take
from you the kingdom, you say ? Great God in
heaven, what was I about to do !

PETER.

Oh, forgive me ; — I know that what you do is
ever the right.

KING SKULE.

No, no, not hitherto ; but now I will be strong
and sound — I will act !

LOUD SHOUTS.
[Without, on the right.] King Skule ! KingSkule!

KING SKULE.
What is that ?

BARD BRATTE.

[At the window.] The townsmen are flocking
together ; the whole courtyard is full of people ;
— you must speak to them.

KING SKULE.
Do I look like a king ? Can I speak now?

296 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

PETER.
You must, my noble father !

KING SKULE.

Well, be it so. [Goes to the window and draws the
curtain aside, but lets it go quickly and starts back in
terror.] There hangs the flaming sword over me
again !

PAUL FLIDA.

It bodes that the sword of victory is drawn for
you.

KING SKULE.

Ah, were it but so ! [Goes to the window and
speaks out.] Tronders, what would you? Here
stands your King.

A TOWNSMAN.

[Withovt.] Leave the town! The Birchlegs
will burn and slay if they find you here.

KING SKULE.

We must all hold together. I have been
a gracious King to you ; I have craved but small

war-tax

A MAN'S VOICE.

[Down in the crowd] What call you all the
blood, then, that flowed at Laka and Oslo?

A WOMAN.
Give me my betrothed again !

A BOY.
Give me my father and my brother !

ANOTHER WOMAN.
Give me my three sons, King Skule !

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 297

A MAN.

He is no King ; homage has not been done him
on St. Olaf s shrine !

MANY VOICES.

No, no — no homage has been done him on St.
Olaf s shrine ! He is no king !

KING SKULE.

[Shrinks behind the curtain.] No homage !
No king !

PAUL FLIDA.

'Twas a dire mischance that the shrine was not
brought forth when you were chosen.

BARD BRATTE.

Should the townsfolk desert us, we cannot hold
Nidaros if the Birchlegs come.

KING SKULE.

And they will desert us, so long as homage has
not been done to me on the Saint's shrine.

PETER.

Then let the shrine be brought forth, and take
our homage now !

PAUL FLIDA.

[Shaking his head.] How should that be pos-
sible ?

PETER.

Is aught impossible, where he is concerned ?
Sound the call for the folkmote, and bring forth
the shrine !

SEVERAL OF THE MEN.
[Shrinking back.] Sacrilege !

298 THE PRETENDERS [ACT V.

PETER.

No sacrilege ! — Come, come ! The monks are
well disposed towards King Skule; they will

agree

PAUL FLIDA.

That will they not; they dare not, for the
Archbishop,

PETER.

Are you King's men, and will not lend your aid
when so great a cause is at stake i Good, there
are others below of better will. My father and
King, the monks shall give way; I will pray, I
will beseech; sound the summons for the folk-
mote ; you shall bear your kingship rightfully.

[Rushes out to the right.

KING SKULE,

[Beaming with joy.~\ Saw you him ! Saw you
my gallant son ! How his eyes shone ' Yes, we
will all fight and conquer. Hew strong are the
Birchlegs ?

PAUL FLIDA.

Not stronger than that we may master them, if
but the townsfolk hold to us •

KING SKULE.

They shall hold to us. We must all be at one
now and put an end to this time of dread. See
you not that 'tis Heaven's command that we should
end it ? Heaven is wroth with all Norway for the
deeds that have so long been doing. A flaming
sword glows night by night in the sky ; women
swoon and bear children in the churches; a frenzy
creeps abroad among priests and monks, causing
them to run through the streets and proclaim

ACT

THE PRETENDERS.

299

tli it the last clay is come. Ay, by the Almighty,
this shall be ended at one stroke !

PAUL FLIDA.
What are your commands ?

KING SKULE.
All the bridges shall be broken down .

PAUL FLIDA.
Go, and let all the bridges be broken.

[One of the Men-at-arms goes out to the
right.

KING SKULE.

Gather all our men upon the foreshore ; not
one Birchleg shal; set foot in Nidaros.

PAUL FLIDA.
Well spoken, King.

KING SKULE.

When the shrine is borne forth, let the horn
sound to the folkmote. The host and the towns-
folk shall be called together.

PAUL FLIDA.

[To one of the men.] Go forth and bid the
hornblower wind his horn in all the streets.

[The man goes.
KING SKULE.

[Addresses Ike people from the window.] Hold
fast to me, all my sorrowing people. There shall
come peace and light over the land once more,
as in Hakon's first glad days, when the fields
yielded two harvests every summer. Hold fast

300 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

to me ; believe in me and trust to me ; 'tis that
I need so unspeakably. I will watch over you
and fight for you ; I will bleed and die for you,

if need be ; but fail me not, and doubt not !

[Loud cries, as though of terror, are heard among the
people.] What is that ?

A WILD VOICE.
Atone ! Atone !

BARD BRATTE.

[Looks out.] 'Tis a priest possessed of the
devil !

PAUL FLIDA.

He is tearing his cowl to shreds and scourging
himself with a whip.

THE VOICE.
Atone, atone ! The last day is come.

MANY VOICES.

Flee, flee ! Woe upon Nidaros A deed ot
sin !

KING SKULE.
What has befallen ?

BARD BRATTE.

All flee, all shrink away as though a wild beast
were in their midst.

KING SKULE.

Yes, all flee. [With a cry of joy.] Ha! it
matters not. We are saved ! See, see — King
Olaf s shrine stands in the middle of the court-
yard.

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 801

PAUL FLIDA.
King Olaf s shrine !

B!RD BRATTE.
Ay, by Heaven — there it stands !

KING SKULE.

The monks are true to me ; so good a deed
have they never done before !

PAUL FLIDA.
Hark ! the call to the folkmote !

KING SKULE.
Now shall lawful homage be done to me.

PETER.

[Enters from the right.] Take on you the kingly
mantle ; now stands the shrine out yonder.

KING SKULE.

Then have you saved the kingdom for me and
for yourself ; and tenfold will we thank the pious
monks for yielding,

PETER.

The monks, father— you have nought to thank
them for.

KING SKULE
'Twas not they that helped you ?

PETER.

They laid the ban of the Church on whoever
should dare to touch the holy thing.

302 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

KING SKULE. ;> .
The Archbishop then ! At last he gives way,

PETER.

The Archbishop hurled forth direr curses than
the monks.

KING SKULE.

Ah, then I see that I still have trusty men.
You here, who should have been the first to serve
me, stood terrified and shrank back — but down
in the crowd have I friends who for my sake fear
not to take so great a sin upon their souls,

PETER.

You have not one trusty man who dared to
take the sin upon him.

KING SKULE.

Almighty God ! has then a miracle come to
pass ? Who bore out the holy thing ?

PETER.
I, my father !

KIN& SKULE,
[With a shriek.] You!

THE MEN.

[Shrink bade appalled.] Church-robber !

[PAUL FLIDA, B!RD BRATTE, and one or
two others go out.

PETER.

The deed had to be done. No man's faith is
sure ere homage be lawfully done to you. I
begged, I besought the monks ; it availed not.

ACT V.]

THE PRETENDERS.

303

Then I broke open the church door ; none dared
to follow me. I sprang up to the high altar,
gripped the handle, and pressed hard with my
knees; 'twas as though an unseen power gave me
more than human strength. The shrine came
loose, I dragged it after me down the nave, while
the ban moaned like a storm high up under the
vaultings. I dragged it out of the church ; all
fled and shrank from me. When I came to the
middle of the courtyard the handle broke ; here
it is ! [Holds it aloft.

KING SKULE.
[Quietly, appalled.] Church- robber.

PETER.

For your sake ; for the sake of your great king's-
thought ! You will wipe out the sin ; all that
is evil you will wipe away. Light and peace will
follow you ; a glorious day will dawn over the
land — what matter, then, if there went a storm-
night before it ?

KING SKULE.

There was as 'twere a halo round your head
when your mother brought you to me; now I
see in its stead the lightnings of the ban.

PETER.

Father, father, think not of me ; be not afraid
for my woe or weal. Is it not your will I have
fulfilled ? — how can it be accounted to me for a
crime ?

KING SKULE.

I hungered for your faith in me, and your faith
has turned to sin.

304 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

PETER.

[Wildly.] For your sake, for your sake '
Therefore God dare not deny to blot it out !

KING SKULE.

" Pure and blameless/' I swore to Ingeborg —
and he scoffs at heaven !

PAUL FLIDA.

[Entering."] All is in uproar ! The impious
deed has struck terror to your men ; they flee
into the churches.

KING SKULE.
They shall out ; they must out!

B!RD BRATTE.

[Entering.] The townsfolk have risen against
you ; they are slaying the Varbaelgs wherever they
find them, on the streets or in the houses !

A MAN-AT-ARMS.

[Entering.] The Birchlegs are sailing up the
river !

KING SKULE.

Summon all my men together ! None must
fail me here !

PAUL FLIDA.

They will not come ; they are benumbed with
dread,

KING SKULE.

[Despairingly.] But I cannot fall now! My
son must not die with a deadly sin upon his
soul!

ACT V.J THE PRETENDERS. S05

PETER.

Think not of me ; 'tis you alone that are to be
thought of. Let us make for Indherred; there
all men are true to you !

KING SKULE.

Ay, to flight ! Follow me, whoso would save
his life !

B!RD BRATTE.
What way ?

KING SKULE.
Over the bridge !

PAUL FLIDA.
All bridges are broken down, my lord.

KING SKULE.

Broken down ! All the bridges broken,

say you ?

PAUL FLIDA.

Had you broken them down at Oslo, you might
have let them stand at Nidaros.

KING SKULE.

We must over the river none the less ; — we
have our lives and our souls to save ! To flight !
To flight ! [He and PETER rush out to the left.

B!RD BRATTE.

Ay, better so than to fall at the hands of the
townfolk and the Birchlegs.

PAUL FLIDA.

In God's name, then, to flight !

[AIL follow SKULE.

II U

306 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

The room stands empty for a short time ; a distant
and confused noise is heard from the streets;
then a troop of armed townsmen rushes in by
the door on the right.

A TOWNSMAN.
Here ! He must be here !

ANOTHER.

Slay him !

MANY.
Slay the church-robber too !

A SINGLE ONE.
Go carefully ! They may yet bite !

THE FIRST TOWNSMAN.

No need; the Birchlegs are already coming
up the street

A TOWNSMAN.

[Entering.] Too late— King Skule has fled !

MANY.

Whither ? Whither ?

THE NEW-COMER.

Into one of the churches, methinks ; they are
full of the Vargbaelgs.

THE FIRST TOWNSMAN.

Then let us seek for him ; great thanks and
reward will King Hakon give to the man who
slays Skule.

ANOTHER.

Here come the Birchlegs.

ACT V.]

THE PRETENDERS.

S07

A THIRD.
King Hakon himself !

MANY OF THE CROWD.
[Shout] Hail to King Hakon Hakonsson !

HAKON.

[Enters from the right, followed by GREGORIUS
JONSSON, DAGFINN THE PEASANT, and many others.]
Ay, now are you humble, you Tronders; you
have stood against me long enough.

THE FIRST TOWNSMAN.

Mercy, my lord ! Skule Bardsson
bore so hardly on us !

ANOTHER.

[Also kneeling] He compelled us, else had
we never followed him.

THE FIRST.

He seized our goods and forced us to fight for
his unrighteous cause.

THE SECOND.

Alas, noble lord, he has been a scourge to his
friends no less than to his foes.

MANY VOICES.

Ay, ay, — Skule Bardsson has been a scourge to
the whole land.

DAGFINN.
That, at least, is true enough.

HAKON.
Good ; with you townsfolk I will speak later ;

308 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

'tis my purpose to punish sternly all transgres-
sions; but first there are other things to be
thought of. Knows any man where Skule
Bardssoii is?

MANY.
In one of the churches, lord !

HiKON.

Know you that for certain ?

THE TOWNSMEN.
Ay, there are all the Vargbaelgs.

HiKON.

[Softly to DAGFINN.] He must be found ; set a
watch on all the churches in the town.

DAGFINN.

And when he is found, he must straightway be
slain.

HiKON.

[Softly.] Slain ? Dagfinn, Dagfinn, how heavy
a deed it seems !

DAGFINN.
My lord, you swore it solemnly at Oslo.

HiKON.

And all men in the land will call for his death.
[Turns to GREGORIUS JONSSON and says, unheard by
the others.] Go ; you were once his friend ; seek
him out and prevail on him to fly the land.

GREGORIUS.
[Joyfully] You will suffer it, ray lord !

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS.

HiKON.

jFor the sake of my gentle, well-beloved wife.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

But if he should not flee ? If he will not or
cannot ?

HAKON.

Then, in God's name, I may not spare him ;
then must my kingly word be fulfilled. Go !

GREGORIUS JONSSON

I go, and shall do my utmost. Heaven grant I
may succeed. [Goes out by the right.

HAKON.

You, Dagfinn, go with trusty men down to the
King's ship ; you shall conduct the Queen and her
child up to Elgesaeter1 convent.

DAGFINN.
My lord, think you she will be safe there ?

HlKON.

Nowhere safer. The Vargbselgs have shut
themselves up in the churches, and she has
besought to be sent thither; her mother is at
Elgesaeter.

DAGFINN.

Ay, ay, that I know.

HAKON.

Greet the Queen most lovingly from me ; and
greet Lady Ragnhild also. You may tell them
that so soon as the Vargbaelgs shall have made

310 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

submission and been taken to grace, all the bells
in Nidaros shall be rung, for a sign that there has
come peace in the land once more. — You towns-
folk shall reckon with me to-morrow, and punish-
ment shall be meted to each according to his
misdeeds. [Goes with his men.

THE FIRST TOWNSMAN.
Woe upon us to-morrow !

THE SECOND.
We have a long reckoning to pay.

THE FIRST.

We, who have stood against Hakon so long —
who bore our part in acclaiming Skule when he
took the kingly title.

THE SECOND.

Who gave Skule both ships and war-tribute—

who bought all the goods he seized from Hakon's

thanes.

THE FIRST.
Ay, woe upon us to-morrow !

A TOWNSMAN.
[Rushes in from the left.] Where is Hakon?
Where is the King ?

THE FIRST.
What would you with him ?

THE NEW-COMER.
Bring him great and weighty tidings.

MANY.

What tidings ?

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 311

THE NEW-COMER.
I tell them to no other than the King himself.

MANY.
Ay, tell us, tell us !

THE NEW-COMER.
Skule Bardsson is fleeing up toward Elgesaeter.

THE FIRST.
It cannot be ! He is in one of the churches.

THE NEW-COMER.

No, no ; he and his son crossed over the river in
a skiff.

THE FIRST.
Ha, then we can save us from Hakon's wrath !

THE SECOND.

Ay, let us forthwith give him to know where
Skule is.

THE FIRST.

Nay, better than that ; we will say nought, but
ourselves go up to Elgesaeter and slay Skule.

THE SECOND.
Ay, ay — that will we !

A THIRD.

But did not many Vargbaelgs go with him over
,he river?

THE NEW-COMER.
No, there were but few men in the boat.

THE FIRST.
We will arm us as best we can. Oh, now are

312 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

we townsfolk safe enough ! Let no man know
what we are about ; we are enough for the task !
— And now, away to Elgesaeter.

ALL.
[Softly.] Ay, away to Elgesaeter !

[They go out to the left, rapidly but
cautiously.

A Jtr-rvood on the hills above Nidaros. It is moon-
light, but the night is misty, so that the back-
ground is seen indistinctly, and sometimes scarcely
at all. Tree-stumps and great boulders lie round
about. KING SKULE, PETER, PAUL FLIDA, B!RD
BRATTE, and other VARB^ELGS come through the
wood from the left.

PETER.
Come hither and rest you, my father.

KING SKULE.
Ay, let me rest, rest. [Sinks down beside a stone.

PETER.
How goes it with you ?

KING SKULE.

I am hungry ! I am sick, sick ! I see dead
men's shadows !

PETER.

[Springing up.] Help here — bread for the
King!

B!RD BRATTE.
Here is every man king ; for life is at stake.

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 313

Stand up, Skule Bardsson, if you be king ! Lie
not there to rule the land.

PETER.
If you scoff at my father, 1 will kill you .

B!RD BRATTE.

I shall be killed whatever betides ; for me King
Hakon will have no grace ; for I was his thane,
and deserted him for Skule's sake. Think of
somewhat that may save us. No deed so desperate
but I will risk it now.

A ViRBjELG.

Could we but get over to the convent at
Holm?

PAUL FLIDA.
Better to Elgesaeter.

BARD BRATTE.

[With a sudden outburst.] Best of all to go
down to Hakon's ship and bear away the King-
child.

PAUL FLIDA.
Are you distraught ?

BARD BRATTE.

No, no ; 'tis our one hope, and easy enough to
do. The Birchlegs are ransacking every house,
and keeping watch on all the churches ; they
think none of us can have taken flight, since all
the bridges are broken. There can be but few
men on board the ships ; when once we have his
heir in our power, Hakon must grant us peace, else

314> THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

will his child die with us. Who will go with me
to save our lives ?

PAUL FLIDA.
Not I, if they are to be saved in such wise.

SEVERAL.
Not I ! Not I !

PETER.
Ha, but if it were to save my father !

BARD BRATTE.

If you will go with me, come. First I go down
to Hladehammer ; there lies the troop we met at
the bottom of the hill ; they are the wildest dare-
devils of all the Vargbaelgs ; they had swum the
river, knowing that they would find no grace in the
churches. They are the lads for a raid on the
King's ship ! Which of you will follow me ?

SOME.
I! I!

PETER.

Mayhap I too ; but first must I see my father
into safe shelter.

BARD BRATTE.

Ere daybreak will we make speed up the river.
Come, here goes a short way downwards towards
Hlade. [He and some others go out to the right.

PETER.

[To PAUL FLIDA.] Let not my father know aught
of this ; he is soul-sick to-night, we must act
for him. There is safety in Bard Bratte's deed ;

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 315

ere daybreak shall the King-child be in our
hands.

PAUL FLIDA.

To be slain, most like. See you not that it is a

sin

PETER.

Nay, it cannot be a sin ; for my father doomed
the child in Oslo. Sooner or later it must die, for
it blocks my father's path ; — my father has a great
king's-thought to carry through ; it matters not
who or how many fall for its sake.

PAUL FLIDA.

Hapless for you was the day you came to know
that you were King Skule's son. [Listening.]
Hist ! — cast you flat to the ground ; there come
people this way.

[All throw themselves down behind stones
and stumps ; a troop of people, some
riding, some on foot, can be seen indis-
tinctly through the mist and between the
trees ; they come from the left, and pass
on to the right.

PETER.
'Tis the Queen !

PAUL FLIDA.

Ay ; she is talking with Dagfinn the Peasant.
Hush !

PETER.

They are making for Elgesaeter. The King-
child is with them !

PAUL FLIDA.
And the Queen's ladies.

Sl6 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

PETER.

But only four men ! Up, up. King Skule — now
is your kingdom saved !

KING SKULE.

My kingdom ? Tis dark, my kingdom — like the
angel's that rose against God.

A party of MONKS comes from the right.

A MONK.
Who speaks there ? Is it King Skule's men.

PAUL FLIDA.
King Skule himself.

THE MONK.

[To SKULE.] God be praised that we met you,
dear lord ! Some townsmen gave us to know that
you had taken the upward path, and we are no less
unsafe than you in Nidaros.

PETER.

You have deserved death, you who denied to
give forth St. Olaf s shrine.

THE MONK.

The Archbishop forbade it ; but none the less
we would fain serve King Skule ; we have ever
held to him. See, we have brought with us robes
of our Order for you and your men ; put them on,
and then can you easily make your way into one
convent or another, and can seek to gain grace of
Hakon.

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS, 317

KING SKULE.

Ay, let me put on the robe ; my son and I
must stand on consecrated ground. I will to
Elgesaeter.

PETER.

[Softly, to PAUL FLIDA.] See that my father
comes safely thither.

PAUL FLIDA.
Bethink you that there are Birchlegs at

Elgesaeter.

PETER.

But four men ; you may easily deal with them,
and once inside the convent walls they will not
dare to touch you. I will seek Bard Bratte.

PAUL FLIDA.
Nay, do not so !

PETER.

Not on the King's ship, but at Elgesaeter, must
the outlaws save the kingdom for my father.

[Goes quickly out to the right.

A VlRBjELG.

[Whispering to another.] Go you to Elgesaeter
with Skule ?

THE OTHER.
Hist ; no ; the Birchlegs are there I

THE FIRST.

Neither will I go ; but say nought to the
rest.

318 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

THE MONK.

And now away, two and two, — one spearman
and one monk.

ANOTHER MONK.

[Sitting on a stump behind the rest.~\ I will
guide King Skule.

KING SKULE.
Know you the way ?

THE MONK.
The broad way.

THE FIRST MONK.

Haste you ; let us take different paths, and
meet outside the convent gate.

[They go out among the trees, to the right ;
the fog lifts and the comet shows itself,
red and glowing, through the hazy air.

KING SKULE.

Peter, my son ! [Starts backwards.] Ha,

there is the flaming sword in heaven !

THE MONK.

[Sitting behind him on the slump.] And here
am I!

KING SKULE.
Who are you ?

THE MONK.
An old acquaintance.

KING SKULE.
Paler man have I never seen.

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 319

THE MONK.
But you know me not ?

KING SKULE
Tis you that are to lead me to Elgesaeter.

THE MONK.
Tis I that will lead you to the throne.

KING SKULE.
Can you do that ?

THE MONK.
I can, if you but will it.

KING SKULE.
And by what means ?

THE MONK.

By the means I have used before ; — I will take
you up into a high mountain and show you all the
glory of the world.

KING SKULE.

All the glory of the world have I seen ere now,
in dreams of temptation.

THE MONK.
'Twas I that gave you those dreams.

KING SKULE.
Who are you ?

THE MONK.

An envoy from the oldest Pretender in the
world.

320 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

KING SKULE.
From the oldest Pretender in the world ?

THE MONK.

From the first Earl, who rose against the
greatest kingdom, and himself founded a kingdom
that shall endure beyond doomsday .

KING SKULE.
[Shrieks.] Bishop Nicholas !

THE MONK.
[Rising.] Do you know me now ? We were

friends of yore,

and 'tis you that have brought me back ;
once the self-same galley our fortunes bore,
and we sailed on the self- same tack.
At our parting I quailed, in the gloom and

the blast ;
for a hawk in his talons had gripped my soul

fast;

I besought them to chant and to ply the bell,
and I bought me masses and prayers as well, —
they read fourteen, though I'd paid but for

seven ;
yet they brought me no nearer the gates of

heaven.

KING SKULE.
And you come from down yonder ?

THE MONK.

Yes, from the kingdom down yonder I'm faring ;
the kingdom men always so much miscall.

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 821

I vow 'tis in nowise so bad after all,
and the heat, to my thinking, is never past
bearing.

KING SKULE.

And it seems you have learnt skald-craft, old
Bagler-chieftain !

THE MONK.

Not only skald-craft, but store of Latinity !
Once my Latin was not over strong, you know ;
now few can beat it for ease and flow.
To take any station in yonder vicinity,
ay, even to pass at the gate, for credential
a knowledge of Latin is well-nigh essential.
You can't but make progress with so many able
and learned companions each day at the table, —
full fifty ex -popes by my side carouse, and
five hundred cardinals, skalds seven thousand.

KING SKWLE.

Greet your Master and giye him my thanks
for his friendship. Tell him he is the only king
who sends help to Skule the First of Norway.

THE MONK.
Hear now, King Skule, what brings me to

you —

my Master's henchmen down there are legion,
and each up here is allotted a region ;
they gave Norway to me, as the place I best

knew.

Hakon Hakonsson serves not my Master's will ;
we hate him, for he is our foeman still —
so he must fall, leaving you at the helm,
the sole possessor of crown and realm.

ii x

322 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

KINO SKULE.

Ay, give me the crown ! When once I have
that, I will rule so as to buy myself free again.

THE MONK*

Ay, that we can always talk of later—*—
we must seize the time if we'd win the fight.
Kiiig Hakoii's child sleeps at Elgesaeter ;
could you once wrap him in the web of night,
then like storm-swept motes will your foes fly

routed^
then your victory's sure and your kingship

undoubted !

KING SKULE.

Think you so surely that the victory were
mine?

THE MONK.

All men in Norway are sighing for rest ;
the king with an heir l is the king they love

best —
a son to succeed to the throne without

wrangling ;
for the people are tired of this hundred-years'

jangling.

Rouse you, King Skule ! one great endeavour '
the foe must perish to-night or never !
See, to the northward how light it has grown,
see how the fog lifts o'er fiord and o'er valley —
there gather noiselessly galley on galley —
hark ! men are marching with rumble and

drone !

One word of promise, and all is your own —
hundreds of glittering sails on the water,
thousands of warriors hurtling to slaughter.
Et kongs-emne.

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS.

KING SKULE.
What word would you have ?

THE MONK.

For raising you highest, my one condition
is just that you follow your heart's ambition ;
all Norway is yours, to the kingship I'll speed

you,

if only you vow that your son shall succeed
you!

KING SKULE.
[Raising his hand as if for an oath.] My son

shall [Stops suddenly, and breaks forth in

terror.] The church-robber ! All the might to
him ! Ha ! now I understand ; — you seek for his
soul's perdition ! Get thee behind me, get thee
behind me ! [Stretches out his arms to heaven.]
Oh have mercy on me, thou to whom I now call
for help in my sorest need !

[He falls prone to the earth.

THE MONK.
Accursed ! He's slipped through my fingers

at last—

and I thought of a surety I held him so fast !
But the Light, it seems, had a trick in store
that I knew not of— and the game is o'er.
Well, well ; what matters a little delay ?
Perpetuum mobiles well under way ;
my might is assured through the years and

the ages,

the haters of light shall be still in my wages ;
in Norway my empire for ever is founded,
though it be to my subjects a riddle unsounded.

[Coming forward.

324 THE PRETENDER'S. [ACT v.

While to their life-work Norsemen set out
will-lessly wavering, daunted with doubt,
while hearts are shrunken, minds helplessly

shivering,
weak as a willow-wand wind-swept and

quivering, —

while about one thing alone they're united,
namely, that greatness be stoned and despited, —
when they seek honour in fleeing and falling
under the banner of baseness unfurled, —
then Bishop Nicholas 'tends to his calling,
the Bagler-Bishop's at work in the world !

[He disappears in the fog among the trees.

KING SKULE.

[After a short pause, half rises and looks around.]
Where is he, my black comrade ? [Springs up.\
My guide, my guide, where are you ? Gone ! —
No matter ; now I myself know the way, both to
Elgesseter and beyond. [Goes out to the right.

The courtyard of Elgesazler Convent. To the left
Lies the chapel, with an entrance from the court-
yard ; the windows are lighted up. Along tJie
opposite side of the space stretch some lower
buildings ; in the back, the convent wall with a
strong gate, which is locked. It is a clear
moonlight night. Three Birchleg Chiefs stand
by the gate; MARGRETE, LADY RAGNHILD, and
DAGFINN THE PEASANT come out from the
chapel.

LADY RAGNHILD.

[Half to herself.] King Skule had to flee into
the church, you say ! He, he, a fugitive ! begging

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 325

at the altar for peace — begging for his life may-
hap— oh no, no, that could never be ; but God
will punish you who dared to let it come to this !

MARGRETE.

My dear, dear mother, curb yourself; you
know not what you say; 'tis your grief that
speaks.

LADY RAGNHILD.

Hear me, ye Birchlegs ! 'Tis Hakon Hakons-
son that should lie before the altar, and beseech
King Skule for life and peace.

A BIRCHLEG.

It ill beseems loyal men to listen to such
words.

MARGRETE.
Bow your heads before a wife's sorrow !

LADY RAGNHILD.

King Skule doomed ! Look to yourselves, look
to yourselves all of you, when he regains his
power !

DAGFINN.
That will never be, Lady Ragnhild.

MARGRETE.
Hush, hush !

LADY RAGNHILD.

Think you Hakon Hakonsson dare let his
doom be fulfilled if the King should fall into his
hands ?

DAGFINN.

King Hakon himself best knows whether a
king's oath can be broken.

326 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

LADY RAGNHILD.

[To MARGRETE.] And this man of blood have
you followed in faith and love ! Are you your

father's child ? May the wrath of heaven !

Go from me, go from me !

MARGRETE.

Blessed be your lips, although now they curse
me.

LADY RAGNHILD.

1 must down to Nidaros and into the church to
find King Skule. He sent me from him when he
sat victorious on the throne ; then, truly, he had
no need of me — now will he not be wroth if I
come to him. Open the gate for me ; let me go
to Nidaros !

MARGRETE.

My mother, for (rod's pity's sake !

[A loud blocking at the convent gate.

DAGFINN.

Who knocks ?

KING SKULK.
[Without.] A king.

DAGFINN.
Skule Bards son.

LADY RAGNHILD.
King Skule.

MARGRETE.
My father!

KING SKULE
Open, open !

DAGFINN.
We open not here to outlaws.

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. S27

KING SKULE.

"Tis a king who knocks, I tell you ; a king who
has no> roof over his head ; a king whose life is
forfeit if he reach not consecrated ground.

MARGRETE.
Dagfinn, Dagfinn, 'tis my father!

DAGFINN.

[Goes to the gate and opens a small shutter.'] Come
you with many men to the convent ?

KING SKULE.

With all the men that were true to me in my
need.

DAGFINN.
And how many be they ?

KING SKULE.
Fewer than one.

MARGRETE.
He is alone, Dagfinn.

LADY RAGNHILP.

Heaven's wrath fall upon you if you deny him
sanctuary !

DAGFINN.

In God's name, then !

[He opens the gate ; the Birchlegs respect-
fully uncover their heads. KING SKULE
enters the courtyard.

MARGRETE.

[Throwing herself on his neck.] My father !
My dear, unhappy father '

328 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

LADY RAGNHILD.

[Interposing wildly between him and the Birchlegs.]
Ye who feign reverence for him, ye will betray
him, like Judas. Dare not to come near him '
Ye shall not lay a finger on him while I live !

DAGFINN.
Here he is safe, for he is on holy ground.

MARGRETE.

And not one of all your men had the heart to
follow you this night !

KING SKULE.

Both monks and spearmen brought me on the
way ; but they slipped from me one by one, for
they knew there were Birchlegs at Elgesseter.
Paul Flida was the last to leave me ; he came with
me to the convent gate ; there he gave me his last
hand-grip, in memory of the time when there were
Vargbaelgs in Norway.

DAGFINN.

[To the Birchlegs.] Get you in, chieftains, and
set you as guards about the King-child ; I must to
Nidaros to acquaint the King that Skule Bardsson
is at Elgesaeter ; in so weighty a matter 'tis for
him to act.

MARGRETE.

Oh, Dagfinn, Dagfinn, have you the heart for
that ?

DAGFINN.

Else should I ill serve King and land. [To the
men.] Lock the gates after me, watch over the
child, and open to none until the King be come.

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS.

[Softly SKULE.] Farewell, Skule Bdrdsson—
and God grant you a blessed end.

[Goes out by the gat* ; the Birchlegs close it
after him, and go into the chapel.

LADY RAGNHILD.

Ay, let Hakon come ; I will not loose you ; I will
hold you straitly and tenderly in my arms, as I
never held you before.

MARGRETE.
Oh, how pale you are — and aged ; you are cold.

KING SKULE.
I am not cold — but I am weary, weary.

MARGRETE.
Come in then, and rest you •

KING SKULE.
Yes, yes ; 'twill soon be time to rest.

SIGRID.

[From the chapelJ] You come at last, my
brother !

KING SKULE.
Sigrid ! you here ?

SIGRID.

I promised that we should meet when you were
fain of me in your sorest need.

KING SKULE.
Where is your child, Margrete ?

MARGRETE.
He sleeps, in the sacristy.

330 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

KING SKULE.

Then is our whole house gathered at Elgesaeter
to-night.

SIQRID.
Ay, gathered after straying long and far.

KING SKULE.
Hakon Hakonsson alone is wanting.

MARGRETE AND LADY RAGNHILD.
[Cling about him, in an outburst of sorrow.] My
father ! — My husband !

KING SKULE.

[Looking at them, much moved."] Have you
loved me so deeply, you two ? I sought after
happiness abroad, and heeded not the home
wherein I might have found it. I pursued after
love through sin and guilt, little dreaming that
'twas mine already, in right of God's law and
man's. — And you, Ragnhild, my wife, you, against
whom I have sinned so deeply, you take me to
your warm, soft heart in the hour of my sorest
need ; you can tremble and be afraid for the life
of the man who has never cast a ray of sunshine
upon your path.

LADY RAGNHILD.

Have you sinned ? Oh, Skule, speak not so ;
think you I should ever dare accuse you ! From
the first I was too mean a mate for you, my noble
husband ; there can rest no guilt on any deed of
yours.

KING SKULE.

Have you believed in me so surely, Ragnhild ?

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 831

LADY RAGNHILD.
From the first day I saw you.

KING SKULE.

[With animation.] When Hakon comes, I will
beg grace of him ! You gentle, loving women,—
oh, but it is fair to live !

SIGRID.

[ With an expression of terror.] Skule,my brother !
Woe to you if you stray from the path this night.
\_A loud noise without ; immediately after-
wards, a knocking at the gate.

MARGRETE.
Hark, hark ! Who comes in such haste ?

LADY RAGNHILD.
Who knocks at the gate ?

VOICES.

[Without.] Townsfolk from Nidaros! Open!
We know that Skule Bardsson is within !

KING SKULE.
Ay, he is within ; what would ye with him ?

'NoisY VOICES.

[ Without] Come out, come out ! Death to the
evil man !

MARGRETE.

You townsfolk dare to threaten that ?

A SINGLE VOICE.
King Hakon doomed him at Oslo.

332 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

ANOTHER.
'Tis every man's duty to slay him.

MARGRETE.
I am the Queen ; I command you to depart !

A VOICE.

Tis Skule Bardsson's daughter, and not the
Queen, that speaks thus.

ANOTHER.

You have no power over life and death; the
King has doomed him !

LADY RAGNHILD.

Into the church, Skule ! For God's mercy's sake,
let not the bloodthirsty caitiffs approach you !

KING SKULE.

Ay, into the church ; I would not fall at the
hands of such as these. My wife, my daughter ;
meseems I have found peace and light; oh, I
cannot lose them again so soon !

[Moves towards the chapel.

PETER.

[Without, on the right.] My father, my king
Now will you soon have the victory '

KING SKULE.
[With a shriek.] He! He!

{Sinks down upon the church steps.

LADY RAGNHILD.
Who is it?

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 333

A TOWNSMAN.

[Without.] See, see ! the church-robber climb*
over the convent roof !

OTHERS.
Stone him ! Stone him !

PETER.

[Appears on a roof to the right, and jumps down
into the yard.} Well met agaiiij my father !

KING SKULE.

[Looks at him aghast.] You — I had forgotten
you ! Whence come you ?

PETER.
[ Wildly.} Where is the King-child ?

MARGRETE.
The King-child!

KING SKULE.
[Starts up.] Whence come you, I ask ?

PETER.

From Hladehammer ; I have given Bard Bratte
and the Vargbaelgs to know that the King-child
lies at Elgesaeter to-night.

MARGRETE.
OGod!

KING SKULE.
You have done that ! And now ?

PETER.
He is gathering together his men, and they are

334 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

hasting up to the convent. — Where is the King-
child, woman ?

MARGRETB.

[Who has placed herself before the church doorJ\
He sleeps in the sacristy!

PETER.

'Twere the same if he slept on the altar! I
have dragged out St. Olaf s shrine — I fear not to
drag out the King-child as well.

LADY RAGNHILD.

[Calls to SKULE.] And he it is you have loved so
deeply !

MARGRETE.

Father, father ! How could you forget us all
for his sake ?

KING SKULE.

He was pure as a lamb of God when the penitent
woman gave him to me ; — 'tis his faith in me has
made him what he now is.

PETER.

[Without heeding hi?n.] The child must out!
Slay it, slay it in the Queen's anus, — that was
King Skule's word in Oslo !

MARGRETE.
Oh shame, oh shame !

PETER.

A saint might do it unsinning, at my father's
command ! My father is King ; for the great
king's- thought is his !

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 335

TOWNSMEN.

[Knocking at the gate.] Open ! Come out, you
and the church-robber, else will we burn the
convent down !

KING SKULE.

[As ij seized, by a strong resolution.] The great
king's-thought ! 'Tis that has poisoned your
young loving soul ! Pure and blameless I was to
give you back; 'tis faith in me that drives you
thus wildly from crime to crime, from deadly sin
to deadly sin ! Oh, but I can save you yet : I can
save us all ! [Calls toward the background.] Wait,
wait, ye townsmen without there : I come !

MARGRETE.

[Seizing his hand in terror.] My father! what
would you do ?

LADY RAGNHILD.
[Clinging to him with a shriek.] Skule !

SIGRID.

[Tears them away from him, and calls with wild,
radiant joy.] Loose him, loose him, women ; —
now his thought puts forth wings !

KING SKULE.

[Firmly and forcibly, to PETER.] You saw in
me the heaven-chosen one, — him who should do
the great king's- work in the land. Look at
me better, misguided boy ! The rags of king-
ship I have decked myself withal, they were
borrowed and stolen — now I put them off me,
one by one.

S36 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

PETER.

[In dread.] My great, my noble father, speak
not thus !

KING SKULE.

The king's-thought is Hakon's, not mine ; to
him alone has the Lord granted the power that
can act it out. You have believed in a lie ; turn
from me, and save your soul.

PETER.

[In a broken voice.] The king's- thought is
Hakon's !

KING SKULE.

I yearned to be the greatest in the land. My
God ! my God ! behold, I abase myself before thee,
and stand as the least of all men.

PETER.

Take me from the earth, O Lord ! Punish me
for all my sin ; but take me from the earth ; for
here am I homeless now !

[Sinks down upon the church steps.

KING SKULE.

I had a friend who bled for me at Oslo. "He
said : A man can die for another's life-work ; but
if he is to go on living, he must live for his own.
— I have no life-work to live for, neither can I
live for Hakon's, — but I can die for it.

MARGRETE.
Nay, nay, that shall you never do '

KING SKULE.

[Takes her hand, and looks at her tenderly.] Do
you love your husband, Margrete ?

ACT V.J THE PRETENDERS. 337

MARGRETE.
Better than the whole world.

KING SKULE.

You could endure that he should doom me ;
but could you also endure that he should let the
doom be fulfilled ?

MARGRETE.
Lord of heaven, give me strength !

KING SKULE.
Could you,, Margrete ?

MARGRETE.

[Softly and shuddering.] No, no — we should
have to part, — I could never see him more i

KING SKULE

You would darken the fairest light of his life
and of yours ; — be at peace, Margrete, — it shall
not be needful.

LADY RAGNHILD.

Flee from the land, Skule ; I will follow you
whithersoever you will.

KING SKULE.

[Shaking his head.] With a mocking shade
between us ? — To-night have I found you for the
first time; there must fall no shade between me
and you, my silent, faithful wife ; — therefore
must we not seek to unite our lives on this earth.

SIGRID.

My kingly brother ! I see you need me not ; — I
see you know what path to take.

II Y

338 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

KING SKULE.

There are men born to live, and men born to
die. My desire was ever thitherward where God's
finger pointed riot the way for me ; therefore I
never saw my path clear, till now. My peaceful
home-life have I wrecked ; I can never win it back
again. My sins against Hakon I can atone by
freeing him from a kingly duty which must have
parted him from his dearest treasure. The towns-
folk stand without; I will not wait for King
Hakon! The Vargbaelgs are near; so long as I
live they will not swerve from their purpose ; if
they find me here, I cannot save your child, Mar-
grete. — See, look upwards ! See how it wanes
and pales, the flaming sword that has hung over
my head ! Yes, yes, — God has spoken and I have
understood him, and his wrath is appeased. Not
in the sanctuary of Elgesaeter will I cast me down
and beg for grace of an earthly king ; — I must into
the mighty church roofed with the vault of stars
and 'tis the King of Kings I must implore for grace
and mercy over all my life-work.

SIGRID.

Withstand him not ! Withstand not the call
of God ! The day dawns ; it dawns in Norway
and it dawns in his restless soul ! Have not we
trembling women cowered long enough in our
secret rooms, terror-stricken and hidden in the
darkest corners, listening to all the horror that was
doing without, listening to the bloody pageant
that stalked over the land from end to end ! Have
we not lain pale and stone-like in the churches,
not daring to look forth, even as Christ's disciples
lay in Jerusalem on the Great Good Friday when

ACT V.] THE PRETENDERS. 339

the Lord was led by to Golgotha ! Use thy wings,
and woe to them who would bind thee now !

LADY RAGNHILD.

Fare forth in peace, my husband ; fare thither,
where no mocking shade shall stand between us,
when we meet. [Hastens into the chapel.

MARGRETE.

My father, farewell, farewell, — a thousand times
farewell ! [Follows LADY RAGNHILD.

SIGRID.

[Opens the church door and calls in."\ To your
knees, all ye women ! Assemble yourselves in
prayer ; send up a message in song to the Lord,
and tell him that now Skule Bardsson comes
penitent home from his rebellious race on earth.

KING SKULE.

Sigrid, my faithful sister, greet King Hakon
from me ; tell him that even in my last hour I
know not whether he be king-born ; but this I
know of a surety : he it is whom God has chosen.

SIGRID.
I will bear him your greeting.

KING SKULE.

And yet another greeting must you bear. There
dwells a penitent woman in the north, in Halo-
galand ; tell her that her son has gone before ; he
went with me when there was great danger for
his soul.

34-0 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

SlGRID.

That will I.

KING SKULE.

Tell her, it was not with the heart he sinned;
pure and blameless shall she surely meet him
again.

SIGRID.

That will I. [Points towards the background.]
Hark ! they are breaking the lock !

KING SKULE.

[Points towards the chapel.'] Hark ! they are
singing loud to God of salvation and peace '

SIGRID.

Hark again ! All the bells in Nidaros are
ringing !

KING SKULE.

[Smites mournfully.] They are ringing a king
to his grave.

SIGRID.

Nay, nay, they ring for your true crowning!
Farewell, my brother, let the purple robe of blood
flow wide over your shoulders ; under it may all
sin be hidden ! Go forth, go into the great church
and take the crown of life.

[Hastens into the chapel.
[Chanting and bell-ringing continue during
what follows.

VOICES.

[Outside the gate.] The lock has burst ! Force
us not to break the peace of the church '

ACT V.I THE PRETENDERS. S4I

J

KING SKULE.
I come.

THE TOWNSMEN.
And the church-robber must come too

KING SKULE.

Ay, the church-robber shall come too. [Goes
over to PETER.] My son, are you ready ?

PETER.
Ay, father, I am ready.

KING SKULE.

[Looks upwards.] O God, I am a poor man, I
have but my life to give ; but take that, and keep
watch over Hakon's great king's-thought. — See
now, give me your hand.

PETER.
Here is my hand, father.

KING SKULE.
And fear not for that which is now to come.

PETER.
Nay, father, I fear not, when I go with you.

KING SKULE.

A safer way have we two never trodden together.
[He opens the gate ; the TOWNSMEN stand without with
upraised weapons."] Here are we ; we come of our
own free will ; — but strike him not in the face.

[They pass out, hand in hand ; the gate glides
to.

342 THE PRETENDERS. [ACT V.

A VOICE.

Aim not, spare not ; — strike them where ye can

KING SKULE'S VOICE.
Tis base to deal thus with chieftains.

[A short noise of weapons ; then a heavy fall
is heard ; all is still for a 'moment.

A VOICE.
They are dead, both of them !

[The KING'S horn sounds.

ANOTHER VOICE.
There comes King Hakon with all his guard '

THE CROWD.

Hail Hakon Hakonsson ; now have you no longer
any foemen.

GREGORIUS JONSSON.

[Stops a little before the corpses.] So I have come
too late ! [Enters the convent yard.

DAGFINN.

It had been ill for Norway had you come sooner.
[Calls out.] In here, King Hakon !

HAKON.
[Slopping.] The body lies in my way !

DAGFINN.

If Hakon Hakonsson would go forward, he must
pass over Skule Bardsson's body !

HAKON.

ID God's name then !

[Steps over the corpse and comes in,

ACT V.j THE PRETENDERS. S4>3

,DAGFINN.

At last you can set about your king's-work with
free hands. In there are those you love ; in
Nidaros they are ringing in peace in the land ; and
yonder he lies who was your direst foe.

HiKON.

All men misjudged him, reading not his secret

DAGFINN.
His secret ?

HiKON.

[Seizes him by the arm, and says softly.] Skule
Bardsson was God's step-child on earth ; that was
the secret.

[The song of the women is heard more
loudly from the chapel ; all the bells are
still ringing in Nidaros.

THE END.

Printed by BALLANTTNB <5r* Co. LTMITED
Tavistock Street, Covent Garden, London

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY